JP2023080361A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can make it easy to grasp the specific number of measurements at present when a game is played for long term.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1 includes a microcomputer 101 for game control capable of controlling a game, and an image display device 50 capable of executing display. When a jackpot is determined in jackpot determination processing in a normal game state, the microcomputer 101 for game control can control a game state to a jackpot game state, count a total number of launched balls launched by a player, and calculate a difference in the number of ball, which is a difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of launched balls. In the normal game state, the image display device 50 sometimes displays a meter image COM indicating a rough idea on the difference in the number of balls and sometimes does not display the meter image COM. In the normal game state, the image display device 50 makes a display time ratio for displaying the meter image COM greater when the total number of launched balls is equal to or more than 24000, than when the total number of launched balls is less than 24000.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 149

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

As an example of a game machine, a pachinko game machine is provided with a game control means capable of controlling a game, and variably displays an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process. In this type of gaming machine, for example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 below, the game control means counts (measures) the difference number of balls (specific count number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player. . Then, in order not to award excessive prize balls to the player, the game is controlled to be unexecutable when the difference number of balls becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-028948

By the way, there is a case where a player who has been playing the game for a long time in the normal game state but cannot win a game wants to know how much the specific count is at the present moment. However, when the player is in the normal game state, the number of specific counts is not displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for the player to grasp the current specific count number after playing the game for a long time.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a game control means capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying,
The game control means is
When a win is determined in a win determination process in a normal game state, it is possible to control to a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure the number of shot balls fired by the player,
A specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player can be calculated,
The display means is
In the normal game state, there are times when the specific count number is displayed in a comprehensible form and times when the specific count number is not displayed in the comprehension mode,
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls in the normal game state, the specific count number is displayed in the comprehension mode rather than when the number of shot balls is less than the specified number of balls. This game machine is characterized in that it is possible to increase the display time ratio of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the current specific count number after playing the game for a long time.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view which shows a 2nd big prize-winning apparatus etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the back unit when the on-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in a standby state, and (B) is a front view of the back unit when the on-board movable device and the under-board movable device are in operation. It is a front view. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. (A) is a table showing general-purpose random numbers, and (B) is a table showing special-related random numbers. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a ready-to-win determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a prefetch determination table. It is a jackpot game control table. It is explanatory drawing of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the SP reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of movable body production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of operation effects; It is a figure which shows an excessive prize ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of over-prizing abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize notice image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when a special reset switch is pressed down, and (B) is a diagram showing when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of difference ball number measurement processing. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 6 is a flowchart of output processing; 9 is a flowchart of outer-end signal output processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; It is a flow chart of 1m timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart of 10m timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the case where the operation attention calling effect is performed after the over-prize prevention function operates. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a case where an operation warning effect is executed after illegal magnetism is detected; It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the remaining reservation special effect in a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the round alternative production and the time saving mode alternative production in a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the remaining pending|holding alternative special effect in a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in a 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the exclusive production after normal shift in a 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the alternative production after normal transition in a 4th modification. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing in the fifth modified example; FIG. It is a figure which shows the case where a contact alerting effect|effect is performed after the over-prize-balls prevention function operate|moves in a 5th modification. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a case in which a contact alert effect is executed after illegal magnetism is detected in the fifth modified example; It is a figure which shows the case where a game is stopped through probability variable mode alternative production in a 6th modification. It is a diagram showing a case where the game is stopped after the round substitute effect in the seventh modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 8th modification. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a reference number reaching notice effect and a mini screen effect in an eighth modified example; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a reference number reaching notice effect and a mini screen effect in an eighth modified example; It is a figure which shows the blessing production|presentation and the mini screen production|presentation in an 8th modification. It is a jackpot symbol type determination table in the ninth modification. It is a jackpot game control table in the ninth modification. It is a figure which shows the over prize ball prevention function in the 9th modification. It is a figure which shows the next big-hit attainment suggestion production|presentation in a ninth modification, and the mini next big-hit attainment suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 10th modification. It is a diagram showing an over-prized ball abnormality notice effect and a residual ball number notification effect in the tenth modification. It is a diagram showing the setting of the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect and the setting of the residual ball number notification effect at the time of the initial setting after the power is turned on in the eleventh modification. It is a figure which shows the over prize ball abnormal notice effect|action and residual ball number notification effect|effect in the 11th modification. 29 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing in the twelfth modification; FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display mode of the balance display section when a game cannot be played in the twelfth modification; In the twelfth modification, (A) is a diagram showing a ball rental impossibility notification effect when the overprize ball prevention function is activated, and (B) shows a ball rental impossibility notification effect when illegal magnetism is detected. It is a diagram. In the thirteenth modified example, in the customer waiting state, it is a diagram showing the setting of the over-prize abnormal notice effect and the setting of the residual ball number notification effect. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the present number-of-balls suggestion production|presentation in the 14th modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the current ball number suggestion effect and the current ball number adjustment effect in the fourteenth modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the current ball number suggestion effect and the current ball number adjustment effect in the fourteenth modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the current ball number suggestion effect and the current ball number adjustment effect in the fourteenth modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a case where the game is stopped after the game stop notice effect is shown in the fourteenth modification. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a case where an input reflection image is displayed after a character input rendering in the fifteenth modification; FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a case where an input reflection image is displayed during execution of the customer waiting effect in the fifteenth modification; It is a figure which shows special SP reach in a 16th modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a case where a normal cut-in foretelling effect is executed and a case where a special cut-in foretelling effect is executed in the sixteenth modification. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a case where a normal opening effect is executed and a case where a special opening effect is executed in the sixteenth modification; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a case where a normal customer waiting demonstration effect is executed and a case where a special customer waiting demonstration effect is executed in the sixteenth modification; It is a diagram showing a case in which the control is continued to disable the game after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated in the seventeenth modification. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a case where the control that disables the execution of the game continues after the power is turned on after the illegal magnetism is detected in the seventeenth modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of the ball biting prevention mode in the eighteenth modified example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart of power-on processing in the eighteenth modification; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of RAM clear processing in the eighteenth modification; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of ball biting prevention mode processing in the eighteenth modification; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of the ball biting prevention mode in the nineteenth modification; FIG. 20 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing in the nineteenth modification; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of ball biting prevention mode processing in the nineteenth modification; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the production|presentation control board in the 20th modification. FIG. 13 is a threshold setting information pattern determination table in the twentieth modified example; FIG. It is a figure which shows the state by which the test|inspection board|substrate was connected to the production|presentation control board in the 20th modification. In the twentieth modification, (A) is a diagram showing the successful rewriting of the FRAM, and (B) is a diagram showing the unsuccessful rewriting of the FRAM. FIG. 13 is a threshold setting information pattern determination table in the twenty-first modification; FIG. It is a diagram showing the setting of the over-prize abnormal notice effect at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on in the twenty-first modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a threshold notification effect in the 21st modification; FIG. 22 is a table showing the relationship between the notification mode indicated by the threshold notification effect and the threshold setting information pattern in the twenty-first modification; FIG. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 22nd modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 22nd modification. 29 is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing in the 22nd modification. 29 is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing in the 22nd modification. 29 is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing in the 22nd modification. 29 is a flowchart of difference ball number measurement processing in the 22nd modification. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing in the 22nd modification. 29 is a flowchart of game stop determination processing in the 22nd modification. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of RAM clear processing in the twenty-second modification; FIG. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 23rd modification. It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the 23rd modification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the number of operation timing difference balls in the 24th modification. It is a figure which shows the flow of the command of a game control board, a payout control board, and an effect control board at the normal time in the 25th modification. In the twenty-fifth modification, (A) is a diagram showing a large winning opening winning effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a lower tray full error effect. In the twenty-fifth modification, (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of abnormal ball over prize, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of magnetic detection abnormality. It is a diagram showing the flow of commands of the game control board, the payout control board, and the effect control board when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated in the twenty-fifth modification. In the twenty-fifth modification, (A) is a diagram showing a large winning prize effect after the over-prize prevention function is activated, and (B) is a bottom tray full error effect after the over-prize prevention function is activated. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; It is a diagram showing the flow of commands of the game control board, the payout control board, and the effect control board when illegal magnetism is detected in the twenty-fifth modification. 29 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing in the twenty-fifth modification; 29 is a flowchart of command processing after the game is stopped in the twenty-fifth modification; In the twenty-sixth modification, (A) is a perspective view showing an image display device and an illumination display device, and (B) is a sectional view of the illumination display device. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a logo illumination appearance effect in the twenty-sixth modification; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the production|presentation control board in the 26th modification. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing initial light emission of illumination in the twenty-sixth modification; FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of a game board in a twenty-sixth modification; It is a figure which shows the lower left part of a game board in the 26th modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a board collation switch in the twenty-sixth modification; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a board incompatibility notification effect in the twenty-sixth modification. 29 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing in the twenty-sixth modification; FIG. 22 is a flowchart of processing when the sub power is turned on in the twenty-sixth modification; FIG. 29 is a flowchart of image control main processing in the twenty-sixth modification; 29 is a flowchart of image power-on processing in the twenty-sixth modification; 29 is a flowchart of 4 ms timer interrupt processing in the twenty-sixth modification; In the twenty-seventh modification, (A) is a diagram showing a big prize winning effect after detection of illegal magnetism, and (B) is a diagram showing a lower tray full error effect after detection of illegal magnetism. be. It is a diagram showing the flow of commands of the game control board, the payout control board and the effect control board when illegal magnetism is detected in the twenty-eighth modification. It is a diagram showing the flow of commands of the game control board, the payout control board, and the effect control board when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated in the twenty-ninth modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a customer waiting effect in the thirtieth modification; FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a case where a customer waiting short meter effect is executed while a customer waiting effect is being executed in the thirtieth modification. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a case where a customer waiting long meter effect is executed while the customer waiting effect is being executed in the thirtieth modified example; FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a case where a varying meter effect is executed during execution of a variable effect in the thirtieth modified example. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the thirtieth modified example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart of a variation effect start process in the thirtieth modified example; 29 is a flow chart of a variation effect start process in the thirtieth modified example; 29 is a flowchart of customer waiting effect setting processing in the thirtieth modification; In the thirtieth modification, (A) is a variable short meter effect execution lottery table, and (B) is a variable long meter effect execution lottery table. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number in a modification. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference ball number is displayed with a 7 segment display in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case where a residual ball number suggestion effect and a residual ball number adjustment effect are executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the press promotion effect|action and the reach|attainment effect|action in a modification. In the modification, (A) is a variable short meter effect execution lottery table, (B) is a variable long meter effect execution lottery table, and (C) is a variable super long meter effect lottery table. In the modification, (A) is a diagram showing a meter image shown during execution of the customer waiting effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a meter image shown during execution of the variable effect. It is a front view showing an enclosed pachinko game machine in which a 6-digit 7-segment display is arranged in a modified example. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum difference number of balls in a modification. It is a figure which shows transition of the increase number from the minimum number of difference balls in a modification.

EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiment of the gaming machine of this invention is concretely described with reference to drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, by describing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, or a member, the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code is omitted or may be abbreviated. Further, in any flow chart described later, a plurality of processes in a plurality of arbitrary steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or executed in parallel as long as there is no contradiction in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Game Machine The pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. and

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22.例文帳に追加Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board YU, which will be described later, is mounted, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 mounted on the game board mounting frame 2A faces the transparent board 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in a game hall (game parlor), a player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 visually recognizes the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. be able to. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball for firing the game ball (the amount that the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k. A lower decorative body 36 projecting greatly forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper plate 34 is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. A lower tray 35 is provided in the center of the lower part of the front face of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34 .

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as “normal button”) 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 formed so as to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like. Although not shown in FIG. 1, a select button (cross key) for selecting up, down, left, or right is provided on the left side of the normal button 40 .

On the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36, on the right side of the normal button 40, there are provided a balance display portion 61, a ball lending button 62 that can be pressed, and a return button 63 that can be pressed. The balance display portion 61 displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the card unit CU. The ball lending button 62 (operating means) enables ball lending up to the number shown in the balance display section 61 by being pressed. When the return button 63 is pressed, the card containing the numerical information (information on the number of game balls that can be rented) shown in the balance display portion 61 is taken out from the card unit CU. .

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 formed so as to protrude forward from the upper surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 (sound output means) consists of a left speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a right speaker 52R arranged on the right side. Frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 on the front side of the lower decorative body 36 . Further, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached as a performance device for increasing the interest in the game on the upper side of the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m. The frame movable device 58 is composed of a left frame movable device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R arranged on the right side.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board YU will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG. The game board YU has a game board 1 and a back unit 1U attached to the back side (back side) of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is composed of a transparent synthetic resin board. Approximately in the center of the game board 1 is formed an opening 1A which is approximately circular in front view. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B for defining a game area 6 in which game balls can flow down is formed so as to protrude forward. A substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is also formed outside the inner wall portion 1B so as to protrude forward.

A game area 6 surrounded by an inner wall portion 1B, an outer wall portion 1C, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall portion 1B and the outer wall portion 1C.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a large number of game pegs (not shown). The game nail is a game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 through a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, In addition, a route is configured to moderately guide the player to the second prize-winning port 15 or the like.

In the game area 6, there is a first start winning device 11D formed with a first start opening 11 into which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device 11D that enables or disables entry into the second start opening 12. A device (a so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided.

The first start winning device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball enters. The winning of the game ball into the first starting port 11 is the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of special figure 1 related random numbers described later: hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 lottery ”) and the variable display of special figure 1 (identification pattern). Also, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D has an actuatable electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position where entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 is impossible or extremely difficult. Then, when the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the “open state” of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the fact that the electric tube opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D. In addition, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also called "the electric tube 12D opens", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is called "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

The winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of special figure 2 related random numbers described later: hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 lottery ”) and the variable display of special figure 2 (identification pattern). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a general prize winning opening 10 into which game balls can enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. Passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") lottery (that is, normal pattern random number acquisition and determination: hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery") and the variable display of the normal pattern. It's becoming The power chew 12D is released by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game accompanied by the opening of the electric chew 12D.

Also, the game area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first big winning hole 14 into which a game ball can enter.

The first big prize winning device 14D has a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated in an open state and a closed state. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to open/close the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state to block the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the first big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the game ball to the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a second big winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second big winning opening 15 into which a game ball can enter. The second big winning device 15D has an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big winning hole 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in an open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second big winning opening 15 is also called "closed state". In this manner, the second big winning opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When the game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the second big winning device 15D will be described in detail. Inside the second big winning device 15D, a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a capable of detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 and allowing the game ball to pass downward is provided. It is

A specific area 16 through which a game ball can pass (enter) and a non-specific area 17 are provided in the downstream area of the second big winning hole sensor 15a. A game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 15a is sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The distribution device 16D includes a distribution member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving a distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k in the front view of FIG. 3A) that prevents passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the specific region 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific region 16 directly above it). When the sorting member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through the non-specific area 17 . The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning hole 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: swinging in the front view of FIG. The left end of the dividing member 16k is positioned slightly to the left of the right end of the specific region 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific region 16 directly above it, and the specific region 16 is open directly above it). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning port 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can be changed to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect game balls passing through (entering) the respective areas 16 and 17 and pass the game balls downward. .

Only one of the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D can be provided as long as the game is not hindered.

Also, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging the game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 capable of emitting light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is called "right hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, a flow path through which a game ball can flow down when a game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and a game ball flows down when a game ball is shot right-handed. A possible flow path is referred to as the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of game nails and the like.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right, thereby passing the gate 13, the second starting port 12, the first big winning port 14, or the second It is possible to aim to win a prize to the big prize opening 15.例文帳に追加

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first big winning opening 14, and second big winning opening 15) It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

In addition, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the special figure 1, a special figure 2 indicator 81b that variably displays the special figure 2, and a general figure that is variably displayed. A normal map display 82 is included. In addition, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the number of special figures 1 pending (U1: the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), which will be described later. And the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b which displays the special figure 2 reservation number (U2: the number that the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b is withheld) which will be described later is included.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 as a trigger. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively called the special figure, and the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 are collectively called the special figure lottery. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure indicator 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The special figure to be stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of kinds of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (a special figure of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15) are opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed.

The special figure indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special drawing indicator 81 displays "□□■■□□■■" (□: lighting, ■ : off), the jackpot pattern consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, the special figure indicator 81 displays a losing pattern composed of lighting only the rightmost LED, such as "■■■■■■■□". do. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, various random numbers (numerical information and determination information) for performing special lottery etc. example) may be acquired. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers obtained by winning (entering the game ball) to the first start port 11 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and winning the game ball to the second start port 12 Various random numbers obtained by (entry) are referred to as "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 relation random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 relation random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. To the number of special figures 1 reservation that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figures 1 reservation) and the number of special figures 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figures 2 reservations) can set an upper limit (for example, 4). In the following, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation", and the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". In addition, the special figure 1 relation random number and the special figure 2 relation random number are collectively referred to as "special figure relation random number".

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, specifically, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game, the variable display of the special figure (or the right of the special figure lottery) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, the digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special figure relation random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

And the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83 . Each of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the special figure reservation number by lighting the LED for the special figure reservation number. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The normal map to be stopped and displayed (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal map selected from a plurality of types of normal map lottery. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (predetermined stop mode normal pattern, ie, winning pattern), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The general pattern indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the general pattern according to the results of the general pattern lottery by its lighting mode. When the result of the normal pattern lottery is winning, the normal pattern display 82 displays a winning pattern composed of lighting of both LEDs such as "□□" (□: lighting, ■: lighting off). In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, a losing pattern composed of only the right LED lighting is displayed, such as "■□". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

Also, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a general pattern lottery may be obtained. This random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, which will be described later, on condition that the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is not being executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, four) to the number of normal pattern reservations (the number of normal pattern reservations) that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106 . In the following, the normal symbol random number obtained by passing the game ball through the gate 13 is also referred to as "normal symbol related random number".

Next, the back unit 1U attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The back unit 1U is formed by unitizing a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. The back unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on-board movable device") 55, and a second panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "under-board movable device") 56. FIG.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display device, etc., and has a display screen 50a capable of displaying patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is arranged in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k. The underboard movable device 56 is arranged in front of the display screen 50a, is movable along the display screen 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5(A) schematically shows how the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 drives, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered with the lowered upper board movable body 55k or the raised lower board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided on the game board YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. A game control board (hereinafter also referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls game profits (progress of the game), game effects according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 (special figure fluctuation effect, holding effect, jackpot game effect), customer waiting effect, and operation promotion effect that encourages operation during the period in which the operation of the normal button 40 or the special button 41 is valid (operation valid period). ) 120, and a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. are provided further behind the image display device 50 (see FIG. 8). The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls games. In addition, the effect control board 120 can be positioned as a effect control section that controls the effect together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161, which will be described later. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect means (the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the movable devices 55, 56, etc.). It is sufficient if the waiting effect and the operation promotion effect can be controlled.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the performance control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices through these boards. The power board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed. RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means), when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as high probability state, the number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the big hit) to the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. can be

A backup power supply circuit 192 is also provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered off. A power switch 193 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning the power switch 193 ON or OFF, the power is turned on and off. In addition, a backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided in the main control board 100, or a backup power supply circuit for the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 may be provided in the effect control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like. The game RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage unit 107, and the non-erasable storage unit 107 is provided with a total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, a total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and a difference number storage unit 107c. It is In the non-erasing storage unit 107, the game CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents even if the RAM clear is executed. The non-erasing storage unit 107 (total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, difference number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and has a total of 32 lighting (emitting) portions. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 are composed of eight lighting portions (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so as to represent numbers "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as operating means when setting a set value corresponding to the probability of judging a big win. The inside of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pushing down the RAM clear switch 191, the setting mode is shifted to a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can do. Then, in this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko game machine PY1, there is only one set value, ie, "1". Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". When the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position while the setting mode is set, the setting change mode is terminated and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be detailed later. A game I/O (Input/Output) port unit 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals is mounted on the main control board.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11, and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12. A starting opening sensor, a general winning opening sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, a gate sensor that detects a gaming ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), And, a non-specific area sensor 17a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17) is included.

Further, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor for detecting all game balls flowing down the game area 6 (total number of shot balls). Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the outlet sensor is provided in the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter game balls into various prize winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14. FIG. Each of the sensors described above outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected.

The various sensors MS include a front door open sensor for detecting opening of the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor for detecting opening of the front frame 23m with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 . When the front frame sensor detects that the front frame 23m is open, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric throttle solenoid for driving the electric throttle opening/closing member 12k of the electric throttle 12D, and a normal AT opening/closing member 14k for the first prize winning device 14D. 1 big winning opening solenoid, the second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and the distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D are included. . The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 is connected with a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a payout device 73. In addition, a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 171 capable of executing control processing related to the payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 includes a payout ROM storing a program for controlling payout, a payout RAM used as a work memory, a payout CPU executing the program stored in the payout ROM, data and signals. A payout I/O port section (input/output circuit) for inputting/outputting is included.

The payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) uses the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. , Paying out rental balls (ball lending). For example, when a game ball enters (wins) the first start hole 11, a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. FIG. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs to the payout control board 170 a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11 . In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal uses the payout device 73 based on the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout ROM. Prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out. At this time, the game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor for counting, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Also, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid so that the game ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Also, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160 . That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 . The external terminal board 160 transmits an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the game state, and information indicating an error or irregularity (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Also, the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, but the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

A balance display board 172 is connected to the payout control board 170 . The balance display board 172 controls the display of the number (the number of game balls that can be rented) displayed on the balance display section 61 . That is, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into the card unit CU, a signal including information on the number of game balls that can be rented is transmitted to the balance display board 172 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the balance display board 172 causes the balance display section 61 to display a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented. Thus, if a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented is displayed in the balance display section 61, it means that the ball can be rented.

Further, a ball lending button sensor 62a (see FIG. 6) capable of detecting pressing operation on the ball lending button 62 is provided. The ball lending button sensor 62 a is connected to the card unit CU via the balance display board 172 and the payout control board 170 . Therefore, when the ball lending button sensor 62a detects a pressing operation on the ball lending button 62, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. FIG. As a result, the card unit CU uses the payout control board 170 and the payout device 73 to lend the game balls. In other words, the payout control microcomputer 171 (ball lending control unit) executes lending ball payout (ball lending) using the payout device 73 on the basis of receiving the ball lending signal from the card unit CU. The payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171 ) also transmits a signal including information on the number of game balls lent to the balance display board 172 . As a result, the balance display board 172 newly displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented at the present time.

A return button sensor 63a (see FIG. 6) capable of detecting a pressing operation on the return button 63 is also provided. The return button sensor 63 a is connected to the card unit CU via the balance display board 172 and the payout control board 170 . Therefore, when the return button sensor 63a detects a pressing operation on the return button 63, the detection signal is input to the card unit CU via the payout control board 170. FIG. As a result, the card unit CU takes out a card containing information on the number of game balls that can be rented at the present time. At this time, the balance display board 172 displays "0" in the balance display section 61 for a predetermined second, indicating that there are no game balls that can be rented. do not display.

In addition, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the main control board 100 . In addition, the connection between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 120 . That is, between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. In the effect control microcomputer 121, an effect ROM 123 storing programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses by the main control board 100, an effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123 are stored. It includes a performance CPU 122 that executes the program.

Further, the effect ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Also, the effect control board 120 is mounted with an effect I/O port unit 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 . The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 is operated by the power supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply, the power board 190 operates. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. In addition, a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided in the performance control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 is based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays an image. 50 display control is performed. Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It has Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including background images) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display screen 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, effect sound, etc. from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161. to output

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control circuit 161 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the effect control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. In addition, the effect control board 120 performs lighting control of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100 and the like.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a, a special button detection switch 41a, and a select button detection switch. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal to the effect control board 120 according to the detected content. Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a handle rotation detection sensor 42a. The handle rotation detection sensor 42a is provided inside the handle 72k to detect (detect) a rotation operation of a person such as a player on the handle 72k (see FIG. 1). Therefore, when the handle 72 k is rotated, the handle rotation detection sensor 42 a detects the rotation operation to the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 120 . The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the production control board 120 include motors for driving the on-board movable device 55, the under-board movable device 56, the frame movable device 58, etc. It is possible to cause a predetermined operation to be performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device 55, 56, 58, and controls the operation of each movable device 55, 56, 58 via the lamp control circuit 151. do. The type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various lamps SL connected to the effect control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc., and light each lamp. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, light emission color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform lighting control of each lamp and operation control of each movable device 55 , 56 , 58 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. Also, the type and number of lamps connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts a normal drawing lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a general-pattern related random number when the general-pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in performing such a series of games (normal-pattern lottery, variable display of the general-pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), normal pattern random numbers are included in general pattern related random numbers to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using one or a plurality of hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. That is, the game state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the time-saving state hit determination table (for time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number) is distributed to the hit and the loss, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for performing the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. If the result of the hit determination is hit, basically, the hit pattern is displayed in a variable display of the normal pattern and stopped. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. Also, the probability of winning a prize can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal figure fluctuation Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination is determination for determining a normal figure fluctuation pattern using one or a plurality of normal figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 11(B). The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the short time state ( It is possible to distinguish between time-saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table).

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure of loss (losing general figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be a normal figure fluctuation pattern, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning pattern For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed For the variable display of the figure, a normal figure variation pattern is determined in which the normal figure variation time is, for example, 5 seconds. The variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . Moreover, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived).

Auxiliary games include elements (auxiliary game components) that constitute the auxiliary game, that is, various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a game state. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 11(C) based on the game state. The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Also, the number of times of opening and the opening time in each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time (time (for example, 0.08 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is held for a second opening time longer than the first opening time (a time (for example, 3.00 seconds) that makes it easy to win the game ball with the electric chew 12D). Open. In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as "long opening auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts lottery of the special figure 1 when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the lottery result of the special figure 1 has a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 has a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 11 is called "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole 12 is called "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a special figure-related random number when the starting condition is established, and performs the series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of the special figure, jackpot game, game state setting). Various decisions are made on random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for judging the jackpot symbol type. A reach random number is a random number for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Note that the random number is also called determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or a plurality of jackpot determination tables as shown in FIG. 12(A). The game state includes a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether it is the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as the jackpot determination table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table). It is possible.

In each big hit determination table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number value) is distributed to the big hit and loss, which are the results of the big hit determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with a big win determination table to determine whether it is a big win or a loss. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the probability of winning the jackpot.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination The jackpot pattern type determination is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, uses one or more jackpot pattern type determination tables as shown in FIG. ) is a judgment for determining It is possible to associate the content of the big win, in other words, the constituent elements of the big win including the game privilege given to the player, for each type of the big win symbol.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting port where the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that generated the jackpot symbol type determination) was performed. is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the jackpot used when performing the variable display of the special figure 2 It is possible to distinguish from the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot patterns, and in each jackpot pattern type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is distributed to the jackpot pattern type that is the result of the jackpot pattern type determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random numbers are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the allocation rate of the jackpot pattern type by the jackpot pattern type determination for the special pattern 1 is set to 50% for the jackpot pattern X and 50% for the jackpot pattern Y, and for the special pattern 2 It is possible for the jackpot pattern Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type determined by the jackpot pattern type determination 100%. In this way, the lottery of the special figure 1 performed by winning the game ball in the first start port 11 and the lottery of the special figure 2 performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 12, the jackpot pattern type can be made different.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, using one or more reach determination table as shown in FIG. This is a judgment for determining whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the reach determination table, the reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and the reach determination table (time-saving reach determination table) used in the time-saving state are distinguished. Is possible.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach establishment random value) is distributed to "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach). As shown in FIG. 12 (C), the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving can be different in the number of reach establishment random numbers that are determined as "with reach (generate reach)". It is possible. In the following, "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is referred to as "losing with reach", and "no reach (not generating reach)". )” is sometimes referred to as “no reach”.

3-2-4. Toku-zu variation Toku-zu variation pattern determination uses one or more special symbol variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table) as shown in FIGS. It is a determination for determining (special figure variation pattern), and is performed in any case of a big hit or a loss as a result of the big hit determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and production flow (production content) of special figure fluctuation production, it is possible to include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination. As a special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns with different identification information, respectively, and the number can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined, in other words, the type of starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination is performed. That is, as a special figure variation pattern determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and a special figure 2 variable display It is possible to distinguish the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) used when.

Each special figure variation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. That is, as a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 used in the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with the jackpot determination result, the jackpot symbol type determination result, or the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), a reach loss, and a reach no loss. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), reach with loss, and reach without loss.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss.

Then, the variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . Then, in the special figure variable display, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result (special figure lottery result), the next special figure variable display is not performed immediately, and the jackpot game is executed subsequently. be.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation production as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure fluctuation pattern can be named in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production. be. For example, the special figure variation pattern related to the jackpot is called "jackpot variation". On the other hand, in the loss with reach, SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed. The figure fluctuation pattern is "L loss fluctuation", and in the loss with reach, the special fluctuation pattern where the special figure fluctuation effect ends with N reach, which is a type of reach, is "N loss fluctuation", and the loss without reach Such a special figure variation pattern is referred to as "normal loss variation".

3-2-5. Prefetching Determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs prefetching determination using one or a plurality of prefetching determination tables as shown in FIG. For the look-ahead determination, for example, determination of whether or not the special symbol random number is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, determination of which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, special There is a determination of which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The look-ahead determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the lookahead determination table, a lookahead determination table (first lookahead determination table) when winning the first start opening 11 and a lookahead determination table (second lookahead determination table) when winning the second start opening 12 are used. , can be distinguished.

Also, the look-ahead determination table can be associated with the game state. That is, as the prefetching determination table, the prefetching determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving prefetching determination table) and the prefetching determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving prefetching determination table) are distinguished. Is possible.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the time-saving state, and the second look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state. It is possible to distinguish between this and the second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be described. The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and the time between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the first round game. It includes an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending. Moreover, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. In addition, below, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning port (first big winning port 14 or second big winning port 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or a plurality of jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. 16 after the stop display of the special figure. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As jackpot games, it is possible to control one type or a plurality of types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16, from 1R to 9R, the round game in which the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. A round game to open is performed. Then, in 10R (final round), there is a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. done. Further, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning opening sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning openings 14 and 15 elapses, End the round game.

Also, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, it is possible to perform the jackpot game using both the first big winning port 14 and the second big winning port 15 or using only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be described in detail. Since the specific area 16 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 16k, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. FIG. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k is also referred to as "opening/closing mode of the specific region 16". In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operation mode (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific region 16), but a constant operation mode of the distribution member 16k (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific region 16), The difficulty (easiness) of entering the game ball into the specific area 16 in the big win game is set in combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big winning hole 15 in the big win game. Note that hereinafter, the open state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V open”.

The distribution solenoid 16s is energized for 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening is started, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15 and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state Due to the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15, the time and Due to the timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). Thus, in the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening and closing member with the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage") The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are operated in the jackpot game in which the 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in the second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. Thus, the big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V long open pattern is called "V long big hit". On the other hand, a big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V short open pattern is called "V short big hit".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine PY1 has a "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state", "high probability high base game state" and " It is possible to make it into any game state of "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base game state" is "low probability low base state", "low probability high base game state" is "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base game state" is "high probability". "Low base state" and "high probability high base gaming state" can be abbreviated as "high probability high base state", respectively. As states constituting the game state, there are a state related to the probability of being determined as a "big win" in the big win determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low-probability low-base game state" or "low-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination is a normal probability. The high-probability state is set in the "high-probability low-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal-probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, it is possible to switch to a high probability state by passing a game ball through the specific area 16 in a jackpot game. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high-probability state can be switched from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state by performing a predetermined number of jackpot determinations without winning the jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in the "low probability low base game state", "high probability low base game state" or "jackpot game state". The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and compared to the non-time-saving state, the game state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time (eg, 3.00 seconds) is longer than the opening time (eg, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. Also, in the time saving state, using the special figure variation pattern determination table that is determined so that the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination is It is also possible to have it performed (see FIGS. 13 and 14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

Moreover, compared with a non-work-saving state, a time-saving state can make normal figure fluctuation|variation time short easily. For example, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-working time saving state is determined. Therefore, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time is greater in the time saving state.

Moreover, the time saving state can be made easier to be determined to be a hit in the hit determination as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability (eg, 59936/65536) higher than the probability (eg, 6600/65536) determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state has a larger number of hit determinations per unit time.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and the game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot election without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time-saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state by performing a predetermined number of big win determinations without winning the big win or by winning the next big win.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win a win than in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. There are three points about the game related to the normal figure, which are set to be advantageous to the player. However, the points that are set in favor of this player may be some of them.

In addition, the game state after the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low-probability low-base game state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time-saving state are set. This game state is also called "normal game state". In addition, in the "jackpot game state", the hit determination is performed but the jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time-saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. As for the game state, it is possible to use all or part of the game states described above. In addition, as a game state other than the normal game state, "high probability high base state", "high probability low base state", "low probability high base state", "high probability state", "time saving state", "high base state , and the "jackpot gaming state" can be called a "privilege gaming state" in which a privilege is given to the player.

4. Main effects by game machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special variable production is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure fluctuation production and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 18A-1, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effects of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume setting of sound output from the speaker 52, brightness setting of the display screen 50a (“light amount setting”), frequency setting of effects to be executed (“effect setting”), and the like.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "low probability low base game state" and indicates that it is a non-time saving state. In the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18(B-1), a first normal effect mode in which a background image (daytime normal background image G102) representing daytime mountain scenery is displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 18B-2, a second normal effect mode in which a background image (ordinary evening background image G103) representing the scenery of the mountains in the evening is displayed on the display screen 50a; As shown in -3), there is a third normal effect mode in which a background image (normal nighttime background image G104) representing a mountain view at night is displayed on the display screen 50a. It can be switched as one condition that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed once or more times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal front-stage performance mode before reach is established and a normal rear-stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the normal front stage production mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a. A custom background image will be displayed. The effect in which the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, or the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as a "normal mode effect." A player watching the normal mode presentation can understand that the game state is controlled to the normal game state (low-probability low-base game state). In addition, the normal production mode is set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the "normal mode production" is executed even when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability low base game state". You can do so. Alternatively, a special effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18(B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation performance mode includes a probability variation front stage performance mode before the reach is established and a probability variation rear stage performance mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the variable probability front-stage production mode, the background image G105 for probability variation is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the variable probability rear-stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. The effect in which the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as "probability variation mode effect (advantageous effect)". A player watching the variable probability mode effect can understand that the game state is controlled to a high probability high base state (high probability state and time saving state).

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when a special figure variation performance is being performed in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is a performance mode indicating a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B-5, a background image representing the sky (background image for time saving G106) is displayed on the display screen 50a. In addition, the number of times of variable display of special symbols until the end of the low-probability base state is shown in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, the time reduction performance mode includes a time reduction front stage performance mode before reach is established and a time reduction rear stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the time saving front stage production mode, the background image G106 for time saving is displayed on the display screen 50a, but in the time saving rear stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. The effect in which the time saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 50a can be referred to as "time saving mode effect". A player watching the time-saving mode performance can understand that the game state is controlled to a low-probability-high base state (normal probability state and time-saving state).

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening production is performed in which a winning image G108 is displayed. During the round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C-2), a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds, a winning ball number image G110 indicating the number of winning balls paid out, and a town are displayed on the display screen 50a. A round effect (advantageous effect) is performed in which the background image (background image for round G114) representing the character is displayed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18 (C-3), the display screen 50a displays an ending image G111 suggesting the production mode set after the jackpot game, and the total prize paid out in the jackpot game state. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total number of prize balls image G112 indicating the number of balls is displayed.

It should be noted that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production (also simply referred to as "variation production") will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed. In the special figure variation production, the variation display of the production pattern is performed in a superimposed manner on a predetermined background image on the display screen 50a. The production pattern is composed of, for example, number patterns of 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production pattern, the production pattern fluctuates with the start of the variable display of the special figure, and the production pattern with the end of the variable display of the special figure. stops. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. Then, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production pattern.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production, in addition to the fluctuation display of the production pattern, various functions such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, and the special button 41 It is possible to perform other productions using a production device. In this case, other effects can be continued even after the stop display of the effect symbols.

4-2-1. Effect Symbol Display Area On the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect. Similarly, the middle production design area 50b2 and the right production design area 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle production design EZ2 and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section at the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display screen 50a. The small pattern area 50c is an area for variably displaying the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbols are variably displayed. The small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are composed of numeral patterns 1-9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the medium effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left effect pattern region 50b1. , middle effect symbol region 50b2, right effect symbol region 50b3, and small symbol region 50c, but are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of special symbols is started, for example, as shown in FIG. , EZ2, EZ3” or “effect pattern EZ”) are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the variable display of special symbols is performed. From the state of waiting for the variable display of the special figure, as shown in FIG. The variable display of KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 is started. In addition, "↓" in FIG. 19 indicates that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is, for example, "normal loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are different. After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. There are a plurality of types of stop modes that indicate a failure, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the symbols on the left and right sides are not the same. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach such as "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (so-called reach pattern), and reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established in the normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the big win determination may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. decelerates to Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. There are a plurality of types of stop modes that suggest reach-losing, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the middle symbols are different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. indicate. There are a plurality of types of stop modes suggesting a big win, such as "7, 7, 7" and "2, 2, 2", in which the left and right symbols are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP reach The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 indicating that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final stage of the SP reach-only production is reached, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", As shown in FIG. 21 (C-1), the display screen At 50a, an effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character is happy to have won a battle) is performed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change or add the contents of the effect of the SP reach.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each reach are stopped in a mode indicating a big win (big win expectation, winning expectation) will be described in detail. The degree of jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of jackpot determination. For example, if the execution probability of N reach is set to 10% when the result of the jackpot determination is "losing" and is set to 100% when the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", the execution probability of SP reach is If the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing", it is 4%, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is "jackpot", it is 100%. Can be set higher. In addition, SP reach A and SP reach B are made executable as SP reach, the execution probability of SP reach A is set to 2% when the result of big hit determination is ``losing'', and the result of big hit determination is ``big hit''. In the case of 20%, the execution probability of SP reach B is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". For example, it is possible to set the SP reach B jackpot expectation higher than the SP reach A jackpot expectation. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the big win determination, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the big win.

4-3. Suspended Icon Display Area The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a suspended icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The pending icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, depending on the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending, each A pending icon HA can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 reserved number is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the special figure 1 reserved number is "2", the first display area 50d1 and the second 2 display area 50d2 and the pending icon HA is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22A, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area in the vicinity of the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA that is the same as or different from the pending icon HA in accordance with the start of the special figure variation effect.

It should be noted that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Suspension effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a suspension effect in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. - 特許庁The pending effect can notify the player of the number of special figure 1 suspension or special figure 2 suspension.

In the pending effect, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 when the special figure 1 pending number is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls win the first starting hole 11 during the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. A pending icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is completed and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d is moved to the first display area 50d1 and displayed. , and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Notice Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a notice effect at an arbitrary timing during the special figure variation effect. The notice effect is the effect using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the buttons 40, 41, etc., and the result of the big hit determination and the special figure variation pattern determination. It is possible to suggest the results of

4-4-1. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as an advance notice effect. The movable body performance is a performance for operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the movable body production, for example, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display screen 50a as seen from the player, and develops into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in the space on the display screen 50a that does not overlap the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body presentation is not limited to suggestions for developing SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4-2. Operation Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41 as an advance notice effect. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the operation effect, for example, in SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the special button 41 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs, and with the occurrence of this button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. , an effect for prompting the operation of the special button 41 (button operation promotion effect) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The button operation prompting image G3 includes an image simulating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (pressing operation image G32) representing the operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the special button 41, and a button operation valid period. and an image representing the remaining time (operation effective period remaining time image G33). Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. After that, when the special button 41 is pressed during the button operation effective period, or after the button operation effective period elapses without the special button 41 being operated during the button operation effective period, FIG. , the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display screen 50a from the player's point of view, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the operation effect is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Prefetching Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a prefetching effect for the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve in which the special figure lottery is not performed as the notice effect. The look-ahead performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, when the result of the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 suspension is "jackpot", as shown in FIG. may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "missing", the pending icon HA may be displayed as "*" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, it is not limited to changing the display mode of the hold icon HA, and it is possible to change or add as appropriate. For example, it is possible to change the stop mode of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special figure fluctuation production.

5. Display on 7-segment display Next, display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) will be described. In the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio of the normal total prize balls won by the player in the normal game state and the normal shot balls fired by the player in the normal game state, is expressed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. In the 7-segment display 300, a base other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state and the number of time-saving balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, jackpot game The jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls won by the player in the jackpot state and the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in the jackpot gaming state, is not displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 always counts the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.). The total number of shot balls is calculated by counting the detection of the outlet sensor by the game control microcomputer 101 . The normal number of shot balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the ejection port sensor only in the normal game state. The normal total number of prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The information on the number of normal shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normal prize balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 (see FIG. 6) of the game RAM 104. reference) in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are maintained (not erased). Thus, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base by using the normal number of shot balls when the power is cut off and the normal total number of prize balls when the power is cut off. Then, the game control microcomputer 101, regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.) It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of shot balls into 60,000 shots. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 is the first normal base. After that, when the total number of balls shot exceeds 60,001, the initial normal base value is stored as the previous normal base value. Then, the normal base calculated from 60,001 to 120,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 120,001, the normal base value of the previous round is stored as the normal base value of the previous two rounds, and the current normal base value is stored as the normal base of the previous round. be. Then, the normal base calculated from 120,001 to 180,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 180,001, the value of the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base value 3 times before, and the value of the normal base value 1 time before is used as the normal base value 2 times before. stored, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated when the total number of shot balls increased from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base 3 times before is erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base 3 times before, and the value that was the normal base 3 times before The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. Then, the normal base calculated from 240,001 to 300,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, similarly, the normal base is calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the values of the normal base up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the two previous normal base, and the three previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasing storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104. I can let you. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101, on the 7-segment display 300, the current normal base ⇒ 1st previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 The display is switched every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (the third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340) the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the current normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 displays "b1" in the left two digits and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base one time before.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b2" in the left two digits and the two previous normal base in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base two times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base two times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits and the normal base three times ago in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base three times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base three times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "bL" in the two left digits and the current two digits in the right two digits, as described above. is displayed and so on.

Also, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of shot balls has been 300 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the right two digits. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and when the total number of shot balls exceeds 300, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the value of the normal base denominator (the number of normal shot balls) is too small to avoid displaying the unreliable normal base value. there is Even if the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

In addition, in the 7-segment display 300, when the number of normal shots has been 6000 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the left two digits indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3". ” flashes. After that, when the number of normal shot balls exceeds 6000 after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL" indicated by the left two digits is lit. When the total number of shot balls reaches 60,000 or more after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "b1" indicated by the left two digits becomes a lighting mode, and the total number of shot balls after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory. When the number is 120,000 or more, "b2" indicated by the left two digits will be lit, and when the total number of balls fired after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory reaches 120,000 or more, "b3" indicated by the left two digits will be displayed. ” becomes a lighting mode. In this way, when the person who confirms the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 is shown the blinking mode of the left two digits, the normal base value indicated by the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. It is possible to have the user grasp that the value is not a value. In other words, when the lighting mode is shown in the left two digits to a person who checks the normal base, the value of the normal base shown in the right two digits is a value that converges to some extent. It is possible to

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. FIG. After that, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode is terminated and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340 . Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the display of the normal base is started. As described above, when shifting to the setting mode after turning on the power, the initial display is executed after the setting change mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, the 7-segment display 300 indicates "8.8.8.8.". In this way, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally. In the above description, the 7-segment display 300 is provided on the game control board 100, and the display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101. However, the payout control board 170 A 7-segment display may be provided above, and the payout control microcomputer 171 may perform display control on the 7-segment display.

6. Over-prize ball prevention function Next, the over-prize ball prevention function will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY1, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate an over-prize preventing function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prized ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unexecutable on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific count number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player acquires (pays out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) That is. The total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to pay out to the player, but it does not mean the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. Also good. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states, as described above.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of prize balls is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of shot balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. is stored in the total shot ball number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on to calculate the difference number of balls, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is It is stored in the difference number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erase storage section 107 of the RAM 104 for use.

Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the number of difference balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 treats the number of difference balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of shot balls is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (the process of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 32), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (process of step 109 to be described later, see FIG. 32) is also stopped. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played because the game ball is not shot even if the handle 72k is rotated. In addition, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, and stops receiving signals corresponding to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and displays 8 and 7 segments. The display control of the indicator 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control board 170 .

After the over-prize preventing function is activated, the state in which the game cannot be played continues until the power is cut off. In this form, the operation of the over-prize prevention function is canceled on the condition that the RAM clear is executed. In other words, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the employee of the game parlor cuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193 . The employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 191 when turning on the power switch 193 to turn on the power. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by executing the RAM clear. Thus, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game cannot be restarted only by turning the power OFF and ON (returning ON), and the game can be restarted by executing the RAM clear. can.

Next, the timing at which the over-prize prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. The over-prized ball prevention function is activated when the advantageous game state advantageous to the player shifts to the normal game state on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 or more. In other words, at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80000, the over-prized ball prevention function does not necessarily operate. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability base state after a big win game or a low-probability base state after a big win game.

For example, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 25(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Next, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 25(B). At this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of shifting from the big winning game state to the high-probability/high-base state, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 25(C), when it comes to the timing of shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. In this way, in this form, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the middle of the high-probability-high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing for the player to end the advantageous game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, information on the number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasing storage unit 107, and the number of difference number is not reset (cleared) by turning the power OFF and ON. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the number of difference balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko game machine PY1, even during business hours, there is a situation where the power is turned off and on (reconnected) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, failures, serious fraud, and the like. In such a situation, if the number of difference balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the provision of the over-prize preventing function would be meaningless. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, the player who restarts the game afterward may receive an unfair advantage that the over-prized balls prevention function will not operate easily. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from receiving the above-described unfair advantage, turning on the power again or clearing the RAM does not reset the number of difference balls.

Next, the conditions for resetting the difference number will be described with reference to FIG. In this form, there are two reset conditions for resetting the number of difference balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed as shown in FIG. 26(A). That is, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. do. In addition, when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the number of total prize balls and the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a The information on the total number of shot balls stored in the number-of-shot-balls storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "resetting (clearing) the number of difference balls". In addition, in FIG. 26(A), when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down in the customer waiting state, the number of difference balls is reset. However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference ball number is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 26(A). That is, if the game is not played for one hour after shifting to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 deletes the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. clear. The customer waiting state is a game state in which the game is not executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26(A) and 26(B), it is assumed that a certain player's game reaches 70000 in the jackpot game state. After that, when a certain player shifts from the jackpot game state to the normal game state through the high probability/high base state, the game is finished. In this case, if the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000), the over-prize preventing function can be activated for the player who starts the next game, which is very disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26A, pressing the special reset switch 181 resets the difference ball number. As a result, the employee of the game hall can press the special reset switch 181 at an arbitrary timing after finishing the game of a certain player to reset the number of difference balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 26(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference number of balls is automatically reset. As a result, it is possible to reset the difference number of balls without imposing an operation burden for the reset on the employee of the game arcade. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the player who starts the game next from being extremely disadvantageous because the over-prize preventing function is activated immediately after starting the game. It is possible.

Next, an effect mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 27(A). When the over-prize prevention function operates, as shown in FIG. 27(A), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM." is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, the effect mode shown in FIG. 27(A) enables the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Note that the rendering mode shown in FIG. 27(A) continues until the power is cut off. The effect mode shown in FIG. 27(A) is canceled when the RAM is cleared, but is continued as it is only by turning on the power again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a case where illegal magnetism is detected will be described. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the shooting control process related to the game, in the same way as when activating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, the state in which the game cannot be executed due to the magnetism detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again). can do.

Next, an effect mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 27(B). When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 27(B), a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and "Error 1: Abnormal magnetism detection. Power on again. Please” is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, comparing the presentation mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 27(A)) and the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 27(B)), the cancellation method Other than the images, they are the same. Therefore, the employee or the player of the game hall is made to recognize that the game cannot be executed both when the illicit magnetism is detected and when the over-prize preventing function is activated. can be made easier.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 70000 (preliminary reference number, specific number) will be described with reference to FIG. 28(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A). First, as shown in FIG. 28A, on the display screen 50a, a round effect is executed in which a round image G109, a number-of-balls image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, a purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and an overpayment indicating "abnormal overpayment with 10000 remaining shots" at the bottom of the display screen 50a. A ball notice image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize notice image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation where the over-prize prevention function is approaching (situation where the number of difference balls is approaching 80000). be. The display of the purple edge image EFa is continued even after the jackpot game state is over, but the display of the over-prize ball preview image KY is finished when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the over-prize notice image KY may indicate the remaining difference number of balls until reaching 80000 at any time, and may be continued to be displayed even after the jackpot game state is over.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number) will be described with reference to FIG. 28(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B). As shown in FIG. 28(B), on the display screen 50a, a round effect is executed in which a round image G109, a number-of-balls image G110, and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, when the difference ball number reaches 80000, a red edge image EFb of red color is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a, and a game stop notice indicating "the game is stopped when the high base state ends" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 50a. Image KH is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know when the game is about to stop and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb is continued even after the jackpot game state is ended, but the display of the game stop notice image KH is ended when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends. The display of the game stop notice image KH corresponds to the "game impossibility notice effect".

Thus, in this embodiment, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, the display of the game stop notice image KH shown in FIG. Then) it is announced that the game will become unexecutable. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize in advance that the game will become unexecutable and to grasp in advance when the game will become unexecutable. As a result, even if the game suddenly becomes unexecutable when the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state ends, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the number of difference balls is 70000 or more, the over-prize notice image KY (see FIG. 28A) is displayed to announce that the game is about to become unexecutable. be done. After that, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, a game stop notice image KH (see FIG. 28(B)) for notifying that the game will not be executed is displayed. In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp in advance the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable step by step, so that the player can easily grasp the current situation.

Here, after the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 29(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 29A, on the display screen 50a, the probability variation mode effect in which the probability variation background image G105 is displayed is executed, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. This purple-rimmed image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls reaches 70000 and the situation is approaching where the over-prize prevention function is activated.

Moreover, after the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 29(B), on the display screen 50a, the probability variation mode effect in which the probability variation background image G105 is displayed is executed, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display screen 50a. With this red edge image EFb, the player can play while grasping the situation in which the number of difference balls reaches 80000 and the high base state ends, thereby activating the over-prized ball prevention function. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(A), a description will be given of an effect mode when the difference ball number is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. FIG. In this case, an employee of the game arcade opens the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22 and presses down the special reset switch 181 . Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and as shown in FIG. is displayed. At this time, at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), an effect mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display screen 50a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30(B), at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to let the employee of the game arcade know that the difference number of balls has been reset.

7. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 are provided in the game RAM 104 . The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 31 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, power-on process is performed (step S001).

In the power-on process (S001), for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, game CPU 102 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) setting, power recovery Initial settings such as setting of the working area of the game RAM 104, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the power-on processing (S001) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 191 is input. When the RAM clear is executed, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure reservations and the result of judging whether a big hit is successful or not) is erased. However, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, The information on the difference number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

In this power-on process (S001), the game stop flag, which will be described later, is switched to OFF when RAM clear is executed in the ON state. On the other hand, the game stop flag remains ON unless the RAM clear is executed while it is ON. That is, the state of the game stop flag does not change only by turning on the power again. In this way, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear is executed after the game stop flag is turned ON by the actuation of the over-prize preventing function.

After the power-on process (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) is executed. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a 4 msec cycle. That is, it is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. And, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various counters by normal design / special design main random number update processing (S003) Value update processing is repeatedly executed.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned on when the over-prize preventing function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unexecutable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), subsequently, an input process, which will be described later, is executed (S102).

Next, a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process is executed (S103). The normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. Subsequently, sensor detection processing is executed (S104).

In the sensor detection process (S104), general winning opening sensor processing, gate sensor processing, second starting opening sensor processing, first starting opening sensor processing, first large winning opening sensor processing, second large winning opening sensor processing, specific area Sensor processing and outlet sensor processing are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second start sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. be. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting hole sensor. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area be. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. Moreover, the 1st look-ahead determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 relation random number and the 1st look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the outlet sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet sensor.

After the sensor detection process (S104) shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 101 executes normal operation process (S105). In normal operation processing (S105), normal design standby processing, normal design variation processing, normal design determination processing, and auxiliary game control processing are performed in sequence. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process, hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 106 . In addition, based on the current gaming state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, to generate a normal pattern fluctuation start command including information on the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern display device 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the normal pattern. In the normal pattern variation process, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result in response to the lapse of the normal pattern variation time after the start of the variable display of the normal pattern being executed. Then, it generates a general pattern fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol determination process is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal design determination process, after a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the normal pattern being executed, the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. Determine whether or not there is If the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

Auxiliary game control processing is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Moreover, according to the result of the said process, the command for auxiliary game control is produced|generated.

The game control microcomputer 101 executes normal operation processing (S105) shown in FIG. 32, then difference ball number measurement processing (S106) described later, and special operation processing (S107) described later. Subsequently, a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is executed (S108).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a shooting control process for controlling shooting of game balls (S109). That is, by executing the shooting control process (S109), the player can shoot the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the shooting control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be shot even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process for controlling the display of the 7-segment display device 300 (S110). Next, an error process is executed to determine an error (illegal) due to magnetic detection or an error due to the opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m (S111). In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected incorrect magnetism. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. Further, in the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is opened by the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes output processing, which will be described later (S112). Subsequently, other processing is executed (S113). As other processing (S113), for example, based on the special figure reservation number, the special figure reservation indicator 83 is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, or the timer is updated.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off (S114), and ends this process. In the power interruption monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is cut off due to a drop in the monitoring voltage, game information, information on the total number of winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls, and the number of difference balls information, game stop flag information, and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 . After that, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 33, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether or not the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether or not a signal based on the depression of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201). If not ON (NO in S201), proceed to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clear process (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erase clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erase storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of game RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. In step S204, other processes are executed and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference Number of Balls Counting Process] As shown in FIG. 34, in the difference number of balls measurement process (S106), first, the total number of prize balls count process for counting the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is executed (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, based on the detection by the outlet sensor, the total number of shot balls is counted (S302). Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total shot number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the total number of shot balls is subtracted from the total number of prize balls, and the number of difference balls is calculated (S303). Information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6). In the differential ball number calculation process (S303), the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a differential ball number command including information on the calculated differential ball number to the production control board 120, and sends the differential ball number command to the production control microcomputer 121. The numbers may be grasped sequentially.

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether or not the over-prize ball notice flag is OFF. The over-prize notice flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 70000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 70000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70000 (NO in S305), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notice flag is turned ON (S306), and the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize ball notice image KY are displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether or not the prize ball flag is OFF. The over-prize flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more (S309). If the number is less than 80000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S310). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG.

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 35, in the special action processing (S107), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device (first big winning device 14D, second big winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and the "special action status" is "2". In case (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1304) is performed, and if "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S1301, S1303, YES in S1305) , Special symbol determination processing (S1306) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4" (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 36, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 11 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). And, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the customer is waiting. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process, which will be described later, is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO at S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this process ends.

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 (special figure 2 reservation information ), if there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) to be described later are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b corresponds to the first reservation Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special figure stop design data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information of special 2, If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 start port 11 (reservation information of special figure 1), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) and special figure to be described later 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a corresponds to the fourth reservation Clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the read side) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) is the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) Information and information (information including information on fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1409) is included.

When proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process for clearing (resetting) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" is executed (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the game RAM 104 and is used to measure the duration of the customer waiting state. It should be noted that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned on again regardless of whether or not the RAM clear is executed.

[Customer Waiting Measuring Process] As shown in FIG. 37, in the customer waiting measuring process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process for increasing the value of the customer waiting counter is executed (S1420). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has continued for one hour or more. If it is determined not to continue (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is continuing (YES in S1421), the non-erase clear process is executed (S1422) as in the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 33). As a result, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c are stored. Information on the number of difference balls is cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1423), and this process ends. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (special figure 1 jackpot determination process)] Special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) have the same processing flow, so based on FIG. will be explained together. As shown in FIG. 38, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) or special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) first reads a special symbol random number (jackpot random number) as a determination value (S1501). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the first storage area (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b of the game RAM 104 Read out the special symbol random number that has been. Also, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the first storage area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a of the game RAM 104 (that is, the storage area corresponding to the first of the first special figure reservation) Read out the special symbol random number.

Next, the jackpot determination table (FIG. 12(A)) is set (S1502). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1503). Then, if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1503), that is, if it is a normal probability state (non-high probability state), the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "1000" to "1219"), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S1504). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1503), whether it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "1000" to "2499") out of the big hit judgment table (Fig. 12 (A)) It is determined whether or not (S1505).

If the result of the big win determination (S1504, S1505) is "big win", the big win symbol type random number is read out and the big win type is determined based on the big win symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 12(B) (S1506). After determining the jackpot type (S1506), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1507), and the special figure stop pattern data corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S1508) and processed. finish. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination (S1504, S1505) is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set (S1508) and the process ends.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (special figure 1 variation pattern selection process)] Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) and special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) Because the flow of processing is the same A collective description will be given with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) or special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) first determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1601).

If it is not a time-saving state (NO in S1601), ie, if it is a non-time-saving state, then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1602). If it is ON (YES in S1602), with reference to the normal table (part corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14) in the non-working time saving state, the special figure A special figure variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number (S1603).

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the reach random number is the reach establishment random value (S1604). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(C), the reach establishment random number is "0" to "29" if it is a non-time saving state, and is "0" to "9" if it is a time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when losing than the non-time-saving state. This is in order to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by making it possible to select more short reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random value (YES in S1604), that is, in the case of reach loss, there is reach loss table during non-time saving state (out of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or 14 With reference to the portion corresponding to non-time saving state and reach loss), to select a special figure variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern random number (S1605).

On the other hand, if the reach random number is not a reach establishment random value (NO in S1604), that is, in the case of reach no loss, the reach no loss table during the non-time saving state (of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 With reference to the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and reach no loss), a special figure variation pattern is selected based on the special figure variation pattern random number (S1606). At the time of loss without reach, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls in the special pattern is "3" or "4", the special figure with a shorter special figure fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls in the special pattern is "0" to "2" A variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13 or 14).

Also in step S1601, if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (YES in S1601), as shown in FIG. Part corresponding to the time saving state among the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 14) Processing is performed in the same flow as the above steps S1602 to S1606 (S1607 to S1611).

That is, if it is a big hit, the special figure variation pattern is selected based on the special figure variation pattern random number by referring to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and the big hit (S1608). Moreover, if there is a reach loss, a special figure variation pattern is selected based on the special figure variation pattern random number by referring to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 and the loss with reach (S1610). Moreover, if it is reach-less loss, a special-figure fluctuation pattern is selected based on a special-figure fluctuation pattern random number with reference to the part corresponding to reach-free loss in the time saving state of FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 (S1611).

After performing the selection of the special figure variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 39, the selected special figure variation pattern is set (S1612), and the process ends. The information of the special figure variation pattern set in step S1612 is included in the variation start command set in step S1406 or S1412 in the special symbol standby process (S1302), and is sent to the effect control board 120 by the output process (S112). .

[Special symbol variation process] As shown in FIG. 41, in the special symbol variation process (S1304), first, special symbol variation time (special symbol variation time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409 , FIG. 13 or 14) has elapsed (S1801). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1801), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1801), along with setting the fluctuation stop command (S1802), the special operation status is set to "3" (S1803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols with the symbols (jackpot symbols or losing symbols) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S1804), this processing is finished.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 42, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), first, the special symbol stop time (stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process, which will be described later, is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern (see FIG. 16 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time saving state. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909), and this process ends.

[Game State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the game state management processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" Judge (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0". (S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), turn off the time saving flag (S2008) and proceed to step S2009. If the determination result of step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 80000 or more. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010), and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. Thus, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 27(A). Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished.

In step S2012, the game state specifying command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing ends.

[Special Electric Accessory Process (Jackpot Game)] The special electric accessory process is a process for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 44, in the special electric accessary product process (S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2701). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of all the jackpot devices (the first jackpot device 14D, the second jackpot device 15D) has ended in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2701), whether or not the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth, second big winning mouth 15) is open (that is, the first big winning device 14D or the second big winning mouth (S2702). If it is not open (NO in S2702), whether it is time to open the big winning opening, that is, whether it is time to start opening the first big winning opening 14 after the opening time of the jackpot has passed. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the interval time between openings has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening has arrived (S2703).

If the determination result in step S2703 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of step S2703 is YES, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a jackpot game based on the V long jackpot (see FIG. 16) (S2704). If it is not a V-long jackpot (NO at S2704), the process proceeds to step S2707, but if it is a V-long jackpot (YES at S2704), whether it is the timing to start the 10th round that allows passage to the specific area 16 is determined (S2705). If it is not the timing to start the 10th round (NO in S2705), the process proceeds directly to step S2707. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 10th R (YES in S2705), V effective period setting processing is performed (S2706).

In the V effective period setting process (S2706), during the opening of the second big winning hole 15 in the 10th round of the V long jackpot and for several seconds after closing the second big winning hole 15, the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. is set as the V valid period for judging validity. In this embodiment, other periods (including when the jackpot game is not executed) are set as the V invalid period during which detection of the gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is effective means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2707, the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) are opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the kind of big win. In addition, the distribution member 16k always moves in a constant motion from the start of the round game of the first round. In the opening pattern of the V long jackpot, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is opened so that the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with a margin in the 10th round. On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the V-short jackpot, the distribution member 16k operates so that even if the game ball wins the second big prize hole 15, it cannot pass through the specific area 16 in the 10th round. The opening timing of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is set.

Subsequently, in step S2708, round designation command transmission determination processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the round designation command transmission determination process (S2708), it is determined whether or not the opening of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) in step S2703 is the first opening in one round game. If so, a round designation command including information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. Therefore, in this step S2708, the round designation command is always set.

In step S2702 of the special electric accessory processing (S1307), if the large winning opening (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15) is open, whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are established. (S2709). In this form, the closing condition is that the number of prizes won into the big prize hole in the round game reaches the prescribed maximum number of prizes (10 per 1R in this form), or that the time to close the big prize hole is reached. (that is, the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 16) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning slot is not met (NO in S2709), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) is satisfied (YES in S2709), the big winning opening is closed (blocked) ( S2710). Then, it is determined whether one round game (round interval) has ended (S2711). If not finished (NO in S2711), the process ends. On the other hand, when the round game ends (YES in S2711), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2712), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2713). If it is not "0" (NO in S2713), the process ends as it is to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2713), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2714), and a jackpot ending is started (S2715). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2716), and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2701 (YES in S2701), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the ending time of the jackpot game has passed (S2717), and the ending time has passed. If not (NO in S2717), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2717), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2718). Then, a game state setting process, which will be described later, is performed (S2719). Subsequently, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2720). Subsequently, the special action status is set to "1" (S2721), and this processing ends.

[Game State Setting Processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the game state setting processing (S2719), it is first determined whether or not the V flag is ON (whether or not V has won during the V valid period) (S2801). If it is ON (YES in S2801), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2802), and the time saving flag is turned ON (S2803). As a result, after the jackpot game, it is controlled to the high-probability-high base state. Subsequently, "160" is set to the variable probability counter (S2804), "160" is set to the time saving counter (S2805), and the process proceeds to step S2808. As a result, the number of times of ST is 160 times and the number of times of time saving is controlled to a high base state of 160 times.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag is not ON in step S2801 (NO in S2801), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2806). That is, at this time, the probability variation flag is not turned ON. Thereby, it will be controlled to the low probability high base state after the jackpot game. Subsequently, "100" is set in the time saving counter (S2807), and the process proceeds to step S2808. That is, by this, the number of times of time saving will be controlled to the low probability high base state which is 100 times.

In step S2808, the game control microcomputer 101 specifies the game state including the information of the game state set now (ON or OFF of the probability variable flag, ON or OFF of the time saving flag, the value of the probability changing counter, the information of the value of the time saving counter) A command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Thus, the game state setting process (S2719) ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 46, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in each processing described above are output to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing is finished.

[Outer End Signal Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the outer end signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-price announcement flag is ON (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notice flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer end signal output process for overly awarded ball notice (S3102), the main control board 100 outputs an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for overly awarded ball notice"). , is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-notifying outer end signal to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, the employee of the game parlor who monitors the hall computer grasps the situation in which the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the number of remaining balls in the pachinko game machine PY1 increases slightly (within 10000). is possible.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 80,000. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), an over-prize ball outer end signal output process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the over-prize ball outer end signal output process (S3104), an outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "over-prize ball outer end signal") indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 is paid out from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-ball announcement outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game hall who is monitoring the hall computer is told that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 in this pachinko game machine PY1, and the game will be executed when the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends. It is possible to grasp the situation in which it becomes impossible.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is in an unexecutable state. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO at S3105), the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), an outer end signal output process for game stop is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function is mainly It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the pachinko game machine PY1 has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the non-erase clear processing shown in step S203 or the non-erase clear processing shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information stored in the difference storage unit 107c It is determined whether or not the information on the difference number of balls has been cleared. If the non-erase clear process has not been executed (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erase clear process has been executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process proceeds to step S3109. In the reset outer end signal output process (S3108), an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer end signal") is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the resetting outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who monitors the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the number of difference balls has been reset in the pachinko game machine PY1. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an over-prize ball notice outer end signal, an over-prize ball outer end signal, and a game stop outer end signal , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

8. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

[Sub-control main processing] When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 121 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 48 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for determining various effects are updated. As an example of a method for updating the effect determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process ( S4004 ), various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display screen 50a according to the received command (performs various effects using the image). In addition to various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects by sound), and controls the lamp. The frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light via the circuit 151 (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the movable devices 55, 56, 58 are operated (executing various movable body effects by actions). do). In this way, various productions (variation production, suspension production, movable body production, operation production, pre-reading production, other advance notice production, opening production accompanying special game, open game production, ending production, customer waiting production, production mode control, etc.) is realized.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S112) of the main control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing] 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 1 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 49, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process (S4101), the operation of the operation unit that the player can operate, such as the normal button detection switch 40a, the special button detection switch 41a, the select button detection switch, etc., is detected, and a command is set or produced according to the detection result. create data for In the light emission data output process (S4102), the frame lamp 53 and Light emission data (lamp data) is referred to in order to cause lamps such as the board lamp 54 to emit light. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the light emission data. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable body control process (S4103), the movable devices 55, 56, 58 are operated at a predetermined timing based on the performance data created in the input process (S4101), the performance data creation process (S4204), etc., which will be described later. Drive data is referred to in order to perform movable object production. Then, the lamp control circuit 151 is controlled based on the drive data. That is, the production control microcomputer 121 operates the movable devices 55, 56, 58 in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. In the watchdog timer process (S4104), the watchdog timer is reset.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing] 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 50, received command analysis processing (S4201), effect timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), and effect data creation processing (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process (S4201), the received interrupt process (S4010) analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124, and performs processing according to the command (for example, selection of effect, setting of effect mode, command execution set, etc.). In production timer update processing (S4202), the timer for measuring the time for each production is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process (S4202), the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the operation unit such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process (S4203), based on the processing results of the input process (S4101) and received command analysis process (S4201), audio data (data for controlling the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and the audio control circuit 161 is controlled. In effect data creation processing (S4204), effect data is created based on the processing result of received command analysis processing (S4201).

Here, an example of processing when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the effect control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process (S4201), when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is received, as the fluctuation start command reception processing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command, fluctuation A performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) of performance is selected, information of the sub-variation pattern is set, and a variation performance start command including information of the sub-variation pattern is set in an output buffer. For example, when the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern to perform SP reach, variation production start command corresponding to the sub variation pattern to the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed to correspond to the selected sub-variation pattern. A variable effect is realized. In addition, the flow of processing related to the realization of such effects is basically the same for other effects such as effects accompanying special games, waiting effects for customers, anticipation effects, so-called advance notice effects accompanying the changes, control of the effect mode, etc. are the same.

9. Operation Attention Calling Effect Next, the operation attention calling effect will be described. In this pachinko game machine PY1, when the over-prize preventing function is activated or illegal magnetism is detected (predetermined stop conditions are met), the game becomes unexecutable. That is, the game control process and the launch control process are stopped. At this time, even though the game cannot be executed, the player may not be able to accurately grasp the situation and may continue to rotate the handle 72k (shooting operation means). Therefore, in this embodiment, after the game becomes unexecutable, based on the player's rotation operation to the handle 72k, an operation attention calling effect is executed to call attention to stopping the shooting of the game ball. ing. It is possible to prevent the player from shooting useless balls by means of this operation attention calling effect.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a case where an operation attention calling effect (attention calling effect) is executed after the over-prize preventing function is activated. First, as a precondition, it is assumed that the player has not performed a rotation operation on the handle 72k and the over-prize prevention function has been activated. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the game stop notification command (see S2011) from the game control microcomputer 101, and thereby grasps that the over-prize preventing function has been activated. 51A, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX on the display screen 50a, and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52. FIG. Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player rotates the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). 51(B), the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the operation warning effect in a state where the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. do. That is, the display screen 50a displays the operation alert image HT indicating "Please do not turn the steering wheel". Further, a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit in red. By this operation attention calling effect, it is possible to make the player more strongly aware that the game ball is not to be shot.

After that, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops inputting the detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 51(C). In this way, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the operation attention calling effect is executed only while the player is rotating the handle 72k.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a case where an operation attention calling effect (attention calling effect) is executed after illegal magnetism is detected. First, as a precondition, it is assumed that the player has not performed a rotation operation on the handle 72k and an illegal magnetism has been detected. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a magnetism detection command indicating that illegal magnetism has been detected from the game control microcomputer 101 . As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ER1 on the display screen 50a, and outputs a game stop sound from the speaker 52, as shown in FIG. . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player rotates the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the operation warning effect in a state where the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 52(B). do. That is, the display screen 50a displays the operation alert image HT indicating "Please do not turn the steering wheel". Further, a voice saying "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit in red. By this operation attention calling effect, it is possible to make the player more strongly aware that the game ball is not to be shot.

After that, when the player stops rotating the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops inputting the detection signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the operation attention calling effect, as shown in FIG. 52(C). In this manner, in this embodiment, the operation attention calling effect is executed only while the player is performing a rotation operation on the handle 72k after the illegal magnetism is detected.

10. As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high probability high base state or the low probability low base state ends, the game is executed become impossible. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, or in the middle of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, and there is no particular big disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine PY1 that does not award excessive prize balls while allowing the player to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop playing.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the end of the high base state and before the number of balls in his possession decreases. In other words, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of shot balls increases, and a situation can be assumed in which the difference number of balls becomes less than 80,000. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends so that the above situation does not occur.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, and the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more immediately after the player who plays the game later starts playing, it will be a terrible situation. situation. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the measured difference number of balls is reset based on the satisfaction of the reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour, the difference number of balls is reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, when the game hall employee presses down the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on, game information (for example, game state information such as high probability state, number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the jackpot) are erased, but the information of the difference number stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even if the game information must be deleted due to a problem or the like during business hours, it is possible not to delete the calculated difference number of balls.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even if the RAM clear is executed, the measured difference ball number is not erased. However, when an employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181, the measured difference ball number can be deleted. In this way, the employee of the game hall can delete the measured number of difference balls at any timing.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, as shown in FIG. Image KH is displayed. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the game will become unexecutable, and can be prevented from being embarrassed by the sudden inability to execute the game. In particular, as shown in FIG. 28B, the game stop notice image KH shows that the game cannot be executed when the high base state ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to know exactly when the game will be played.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the game becomes unexecutable when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more. At this time, if the player rotates the handle 72k, since the shooting control process (S109) is stopped, the game ball is not shot, but as shown in FIG. be. That is, the operation attention calling image HT is displayed on the display screen 50a, the sound "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit in red. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp more reliably that the game cannot be executed.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game becomes unexecutable. At this time, if the player rotates the handle 72k, since the shooting control process (S109) is stopped, the game ball is not shot, but as shown in FIG. be. That is, the operation attention calling image HT is displayed on the display screen 50a, the sound "Please do not turn the steering wheel" is output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit in red. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp more reliably that the game cannot be executed.

11. Modifications Modifications will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the above configuration, and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the above embodiments and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<First modification>
In the above-described form, it is configured as a gaming machine (first-class gaming machine) in which a jackpot game (first-class jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. On the other hand, the first modified example is configured as a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixer. That is, when a small winning prize is won in the lottery of special symbols, a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds at the maximum. In this case, when the game ball entering the big winning opening by executing the small winning game passes through the specific area in the big winning opening, the big winning game (second type big winning game) is executed. Thus, in the first modification, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, a jackpot game (1st kind jackpot game) is executed, and when the game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening, a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game) is executed. is configured as a gaming machine (one type and two types mixed machine).

In addition, in the first modification, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, as long as the game is played correctly, the 2nd type jackpot game is practically always executed (the game ball can pass through the specific area ) is configured as That is, winning a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2 means execution of a big win game. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that there were 4 (predetermined number) that the special figure 2 reservation number is the maximum when shifting from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state. The lottery of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the lottery of the special figure 1, and is set more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1. - 特許庁In this case, when the high base state shifts to the normal game state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be executed four times, and the player is still in a situation where the big winning game is likely to be executed. Therefore, even after shifting to the normal game state, until the lottery of the special figure 2 is not executed, it can be said that it is an advantageous period (advantageous game state) in which the player can easily execute the jackpot game.

In this first modified example, it is assumed that, as described above, the over-prized ball prevention function operates when the game state is shifted to the normal game state. In this case, even though the player is in a normal game state, the situation (advantageous period) in which it is easy to execute the jackpot game continues, but the game suddenly cannot be executed. Therefore, in this first modified example, as shown in FIG. Figure 2 remaining reservation) is all digested, the over-prize prevention function is activated. That is, when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is completely digested (when all the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 remaining reservation are completed), the game is made unexecutable.

In this way, the player continues to play until the advantageous period (advantageous game state) in which it is easy to win the second type jackpot game ends, even if the player shifts to the normal game state after the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more. It is possible to In the first modification, the lottery of the special figure 2 is preferentially executed over the lottery of the special figure 1, but the lottery of the special figure 1 is preferentially executed over the lottery of the special figure 2. , The lottery of the special figure 1 or the lottery of the special figure 2 may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12. - 特許庁

Next, in the first modified example, the effect after shifting from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state will be described. When there is a special figure 2 remaining reservation when shifting to the normal game state, a remaining reservation special effect shown in FIG. 54 is executed until the special figure 2 remaining reservation is completely consumed. This remaining reserved special performance is a performance suggesting whether or not a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and is not performed in a high base state, but is performed in the special figure 1 lottery. It is a performance that does not have. In other words, the remaining reservation special effect (advantageous effect) is limited to the time when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is completely digested after shifting to the normal game state (until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed four times ), which is a special effect that indicates a chance to win a second type jackpot game.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when transitioning from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, the remaining chance number image LA showing "Last 4 times" is displayed on the display screen 50a. is displayed. As a result, the player is made aware that there are still four chances to win the two-type jackpot game. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(A), on the display screen 50a, the transformation is performed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 indicating "5" and the right effect symbol EZ3 indicating "5". A main character appearance image BA1 in which the main character appears is displayed. In the upper right part of the display screen 50a, a remaining variation number image LB indicating "remaining 4 times" is displayed, showing how many times the variation display of the second special symbol is remaining.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(C), a special battle image BA2 is displayed showing that the transformed main character and the enemy character fight. After that, if a small win or a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the small effect symbol KZ which has been variably displayed on the upper left part of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed in the winning mode "555", which is double eyes. In this way, it is possible for the player who sees the special battle winning image WI and the small effect symbol KZ of the second number to know that he or she has won a small win or a big win. After that, if a small winning game is won, a second kind of big winning game can be obtained by passing the game ball through the specific area during execution of the small winning game. In addition, if the jackpot is won, one type of jackpot game can be acquired.

On the other hand, if the lottery of special figure 2 is lost, as shown in FIG. 54 (D-2), a special battle defeat image LO showing that the transformed main character has been defeated by the enemy character is displayed. Also, at this time, the small effect symbol KZ which has been variably displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed at "545" which is the reach-losing number. In this way, it is possible for the player who sees the special battle winning image WI and the small performance symbol KZ of the reach-losing eye to understand that he or she has lost. In this way, if the lottery for the special figure 2 is lost, the remaining reservation special effect shown in FIG. 54 is repeatedly executed until the special figure 2 remaining reservation is completely consumed. And, when all the results of the lottery of the special figure 2 are lost, the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) ends. After that, in the normal game state, the remaining reservation special performance is not executed, and the variable performance based on the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed.

In this first modification, when the number of difference balls is less than 80000, in the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) from the transition to the normal gaming state to the disposal of all the special figure 2 remaining reserves, as shown in FIG. The remaining pending special effect shown in is executed. On the other hand, even if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, in the advantageous period from the transition to the normal game state to the end of the special figure 2 remaining reservation (see FIG. 53), the remaining reservation special shown in FIG. A performance is performed. In this way, after shifting to the normal game state, as long as the remaining reserved special effect indicating that the situation is advantageous to the player continues, the over-prize prevention function will not operate. Therefore, even if the difference ball number is 80000 or more, it is possible for the player to enjoy the remaining reserved special effect after shifting to the normal game state. In other words, even if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the state is shifted to the normal game state, the remaining reserved special effect before the game becomes unexecutable is executed as it is, and the timing when the game becomes unexecutable and the remaining reserved special effect are executed. It is possible to match the end timing of the production.

<Second modification>
In the above-described mode, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, an effect is accompanied by the display of, for example, the red edge image EFb or the game stop notice image KH (see FIG. 28B). . However, even if the difference ball number is 80000 or more, the performance itself is not replaced and executed. On the other hand, in the second modified example, when the number of difference balls is less than 80000 to the situation where the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the effect itself is replaced and executed. In this second modification, as in the first modification, it is assumed to be configured as a one-kind-two-kind mixer. Then, the effect of the second modified example will be described by taking as an example the case where the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG.

As a precondition, a jackpot game is being executed in a situation where the difference ball number is less than 80000. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(A), a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a. In other words, the display screen 50a displays a round image G109, a number-of-balls image G110, and a round background image G114. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot game state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an over prize ball notification command (see step S312) to the effect control microcomputer 121, and the effect control microcomputer 121 grasps the situation where the difference ball number is 80000 or more. do. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 executes the round alternative production shown in FIG. 55(B).

Specifically, in the round substitute effect, as shown in FIG. 55B, the round substitute background image G114 representing the city is switched to the round substitute background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building. Then, a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110 are displayed superimposed on the background image G116 for round substitution, and a game stop notice image KI indicating "game stop at the end of the advantageous period" is displayed. Further, on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a, a warning display image G115 showing patrol lamps and the characters "DANGER" is displayed so as to attract the player's attention.

In this way, by increasing the number of difference balls to 80000 or more, a round substitute effect that greatly changes the effect mode from the round effect is executed, so that the player can be more strongly aware of the situation where the game cannot be executed. is. That is, for a player who does not fully grasp the over-prize preventing function, even if the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed accompanying the round effect (see FIG. 28(B)). , there is a risk that it will be misunderstood as a mere presentation, and the situation in which the game cannot be executed may not be fully grasped. Therefore, in the second modified example, instead of the round effect, the round alternative effect shown in FIG. 55B is executed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the situation has changed significantly.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53, when the jackpot game state is shifted to the high base state (time saving state), the time saving mode alternative effect shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the time saving mode alternative effect, as shown in FIG. 55(C), a time saving alternative background image G117 representing dark clouds and thunder is displayed. Then, the effect symbol EZ and the game stop notice image KI are displayed over the time-saving substitute background image G117. Further, on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a, a warning display image G115 showing patrol lamps and the characters "DANGER" is displayed so as to attract the player's attention.

In this way, even if the difference ball number is 80000 or more, even in the high base state (time saving state), the time saving mode effect shown in FIG. The time saving mode alternative production shown in is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player more aware of the situation in which the game cannot be executed. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not fully grasp the function of preventing over-prize balls to recognize that the game is in a situation where it is easy to win the second kind of jackpot game, but the game is stopped. It is possible.

After that, as shown in Figure 53, while shifting from the high base state (time saving state) to the normal game state, it is assumed that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls when shifting to the normal game state was "4". In this case, the remaining pending alternative special effect shown in FIG. 56 is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the remaining pending alternative special effect (special effect), first, as shown in FIG. A game stoppage remaining number image LH1 indicating "Last 4 times until game stoppage" is displayed. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbols until the game cannot be executed. In addition, the number of times indicated by the game stop remaining number image LH1 is "4" to "1" according to the special figure 2 remaining reservation number. In this way, in the second modification, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of informing the number of times the remaining special symbols change until the game is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the display screen 50a displays the special performance symbols TZ1 and TZ2, and the lower part of the display screen 50a shows "Will you hit the jackpot if all the V's match?" Explanation image SM is displayed. This explanatory image SM allows the player to understand that a big winning game will be executed when "V" is aligned in the special performance symbols TZ1 and TZ2. Further, in the upper portion of the display screen 50a, a game stop remaining number image LN1 indicating "four times remaining until game stop" is displayed. As a result, even during the variable display of the special symbols (second special symbols), it is possible for the player to be aware of the remaining number of variations of the special symbols until the game is stopped. In addition, the number of times indicated by the game stop remaining number image LN1 is "4" to "1" according to the special figure 2 remaining reservation number. The display of the game stop remaining number image LN1 corresponds to the "game impossibility notice effect".

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(C), on the display screen 50a, the special effect symbol TZ1 on the left side is stopped and displayed at "V", while the special effect symbol TZ2 on the right side continues to be variably displayed. there is After that, if a small hit or a big hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. will be complete. Also, at this time, the small effect symbol KZ which has been variably displayed on the upper left part of the display screen 50a is stopped and displayed in the winning mode "555", which is double eyes. Thus, it is possible for the player who sees the special performance symbols TZ1 and TZ2 indicating "VV" and the small performance symbols KZ for doubles to understand that a small win or a big win has been won. After that, if a small winning game is won, a second kind of big winning game can be obtained by passing the game ball through the specific area during execution of the small winning game. In addition, if the jackpot is won, one type of jackpot game can be acquired.

On the other hand, if the lottery of the special figure 2 is lost, as shown in FIG. 56 (D-2), the special effect symbol TZ2 on the right side is stopped and displayed with "1", and "V" is not aligned. . Also, at this time, the small effect symbol KZ, which has been variably displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 50a, is stopped and displayed at "545", which is the reach-losing number. In this way, it is possible for the player who sees the special effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2 indicating "V1" and the small effect symbol KZ of the reach-losing eye to understand that they are losing. In addition, a remaining number of times image NC indicating "three remaining chances" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen. Thereby, it is possible for the player to understand that the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching the activation (stop of the game). After that, in the special figure 2 remaining reservation, the remaining reservation alternative special effect shown in FIG. 56 is repeatedly executed. Then, when all the results of the special drawing 2 lottery are lost, at the timing when the advantageous period (advantageous gaming state) ends (when the stop time of the second special symbol elapses), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. As a result, the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

As described above, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, instead of the remaining pending special effect, the remaining pending alternative special effect with a significantly different effect mode is executed, and the player is more strongly aware of the situation where the game cannot be executed. It is possible to That is, if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the remaining reserved special effect shown in FIG. There is a risk of misunderstanding that the prevention function will not operate. That is, in the remaining reserved special performance, the player is likely to have the impression that the game can be continued even after all the special figure 2 reserved balls are consumed and the advantageous period is over. Therefore, in the second modification, instead of the remaining reservation special effect, by executing the remaining reservation alternative special effect shown in FIG. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation in which it becomes impossible.

<Third modification>
In the above mode, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability base state or low probability height base state) is shifted to the normal game state (see FIG. 25), the over-prize preventing function is activated. I made it On the other hand, in the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 57, the difference ball number is 80000 or more, and the special symbols are displayed 30 times (regulation) after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state. number of times) is executed (when a predetermined condition is established), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. In this third modified example, it is assumed that the game machine is configured as a type 1 game machine in the same manner as in the above embodiment.

In the third modification, as shown in FIG. 57, after shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the post-normal shift dedicated mode is set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 30 times. In addition, after shifting from the low probability high base state to the normal game state, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 30 times, similarly, the special mode after the normal shift is set. In short, even if the high base state is shifted to the normal game state, the normal effect mode is not set for a while, and the normal after-shift dedicated mode is set. Then, when the number of variations of the special symbols exceeds 30 times after shifting to the normal game state, the normal performance mode is set.

Next, in the first modified example, the effects in the normal post-shift dedicated mode will be described. In addition, in the dedicated mode after the normal transition, even if there is a special figure 2 remaining reservation when the normal game state is shifted to, and the second special symbol is displayed variably, when the normal game state is shifted to the special figure 2 remaining reservation The same performance is executed in any case where the first special symbol is variably displayed without the symbol.

Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the dedicated mode after normal shift, first, as shown in FIG. 58A, a mode transition image MT indicating "Enter dedicated mode after normal shift" is displayed on the display screen 50a. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that although the high base state has ended, it has shifted to a special presentation mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(B), on the display screen 50a, a special background image G121 representing the surface of a special planet is displayed, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. After that, if the lottery for the special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. 58(C), performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed at "8" which is a loss mode. In this way, in a state in which the special background image G121 is displayed, the effect in which the effect symbol EZ is changed and then stopped is referred to as "dedicated effect after normal transition". As described above, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, as long as the special symbol lottery is lost, the special effect after the normal transition (special effect) is executed until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times. be done. In this way, after the transition to the normal game state, the player is presented with a new post-normal transition exclusive effect instead of the familiar normal mode effect (see FIGS. 18(B-1), (B-2) and (B-3)). show. As a result, it is possible to create the impression that the situation may still be favorable.

In this third modification, when the number of difference balls is less than 80000, the post-normal shift exclusive effect shown in FIG. be done. On the other hand, even if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, after the transition to the normal game state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times (see FIG. 57), the special effect after the normal shift shown in FIG. 58 is executed. be done. In this way, after shifting to the normal game state, as long as the dedicated performance after the normal shift continues, the over-prize prevention function does not operate. Therefore, even if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, it is possible for the player to enjoy the novel post-normal shift exclusive effect after shifting to the normal game state. Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 30 times after shifting to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated at the same time as the exclusive performance after the normal shift ends. In this way, it is possible to match the timing at which the game becomes unexecutable with the end timing of the exclusive effect after normal transition.

<Fourth modification>
In the third modification, even if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the post-normal shift special effects shown in FIG. I made it to be. On the other hand, in the fourth modified example, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, after shifting to the normal game state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times, instead of the special effect after normal shift, After the normal transition shown in FIG. 59, the alternative performance is executed. It is assumed that this fourth modified example is configured as a type 1 game machine, like the third modified example. Then, the effect of the fourth modified example will be described by taking as an example the case where the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG.

When the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the state is shifted from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, first, as shown in FIG. A game stoppage remaining number image LH2 is displayed. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the number of variations of the special symbols until the game cannot be executed. In this way, in the fourth modification, it is possible to provide the player with a novel performance of informing the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols until the game is stopped when the game is shifted to the normal game state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the display screen 50a displays a ray background image G122 representing flowing rays, and the performance symbol EZ is displayed in a variable manner. A mini-character image MN1 representing a mini-character is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 50a. Furthermore, in the upper portion of the display screen 50a, a game stop remaining number image LN2 indicating "30 times remaining until game stop" is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to be conscious of the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols until the game is stopped even during the variable display of the special symbols. It should be noted that the number of times indicated by the game stop remaining number image LN2 is counted down from "30" to "1" every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59C, on the display screen 50a, a character appearance image TN1 representing a greatly grown character is displayed. In this way, in the substitutive effect after normal transition, the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine PY1 are sequentially introduced each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed by displaying the mini character image MN1 and the character appearance image TN1. By executing such a character introduction effect, it is possible to make the player think that the effect is like an ending until the game is stopped. In other words, characters appearing in the pachinko game machine PY1 are sequentially introduced, so that it is possible to make it appear as if the game is gradually coming to an end.

Then, if the lottery for the special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed at "145" which is a loss mode. As described above, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more, the post-normal shift alternative performance is executed until the special symbol variable display is executed 30 times after shifting to the normal game state. In this way, by executing the post-normal shift alternative effect shown in FIG. Also, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the game is gradually approaching a situation in which it becomes impossible to execute the game, by means of the post-normal-shift alternative effect shown in FIG.

<Fifth Modification>
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, before the over-prize preventing function is activated (the game stop flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 101 executes the firing control process (S109), After the prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the firing control process (S109). On the other hand, in the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 60, the firing control process (S109) is not provided in the main side timer interrupt process (S006). That is, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the firing control process (S109) regardless of the operation of the over-prize preventing function. In this fifth modification, the payout control microcomputer 171 provided on the payout control board 170 controls the shooting of game balls.

In short, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 does not execute the shooting control process (S109) after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, so the game balls are not shot toward the game area 6. On the other hand, in the fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 does not stop controlling the shooting of the game ball after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. fired. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the game may be possible because the game ball can be shot even though the game cannot be executed.

Therefore, in the fifth modification, when the player touches the handle 72k after the game becomes unexecutable, a contact attention calling effect (attention calling effect) is executed. In addition, in the fifth modification, a handle contact detection sensor is provided on the handle 72k. The handle contact detection sensor detects contact of the human body with the handle 72k. In other words, the handle contact detection sensor detects contact with the handle 72k only when the player touches the handle 72k before rotating the handle 72k. Thus, when the player touches the handle 72k, a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor is output to the effect control microcomputer 121. FIG. Below, based on FIG. 61, the contact attention calling effect executed after the over-prized ball prevention function is activated will be described.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a case where a contact attention calling effect (attention calling effect) is executed after the over-prize preventing function is activated. First, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 52 outputs a game stop sound. Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player touches the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the touch alert effect while the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. do. That is, the display screen 50a displays the contact alert image HU indicating "Please take your hand off the steering wheel". Further, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please take your hand off the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit up in red. This contact alerting effect can make the player more aware that the player cannot touch the handle 72k and the game cannot be executed.

After that, when the player stops touching the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops inputting the detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the production control microcomputer 121 stops the contact attention calling production, as shown in FIG. 61(C). In this manner, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, as long as the player is touching the handle 72k, the contact attention calling effect is executed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a case where a contact attention calling effect (attention calling effect) is executed after illegal magnetism is detected. First, when illegal magnetism is detected, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ER1 on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 52 outputs a game stop sound. Further, all the frame lamps 53 are turned on in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off.

Thereafter, when the player touches the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 inputs a detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the touch alert effect while the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ER1 are displayed on the display screen 50a. do. That is, the display screen 50a displays the touch alert image HU indicating "Please take your hand off the steering wheel". Further, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Please take your hand off the steering wheel", and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are all lit up in red. This contact alerting effect can make the player more aware that the player cannot touch the handle 72k and the game cannot be executed.

After that, when the player stops touching the handle 72k, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops inputting the detection signal from the handle contact detection sensor. As a result, the production control microcomputer 121 stops the contact attention calling production, as shown in FIG. 62(C). In this way, in this embodiment, as long as the player touches the handle 72k after the illegal magnetism is detected, the touch alert effect is executed.

In this fifth modification, even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated and the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player rotates the handle 72k to shoot the game ball toward the game area 6. can do. However, when the player touches the handle 72k, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a contact attention calling effect for calling attention is executed. Thus, the player who touches the handle 72k despite the impossibility of executing the game is made to recognize that he/she is releasing the handle 72k, and to surely grasp the situation that the game cannot be executed. is possible.

In addition, in the fifth modification, even if illegal magnetism is detected and the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player can shoot the game ball toward the game area 6 by rotating the handle 72k. can be done. However, when the player touches the handle 72k, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a contact attention calling effect for calling attention is executed. Thus, the player who touches the handle 72k despite the impossibility of executing the game is made to recognize that he/she is releasing the handle 72k, and to surely grasp the situation that the game cannot be executed. is possible.

<Sixth modification>
In the second modification, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more, the round alternative production shown in FIG. 55(B), the time reduction mode alternative production shown in FIG. A special performance was performed. On the other hand, in the sixth modification, the round alternative production (alternative production) shown in FIG. 63(B) and the probability variable mode alternative production (alternative production) shown in FIG. 63(C) are executed. It's becoming In this sixth modification, as in the above embodiment, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state is shifted from the high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. The game is controlled to be unexecutable.

In this sixth modification, it is assumed that a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 63(A) during execution of the jackpot game. Here, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot game state. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a round substitute effect is executed. That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitute background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building and a warning display image G115 representing a patrol lamp and the characters "DANGER" are displayed. After that, when the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

In the high probability high base state, instead of the probability variation mode production shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), the probability variation mode alternative production shown in FIG. 63 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the probability variation mode alternative effect, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a probability variation alternative background image G118 representing a black hole in outer space is displayed. Then, the effect symbol EZ is displayed over the probability variable substitute background image G118. Further, on the frontmost side of the display screen 50a, a warning display image G115 showing patrol lamps and the characters "DANGER" is displayed so as to attract the player's attention. Further, a game stop remaining number image LN3 indicating "Last 160 times until game stop" is displayed superimposed on the variable-probability substitute background image G118. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbols until the game cannot be executed. It should be noted that the number of times indicated by the game stop remaining number image LN3 is counted down by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The display of the game stop remaining number image LN3 corresponds to the "game impossibility notice effect".

In this way, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the probability variable mode alternative effect shown in FIG. This makes it possible for the player to be more strongly aware of the situation in which the game cannot be executed, as compared with the case where the variable probability mode effect shown in FIG. 18 (B-4) is executed. Furthermore, by looking at the image LN3 of the remaining number of times of game stop being counted down, there is a sense of urgency as to whether the game can be continued by winning a big win or the game cannot be continued without being able to win a big win. Gaming can be provided.

<Seventh Modification>
In the sixth modification, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, the round substitute effect shown in FIG. 63(B) and the variable probability mode substitute effect shown in FIG. 63(C) are executed. On the other hand, in the seventh modified example, only the round substitute effect shown in FIG. 64(B) is executed. In this seventh modification, as in the above embodiment, it is configured as a type 1 gaming machine, and when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the jackpot game state (jackpot game) ends, the over-prize preventing function is activated. The game is controlled to be unexecutable.

In this seventh modification, it is assumed that a round effect is being executed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 64(A) during execution of the jackpot game. Here, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a round substitute effect is executed. That is, on the display screen 50a, a round substitute background image G116 representing a dark Western-style building and a warning display image G115 representing a patrol lamp and the characters "DANGER" are displayed. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 50a, a game stop notice image KL indicating "stop the game when the jackpot ends" is displayed. The display of the game stop notice image KL corresponds to the "game impossibility notice effect".

In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, the round effect shown in FIG. 64(A) is switched to the round substitute effect shown in FIG. 64(B). This makes it possible for the player to be more strongly aware of the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Furthermore, it is possible for the player who sees the game stop notice image KL to know in advance that the game cannot be executed when the jackpot game currently being executed ends.

<Eighth modification>
In the above mode, when the difference ball number becomes 70000 or more, the display of the over-prized ball notification image KY shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the eighth modified example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the difference ball number becomes 78500 or more, it is announced that the game becomes unexecutable by the reference number reaching announcement effect. . The reference number reaching notice effect (advance notice effect), which will be described in detail later, is an effect showing that the difference ball number will reach the reference number of 80000 while giving notice that the game will become unexecutable. . This eighth modified example is configured as a type 1 game machine, like the above embodiment. Then, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function.

Here, the differential number of balls (78500) that triggers the start of the reference number reaching notice effect will be described. In the eighth modification, as in the above embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot patterns) to be won include jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, and jackpot pattern Z (see FIG. 12(B)). Then, the jackpot game (jackpot game X) when winning with the jackpot pattern X is substantially 5R (see FIG. 16), and is set so that 750 prize balls can be awarded. Also, the jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when winning with the jackpot pattern Y is substantially 4R (see FIG. 16), and is set to be able to award 600 prize balls. Also, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z) when winning with the jackpot pattern Z is substantially 10R (see FIG. 16), and 1500 (predetermined number) prize balls are set to be awarded.

Therefore, in the eighth modified example, among the jackpot symbols that can be won, the jackpot pattern Z is the jackpot pattern with the largest number of prize balls that can be awarded. Therefore, in the eighth modification, the number of difference balls (specific number) that triggers the start of the standard number reaching notice effect is changed from the standard number of 80000 to the number of prize balls that can be given with the jackpot symbol Z (1500 ) is subtracted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65, when the number of difference balls is 78500 or more in a certain jackpot game state, there is a possibility that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the next jackpot game state. As a result, considering the possibility that the number of difference balls will be 80000 or more in the next jackpot game state, the number of difference balls (78500) that triggers the start of the standard number reaching notice effect 80000), the value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z) that can award the largest number of prize balls in one jackpot game.

By the way, the number of difference balls reaches the reference number of 80000 in the so-called rush state (high probability high base state or small winning rush state (high probability low base state) in type 1 game machines, type 1 type 2 game machines If the time saving state) continues, it is assumed that there are many situations in which it is a jackpot game state when winning a jackpot in the lottery of special figure 2. Therefore, the number of difference balls, which triggers the start of the standard number reaching notice effect, is not the jackpot pattern that is won in the lottery of special 1, but the jackpot pattern that is won in the lottery of special 2. It can also be said that it is preferable to set a value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z) that can be given prize balls.

In particular, in the eighth modification, there is only one kind of jackpot pattern Z, which is the jackpot pattern to be won in the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, if the number of difference balls (78500) that triggers the start of the standard number reaching notice effect is set to a value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) that can be given by the jackpot pattern Z from the standard number (80000), the rush After the number of difference balls reaches 78500 or more in the jackpot game state when the state continues, it is possible to create a situation where the number of difference balls reaches the reference number (80000) in the next jackpot game state with a high probability. is.

Next, the effect of the eighth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. As a precondition, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, the display screen 50a displays a round image G109, a number-of-balls image G110, and a round background image G114. Here, as shown in FIG. 65(A), it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 78500 in the middle of the jackpot game state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an over prize ball notice command (see step S307) to the effect control microcomputer 121, and the effect control microcomputer 121 grasps the situation where the difference ball number is 78500 or more. do. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the next big hit arrival announcement effect shown in FIG. 66(B).

Specifically, in the next big win arrival notice effect, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the next big win arrival notice image ZY indicating "may be an over-prize ball abnormality at the end of the next big win?" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp in advance that there is a possibility that the game may become unexecutable when the next jackpot game ends. This next big win arrival notice effect is an effect executed when the reference number reach notice effect is started as a part of the reference number reach notice effect (advance notice effect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a run up effect and a mini screen effect are executed. The run-up effect is a effect showing the process of increasing the number of difference balls from 78,500 to 80,000 depending on the positional relationship between the character and the slope. This run-up effect is executed in the main display area 51a (large display area) of the display screen 50a excluding the lower right display area 51b. Furthermore, the run-up effect is asynchronous (irrelevant) to the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) and the variable effect being executed, and can be continuously executed until the number of difference balls reaches 80000. It's becoming

On the other hand, in the mini screen effect, the effect (jackpot effect, variable effect, customer waiting effect, etc.) that has been executed in the situation where the number of difference balls is less than 78500 is displayed in the lower right display area 51b (small display) of the display screen 50a. area). That is, due to the mini-screen effect, the effect executed on the entire display screen 50a in the situation where the number of difference balls is less than 78500 is executed in a reduced state in the lower right display area 51b. In this way, when the number of difference balls becomes 78500 or more, the player is made to mainly pay attention to the process of increasing the number of difference balls from 78500 to 80000, and sees the big win effect and the variation effect as an auxiliary.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(C), in the run-up effect, a run-up image KG is shown in which a predetermined character runs up from the bottom of the slope toward the goal at the top. In the running-up image KG, the current number of balls is shown by the position where the character is running on the slope. That is, if the number of difference balls is 78,500, the character is positioned at the lowest point of the slope, and if the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the character is positioned at the goal, which is the top of the slope. Note that when the number of difference balls is less than 78500, the character disappears from the main display area 51a. Then, when the number of difference balls becomes less than 78000 (lower limit of effect), the run-up effect and the mini-screen effect are stopped, and the effect executed in the mini-screen effect is executed on the entire display screen 50a. It's becoming In this way, after the run-up performance is started, it is continued to be executed only in a situation where the difference number of balls is 78000 (lower limit value of performance) or more, making it easy for the player to understand that the over-prized ball prevention function is about to operate. showing. Note that the run-up effect is an effect that is executed after the next big hit arrival notice effect as a part of the standard number reaching notice effect (preliminary notice effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 66(C), when the run-up effect is executed, a mini prize number image g110 indicating "750pt" and a mini-round background are displayed in the lower right display area 51b as a mini screen effect. An image g114 is displayed. However, even if the mini-screen effect is being executed, the round image G109 and the right-handed shot image G108 are displayed in the main display area 51a. This is because the round image G109 and the right-handed image G108 are images showing the progress of the game and the method of playing the game, and it is preferable that they are larger and easier for the player to understand than the other effect images.

After that, when the round game progresses and the number of prize balls for the player increases, a mini prize ball number image g110 indicating "1395pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b as shown in FIG. 66(D). . At this time, in the main display area 51a, a running-up image KG in which the character is running above the position shown in FIG. 66(C) with respect to the slope is displayed. In this way, in the running-up image KG, the character is positioned higher with respect to the slope as the number of difference balls increases, thereby visually showing the player the current number of difference balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, when the round game is over and the ending is started, as shown in FIG. 67(A), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini ending image g111 suggesting the probability variable effect mode set after the jackpot game. is displayed. Subsequently, when the high-probability-high base state is controlled, a mini-probability variable background image g105 is displayed in the lower right display area 51b as shown in FIG. 67(B). Furthermore, in the lower right display area 51b, a mini effect symbol ez (reduced effect symbol) smaller than the effect symbol EZ is stopped after being displayed in a variable manner. In this way, during execution of the mini screen effect, the player can grasp the result of the big hit determination process by the display mode of the mini effect patterns ez (the left mini effect pattern ez1, the middle mini effect pattern ez2, and the right mini effect pattern ez3). there is

Here, in the run-up effect shown in FIG. 67(B), a run-up image KG is shown in which the character is running on the slope below the position shown in FIG. 66(C). This is because the number of shot balls increased and the difference number of balls became smaller after the jackpot game ended. In this way, in the run-up effect, even when the number of difference balls becomes small, the player can visually and easily understand how large the number of difference balls is at the present time according to the position of the character. The run-up effect executed in the main display area 51a is asynchronous with the mini variable effect (effect accompanied by variable display and stop display of the mini effect pattern ez) executed in the lower right display area 51b. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to simultaneously enjoy the run-up effect that shows the number of difference balls and the mini-variation effect that shows whether it is a hit or not.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(C), in the lower right display area 51b, the main character and the enemy character fight with the left mini effect symbol ez1 and the right mini effect symbol ez3 in the ready-to-reach state. is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp the high probability of winning in the lower right display area 51b while grasping the number of difference balls in the main display area 51a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(D), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini SP reach background image g113 indicating that the main character is happy to have won the battle is displayed, and a left mini effect is displayed. The symbol ez1, the middle mini effect symbol ez2 and the right mini effect symbol ez3 are stopped and displayed in a big win mode (a stop mode "555" suggesting a big win). As a result, the player can grasp the state of winning the big prize in the lower right display area 51b. It should be noted that the display of the background image g113 for mini SP reach, which indicates that the main character is happy to have won the battle, corresponds to the "shrink win suggestion effect".

After that, the jackpot game is started, and when the opening ends, the round game is started. As a result, when the game has progressed to the 5th round, as shown in FIG. 68A, the mini prize number image g110 indicating "730pt" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b. At this time, in the main display area 51a, a running-up image KG in which the character is running near the top of the slope (near the goal) is displayed. It should be noted that, at the point of time shown in FIG. 68(A), the difference number is 79985.

Then, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 14, as shown in FIG. 68(B), in the lower right display area 51b, a mini prize number image g110 indicating "745pt" is displayed. At this time, in the main display area 51a, a run-up image KG indicating that the character has reached the top (goal) of the slope is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(C), in the main display area 51a, the run-up effect ends and the blessing effect is executed (see FIG. 65). In the blessing effect, a blessing image SF showing "Congratulations on achieving 80000 shots!!" is displayed in the main display area 51a. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that the difference number of balls has reached 80000. That is, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, the player is given a sense of accomplishment that an extremely rare situation can be created by the blessing performance without making the player aware of the disadvantage of stopping the game as much as possible. I'm trying Incidentally, the blessing effect is continued in the main display area 51a until the jackpot game ends. Then, in the lower right display area 51b, the mini screen effect (round effect, ending effect) is continuously executed.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. At this time, the blessing effect in the main display area 51a and the mini screen effect in the lower right display area 51b are finished, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, an error canceling method image ERX showing "Error X, over-prize error, please clear RAM" is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game cannot be played.

In this eighth modified example, as shown in FIG. 65, based on the number of difference balls being 78500 or more, the standard number reaching notice effect (next jackpot reaching notice effect (see FIG. 66(B)), run-up effect (See FIGS. 66(C) to 68(B))) is executed. Then, this reference number reaching notice effect is executed asynchronously with the effect being executed (such as a jackpot effect, a variable effect, etc.), and is continued until the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more. In this way, during the period from when the difference ball number becomes 78500 or more until it becomes 80000 or more, the player can see whether the game will naturally become unexecutable due to the asynchronous execution of the reference number reaching notice effect. can be shown as

Further, in the eighth modified example, as shown in FIGS. 67B to 67D, during execution of the run-up effect (prediction effect of reaching the reference number), the mini effect symbols eg1 and ez2 are displayed in the lower right display area 51b. , and ez3 change display and stop display. In this way, the mini performance symbols eg1, ez2, and ez3 that replace the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 show the result of the big hit determination process, and the run-up performance (standard number reaching notice performance) showing the current number of difference balls is grasped. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult.

Further, in the eighth modified example, as shown in FIG. 67(D), when it is suggested that a jackpot game will be executed during the execution of the run-up effect (standard number reaching notice effect), FIG. 21 (C-1 ) is displayed as a mini SP reach background image g113 obtained by reducing the SP reach background image G113 shown in FIG. In this way, the mini SP reach background image g113 that replaces the SP reach background image G113 suggests that a jackpot game will be executed, and a run-up effect (prediction effect of reaching the reference number) indicating the current number of difference balls is performed. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 65, until the number of difference balls reaches 80000, the number of prize balls given in one jackpot game (jackpot game Z (see FIG. 16)) or less (1500) When it becomes, the standard number arrival notice effect (next jackpot arrival notice effect, run-up effect) is executed. In this way, the standard number reaching performance is executed only in a situation where the game is likely to become unexecutable in the next jackpot game. In other words, even though the difference ball number is significantly smaller than 80000, such as 70000, the reference number reaching notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution timing of the reference number arrival notice effect (next jackpot arrival notice effect, run-up effect) so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Ninth Modification>
In the eighth modified example, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) to be won in the special figure 2 lottery was only the jackpot pattern Z (see FIG. 12(B)). On the other hand, in the ninth modification, there are two types of jackpots (jackpot patterns) to be won in the lottery of the special figure 2: the jackpot pattern Z1 and the jackpot pattern Z2 ( See Figure 69). In addition, below, it demonstrates centering around the difference with the 8th modification.

In the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 69, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, if the jackpot pattern type random number is "0 to 7", the jackpot pattern Z1 (second hit) If the jackpot pattern type random number is "8 to 9", the jackpot pattern Z2 (first win) is obtained. Incidentally, there are two types of jackpots to be won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the jackpot pattern X and the jackpot pattern Y, as in the eighth modification.

Then, in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 70, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when winning with the jackpot pattern Z1 is substantially 10R, and 1500 (second specified number) prize balls are awarded. set to possible. On the other hand, the jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when winning with the jackpot pattern Z2 is substantially 3R, and is set so that 450 (first specified number) prize balls can be awarded. As described above, in the ninth modification, the jackpot pattern Z2 won in the lottery of special figure 2 <jackpot pattern Y won in the lottery of special figure 1 <jackpot pattern X won in the lottery of special figure 1 <lottery of special figure 2 A large number of prize balls can be given in one big winning game in the order of the winning big winning pattern Z1.

Here, in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 71, based on the number of difference balls becoming 78500 or more, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect (see FIG. 72(C)), which will be described later, is executed. The performance suggesting the arrival of the next big win (preliminary notice performance) is a performance for notifying that the game will become unexecutable, suggesting that the number of difference balls may reach 80000 during the execution of the next big winning game. It is a performance to do. However, in the ninth modified example, unlike the eighth modified example, when the number of difference balls reaches 78500 or more, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect is not always executed. That is, the next big hit reaching suggestion effect (advance notice effect) of the ninth modification is executed only for the ending of the big win game. In this way, by executing the effect suggesting the arrival of the next big win only in the ending of the big win game, the player enjoying the big win game (especially the round game) is not excessively conscious of the over-prize prevention function. It is possible to

Then, in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 71, after the ending in which the next big hit reaching suggestion effect is executed, in the game state (high probability high base state) after the big win game, the mini next big win reaching later described A suggestion effect (see FIG. 72(D)) is executed. After that, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more in the next big win game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable at the timing when the big win game state ends.

Next, based on FIG. 72, an example of rendering of the ninth modification will be described. As a precondition, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled and the difference ball number is 78500 or more in the round game (see FIG. 71(A)). At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 72A, a number-of-balls image G110 indicating "750pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. However, even though the number of difference balls is 78500 or more, the effect that foretells that the game will become unexecutable is not executed. After that, when the round game ends and the ending starts, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the ending image G111 suggesting the variable probability effect mode is displayed on the display screen 50a.

Subsequently, during this ending, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the next big hit reaching suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the next big win arrival suggesting effect, the next big win reaching suggestion image ZK indicating "May be an over-prize ball abnormality at the end of the next big win?" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp in advance that there is a possibility that the game may become unexecutable when the next jackpot game ends. And this next big win arrival suggesting effect is not executed before the ending starts in the big win game when the difference ball number is 78500 or more, but is executed after the ending starts. A player does not have to be conscious of the over-prize preventing function during the round game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the next big win arrival notice image ZY (see FIG. 66(B)) being displayed during the round game as in the eighth modified example. be.

After that, when the ending ends and shifts to the high-probability-high base state, as shown in FIG. is executed. Specifically, in the mini-next-big-win reaching suggesting effect, a mini-next-big-win reaching suggesting image zk indicating "May be an over-prize-ball error at the end of the next big win?" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. This mini next big win reaching suggesting image zk is an image smaller than the next big winning reaching suggesting image ZK displayed in the ending described above, and is less likely to hinder the visibility of the effect symbol EZ.

In this way, the mini-next-big-win arrival suggesting effect makes the player aware of the possibility that the game may become unexecutable when the next big-win game ends even during the game in the high-probability/high-base state. It is possible to In addition, the mini next jackpot arrival suggestion production continues to be executed until the high probability high base state ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, a jackpot is won in the high probability/high base state, and the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

In this ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 69, the types of jackpots include a jackpot pattern X, a jackpot pattern Y, a jackpot pattern Z1, and a jackpot pattern Z2. In particular, in the rush state (high-probability base state), it is generally assumed that the jackpot will be won by the lottery of the special figure 2, but the type of jackpot to be won in the lottery of the special figure 2 includes the jackpot pattern. There are Z1 (first win) and big win pattern Z2 (second win). In the jackpot game Z1 based on the winning of the jackpot pattern Z1, 1500 prize balls are given, while in the jackpot game Z2 based on the jackpot pattern Z2, 450 prize balls are given. is set to be

In this setting, in the ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 71, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect is started based on the difference number of balls becoming 78500 or more. That is, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect is started based on the fact that the number of prize balls given in the big win game Z1 becomes 1500 or less before the difference ball number reaches 80000. - 特許庁In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of wins, it is possible to start the next big win arrival suggesting performance on the assumption that the next big win will win the big win pattern Z1 advantageous to the player. In particular, although there are four types of wins, it is possible to start the next big win arrival suggesting presentation on the assumption that the next big win will win the most advantageous jackpot pattern Z1 for the player.

Further, in the ninth modification, when the difference ball number becomes 78500 or more during execution of the big win game, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to let the player know that the next big winning game will be unexecutable due to the next big winning arrival suggesting performance just before the big winning game ends. In other words, in the big win game, even if the number of difference balls is 78500 or more, the next big win arrival suggesting effect is not started until the ending starts. As a result, the player can enjoy the big winning game without being overly conscious of the game becoming impossible.

<Tenth Modification>
In the ninth modification, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect for notifying that the game will become unexecutable is executed based on the difference ball number becoming 78500 or more. On the other hand, in the tenth modification, based on the number of difference balls being 79550 or more, an over-prize abnormal notice effect (advance notice effect) for notifying that the game becomes unexecutable is executed. It has become. In the tenth modification, as in the ninth modification, the types of jackpots to be won include jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, jackpot pattern Z1, and jackpot pattern Z2 (see FIGS. 69 and 70). Differences from the ninth modification will be mainly described below. Here, in the tenth modification, in the differential ball number calculation process (S303) shown in FIG. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 can sequentially grasp the difference number of balls.

In the tenth modification, the number of difference balls (79550) that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect will be described. In the tenth modification, in the jackpot game (jackpot game X) when winning with the jackpot symbol X, 750 prize balls are set to be awarded. Also, in the jackpot game (jackpot game Y) when winning with the jackpot pattern Y, 600 prize balls are set to be awarded. Also, in the jackpot game (jackpot game Z1) when winning with the jackpot pattern Z1 (second hit), 1500 prize balls are set to be awarded. Also, in the jackpot game (jackpot game Z2) when winning with the jackpot pattern Z2 (first win), 450 prize balls are set to be awarded.

Therefore, in the tenth modification, among the jackpot patterns that can be won, the jackpot pattern Z2 is the jackpot pattern with the smallest number of prize balls that can be awarded. Therefore, in the tenth modification, the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the abnormal notice effect of the over-prize ball is set to the number of prize balls (450, the first specified number) is subtracted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 73, when the number of difference balls is 79550 or more in a certain jackpot game state, the possibility of the number of difference balls being 80000 or more in that jackpot game state or the next jackpot game state is extremely high. get higher As a result, as long as the number of difference balls does not decrease, the number of difference balls will almost certainly reach 80000 or more by the next jackpot game state, so the number of difference balls ( 79550) is a value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (450) of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z2) capable of awarding the fewest prize balls in one jackpot game from the reference number (80000).

In this tenth modification, as shown in FIG. 73, when the difference number of balls becomes 79550 or more, the over-price abnormal notice effect is executed. That is, unlike the ninth modification, after the ending of the jackpot game is started based on the number of difference balls being 79550 or more, the next jackpot arrival suggestion effect is not started (see FIG. 71). . When the number of difference balls reaches 79550 or more in a certain jackpot game (round game), the number of difference balls may reach 80000 or more in the running jackpot game (round game). In this case, if the excess prize ball abnormality notice effect is started after the ending is started, the excess prize ball abnormality notice effect is started immediately before the big win game ends. In that case, the player will be made aware that the game cannot be executed immediately before the game is stopped, which is not preferable as the execution timing of the over-prize abnormal notice effect.

Next, based on FIG. 74, a rendering example of the tenth modified example will be described. As a precondition, it is assumed that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the difference ball number is slightly less than 79,550. At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 74A, a number-of-balls image G110 indicating "1200pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, it is assumed that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 and the number of difference balls becomes 79550 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an over-balls abnormality notice effect is executed on the display screen 50a. Specifically, an over-price abnormal notice image ZI indicating "with an increase of 450 shots remaining and an over-price abnormal" is displayed. This allows the player to know in advance that the game will become unexecutable when the number of difference balls increases by 450 more. This over-the-balls abnormal notice effect is executed for about 5 seconds (predetermined number of seconds), and when the over-the-balls abnormal notice effect ends, the residual number-of-balls informing effect is started.

The residual number-of-balls notification effect is an effect of notifying how much the remaining number of balls increases when the game is controlled to be unexecutable (becomes an over-prize-balls abnormality). Specifically, after the number of difference balls reaches 79550 or more, for example, as shown in FIG. A residual ball number notification image ZS indicating "abnormal prize ball" is displayed. The number shown in the residual ball number notification image ZS is a value obtained by subtracting the current ball difference number from 80000, and is updated whenever the difference ball number changes. In this way, with the residual ball number notification effect, the player can accurately and at any time grasp how much the remaining ball number increases when the game is controlled to be unexecutable (excessive ball abnormal). It is possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73, this residual ball number notification effect continues not only in the big win game state after the difference ball number becomes 79550 or more, but also in the high probability and high base state after the big win game state. is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 74(D), in the high-probability/high-base state, even in the state where the effect symbol EZ is displayed in a variable manner, the residual ball number notification effect is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. executed. Thus, in the tenth modification, it is possible to grasp the situation of the number of difference balls at any time after the number of difference balls reaches 79550 or more until the next big winning game is started.

However, in the tenth modification, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed when the difference ball number becomes less than 78500 (lower limit value of effect). This is a number of prize balls larger than the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z1) that can give the largest number of prize balls in one jackpot game until the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. is required. In other words, after the next jackpot game is over, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed in consideration of the over-prize ball prevention function not operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to execution of the residual ball number notification effect even though the difference ball number is sufficiently smaller than 80,000.

In this tenth modification, as shown in FIG. 73, based on the difference number of balls becoming 79550 or more, the over-price abnormal notice effect is executed. That is, before the number of difference balls reaches 80000, based on the fact that the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game Z2 becomes 450 or less, the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed. In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of wins, the game cannot be executed at least until the end of the next big win game, assuming that the player will win the next big win pattern Z2, which is disadvantageous to the player. When the situation is high, it is possible to execute the over prize ball abnormal notice effect. In particular, although there are four types of wins, it is possible to execute the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance assuming that the next big win will win the most disadvantageous jackpot pattern Z2 for the player.

In addition, in the tenth modification, as shown in FIG. 73, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 79550 or more, the over-price abnormal notice effect is executed. Thus, by synchronizing the timing when the number of difference balls becomes 79550 or more and the execution timing of the abnormal notice effect of the over-prize ball, the player can see the remaining one time before the number of difference balls reaches 80000. It is possible to strongly recognize that there is only the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game.

<Eleventh Modification>
In the tenth modification, the number of difference balls, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, is fixed at 79,550. In addition, the residual ball number notification effect is executed in the jackpot game state and the game state after the jackpot game (high probability high base state, low probability high base state, normal game state) after the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed. (See FIG. 73). However, the tenth modification described above has the following problems.

The difference ball number that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is 79550, but for the player, there is only a little remaining until the difference ball number reaches 80000 or more, and the start timing of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is You may think it's too late. In addition, the residual ball number notification effect was always executed in the jackpot game state and the game state after the jackpot game after the execution of the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect, but for the player, the difference ball number was always notified. There is a risk of feeling annoyed by being In particular, in the high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state, and normal game state, when the residual ball number notification effect is always executed, the remaining difference ball number until the overprize ball prevention function is activated gradually shown to increase. This means that the number of balls in hand is constantly decreasing to the player, which is clearly shown to the player, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the eleventh modified example, in order to solve the above-described problems, an employee of the amusement park can determine whether or not to execute the number of difference balls and the number of residual balls notification effect that triggers the start of the abnormal notice effect of the over-prize ball. is configured so that the Specifically, when the normal button 40 is pressed five times within 30 seconds after the start of RAM clearing, an initial function setting image FS (see FIG. 75B), which will be described later, is displayed. Then, the employee of the game hall switches from the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect setting image SX (see FIG. 75(C)), which will be described later. You can set the number of balls that will trigger the start of the game. In addition, by switching from the display of the initial function setting image FS to the display of the residual number of balls notification effect setting image SY (see FIG. 75(D)) to be described later, the presence or absence of execution of the residual number of balls notification effect, etc. is set. can do. Here, the display of the over-balls abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual number of balls notification effect setting image SY corresponds to "at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on".

Next, based on FIG. 75, the setting of the effect items related to the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect (preliminary notification effect) and the setting of the effect items related to the residual ball number notification effect (preliminary notification effect) will be described. The performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice effect include whether or not the over-price abnormal notice effect is executed, and the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-price abnormal notice effect. The performance items related to the residual ball number notification effect include whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is executed, whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is executed at the opening of the jackpot game, and whether the residual ball number notification effect is executed as a jackpot. Whether or not to execute in the round game of the game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect at the ending of the jackpot game, whether or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect each time the variable effect is executed, Whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is executed each time the variation effect is executed five times or whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is not executed during the variable effect is determined.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), when RAM clearing is started after the power is turned on, the display screen 50a displays "Please wait for a while. When the push button is pushed five times during RAM clearing notification, the initial function setting image will be displayed." is displayed. This allows the employee of the game arcade to know that the RAM has been cleared. The RAM clearing notification image RC is displayed only for 30 seconds after the start of RAM clearing. Therefore, when the game hall employee presses the normal button 40 five times while the RAM clear notification image RC is being displayed, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed as shown in FIG. 75(B). is.

Thus, in the eleventh modified example, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed on the condition that the RAM is cleared, and the effect items related to the over-prize abnormal notice effect and the residual ball number notification effect can be displayed. You can set related performance items. In other words, unless the RAM clear is executed, the performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance cannot be changed.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), in the initial function setting image FS, the item indicating "switch to setting screen" in the "excessive balls abnormality notice effect setting", and the "setting screen" in the "remaining number of balls notification effect setting" There is an item indicating "switch to" and an item indicating "switch to setting screen" in "other effect settings". Therefore, when the employee of the game hall uses the select button to move the cursor to various items and presses the normal button 40, the over prize abnormal notice effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 75(C) or FIG. A residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in (D) or other effect setting images (not shown) can be displayed. When the cursor is moved to the item "return" while the initial function setting image FS is being displayed and the normal button 40 is pressed, the display of the initial function setting image FS is terminated. After that, if the RAM clearing is completed, a customer waiting effect is executed on the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 75(C), in the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect setting image SX, an item indicating "ON" and "OFF" are selected in "Set ON/OFF of the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect." There are items shown. Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "ON", the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "OFF", the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set so as not to be executed.

In addition, in the over-prize abnormal notice effect setting image SX, a 5-digit number can be selected in "Set the number of difference balls for executing the over-prize abnormal notice effect". Therefore, by selecting a 5-digit number using the select button, the difference ball number (specific number) that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set. The number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set to 78500 as a default (initial set value). It should be noted that, when setting is made so that the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is not executed, the 5-digit number cannot be selected. When the normal button 40 is pressed after moving the cursor to the item "return" while the over-prize abnormal notice effect setting image SX is being displayed, the set contents are determined, and the initial function setting image FS is displayed. Return to display.

As shown in FIG. 75(D), in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, an item indicating "ON" and "OFF" are selected in "Set ON/OFF of the residual ball number notification effect". There are items shown. Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "OFF", the setting is such that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed.

Further, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, there are an item indicating "Opening ON" and an item indicating "Opening OFF" in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot". Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "Opening ON", the residual number of balls notification effect is set to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game on the condition that the over-prize ball abnormal notice effect is executed. be. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "opening OFF", the setting is such that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed at the opening of the jackpot game. It should be noted that if it is set so that the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is not executed, or if it is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, the item indicating "opening ON" cannot be selected. It has become.

Further, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, there are an item indicating "round game ON" and an item indicating "round game OFF" in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot". Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "round game ON", on the condition that the excess prize ball abnormality notice effect is executed, the residual ball number notification effect is executed in the round game of the jackpot game. set. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "round game OFF", the game is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed in the round game of the jackpot game. In addition, when it is set so that the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is not executed, or when it is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, the item indicating "round game ON" cannot be selected. It's like

Further, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, there are an item indicating "ending ON" and an item indicating "ending OFF" in "Set ON/OFF during jackpot". Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "ending ON", it is set so that the residual number of balls notification effect is executed at the ending of the jackpot game on the condition that the over-prized ball abnormal notice effect is executed. be. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "ending OFF", the setting is such that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed in the ending of the jackpot game. It should be noted that if it is set so that the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is not executed, or if it is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, the item indicating "ending ON" cannot be selected. It has become.

Also, in the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, an item indicating “always ON”, an item indicating “every 5 fluctuations”, and “OFF” are selected in “Set ON/OFF during fluctuation effect”. There are items shown. Therefore, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "Always ON", the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed each time the variable effect is executed (every time the variable effect is performed). On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "every 5 fluctuations", the residual ball number notification effect is executed every time the variation effect is executed 5 times (4 fluctuations). In the effect, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, and is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is executed in the fifth variation effect). With respect to these items, when the cursor is placed on the item indicating "OFF", it is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not always executed during the variable effect. It should be noted that, if it is set so that the extra ball abnormal notice effect is not executed, or if it is set so that the residual ball number notification effect is not executed, "always ON" or "every 5 fluctuations" is set. The items shown cannot be selected. When the normal button 40 is pressed while the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is being displayed, the set contents are determined, and the initial function setting image FS is displayed. Return to display.

Next, a rendering example of the eleventh modified example will be described with reference to FIG. As a precondition, it is set so that the over-balls abnormality notice effect is executed, and the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-balls abnormality notice effect is set to 75000 (specific number). Also, the residual ball number notification effect is set to be executed, the residual ball number notification effect is set not to be executed at the opening of the jackpot game and the round game, and the residual ball number notification effect is set It is assumed that it is set to be executed at the ending of the jackpot game. In addition, it is assumed that the residual ball number notification effect is set so as not to be executed during the variable effect.

In such a setting, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled (the round game is being executed) and the difference ball number is slightly less than 75,000. At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 76A, a number-of-balls image G110 indicating "1450pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, it is assumed that the game ball enters the second big winning hole 15 and the number of difference balls becomes 75000 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 74B, on the display screen 50a, an over-price abnormal notice image ZI indicating "an over-price abnormal with an increase of 5000 shots remaining" is displayed. In this way, as set by the employee of the game arcade, it is possible to execute the abnormal ball over prize announcement effect based on the number of difference balls (75000) that triggers the start of the abnormal ball over prize announcement effect. After that, in the round game being executed, the residual ball number notification effect is not executed. Then, when the transition to the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A residual ball number notification image ZS indicating "abnormality" is displayed. In this way, as set by the employee of the game arcade, the residual ball number notification effect is executed only at the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible for the player not to be overly conscious of the number of difference balls while enjoying the round game.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends and the state shifts to the high-probability-high base state, the variable effect is executed in a state where the probability-variable background image G105 is displayed on the display screen 50a. At this time, the residual ball number notification image ZS is never displayed. In this way, as set by the employee of the game arcade, the residual ball number notification effect is never executed during the execution of the variable effect. As a result, during the execution of the variable production (in the high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state, normal game state), the player does not have to show the number that the number of possession balls is decreasing at any time, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent people from feeling discomfort.

In this eleventh modification, after the power is turned on, while the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is being displayed, the game hall employee presses the normal button 40 and Based on the operation of the select button, it is possible to set the performance items related to the extra ball abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. In particular, it is possible to arbitrarily set the difference number of balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. In this way, the employee of the game hall can appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the over-prize-ball abnormality notice effect according to the situation.

Further, in the eleventh modification, the employee of the game hall can set whether or not to execute the abnormal over-the-balls notice effect as a performance item related to the abnormal over-the-balls warning effect. Therefore, when it is desired that the over-prize abnormal notice effect is not executed, the employee of the game parlor sets the over-prize abnormal notice effect so as not to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort due to the execution of the abnormal over-prize-balls notice effect for the player who desires that the abnormal over-price-balls-notice effect is not executed.

<Twelfth Modification>
In the above-mentioned form and each of the above modifications, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, when the player or the like presses down the ball lending button 62, the ball lending is executed. On the other hand, in the twelfth modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, even if the player or the like presses the ball lending button 62 (operation means), the ball lending is not executed. ing.

Here, the following points are different between the 12th modified example and the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples. That is, in the twelfth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the game stop flag when it determines that there is an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality) in the error processing (S111). As a result, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. However, as described above, the game stop flag is not switched from ON to OFF only by turning on the power again (power OFF and ON), and is switched from ON to OFF by executing RAM clear. As described above, in the twelfth modification, when an illegal magnetism is detected, the game stop flag is turned ON and the RAM is cleared in the same way as when the over-prize prevention function is activated. It is possible to return to a state in which the game can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the twelfth modification will be described below.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] As shown in FIG. 77, in the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the twelfth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game stop flag is ON ( S101). As described above, the game stop flag is turned ON when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, or when illegal magnetism is detected. Thus, if the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S101), steps S102 to S113 are executed as described above. It should be noted that "the number of difference balls is 80000 or more" or "it is determined that there is an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality)" corresponds to "the predetermined stop condition is satisfied".

On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the process of steps S102 to S113 is passed, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 executes ball lending control stop processing (S115), and proceeds to step S114. In the ball lending control stop processing (S115), the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a ball lending stop command to the payout control board 170. FIG. Thus, when the payout control board 170 receives the ball lending stop command from the main control board 100, the payout control microcomputer 171 controls the ball lending of game balls to be unexecutable based on the ball lending stop command. As a result, even if the player or the like presses down the ball lending button 62, the ball lending is not executed. It should be noted that the ball lending impracticable state continues as long as the game is controlled to be impracticable (as long as the game stop flag is ON). Therefore, when the RAM is cleared after that and the game is restored to a state in which the game can be executed (if the game stop flag is turned OFF), the state in which the ball can be rented is restored.

In addition, the payout control microcomputer 171 transmits a ball lending stop signal to the balance display board 172 based on the reception of the ball lending stop command. As a result, the balance display board 172 displays, on the balance display section 61, a number corresponding to the number of game balls that could be rented before the game was controlled to be unexecutable, as shown in FIG. and a state where "E" is displayed to indicate that the ball lending is impossible, as shown in FIG. 78(B), are alternately repeated every 3 seconds. In this way, it is possible for a player or the like who sees "E" indicating that the ball lending is not feasible in the balance display section 61 to recognize that the ball lending is not feasible.

Moreover, in the ball lending control stop processing (S115) shown in FIG. Thus, when the performance control board 120 receives the ball lending impossibility command from the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the ball lending impossibility notification performance for notifying that the ball lending is impracticable. Here, the ball rental impossibility notification effect when the overprize ball prevention function is activated and the ball rental impossibility notification effect when illegal magnetism is detected will be described separately.

FIG. 79(A) shows a ball rental impossibility notification effect when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. As shown in FIG. 79A, a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, the game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. At this time, as a ball rental impossibility notification effect, a ball rental impossibility notification image TK indicating "balls cannot be rented" is displayed on the display screen 50a. In this way, the display of the ball rental impossibility notification image TK enables the player who cannot play the game due to the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function to strongly recognize that the ball cannot be rented. Along with the ball rental impossibility notification effect, a card removal promotion effect is executed on the display screen 50a. In the card removal promotion effect, a card removal promotion image TB indicating "Please press the return button and take out the card" is displayed. As a result, the player can be urged to press the return button 63 and take out from the card unit CU a card containing information on the number of game balls that could be lent before the game was controlled to be unexecutable. be.

FIG. 79(B) shows a ball rental impossibility notification effect when illegal magnetism is detected. As shown in FIG. 79B, the display screen 50a displays a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ER1. A game stop sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are turned off. At this time, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 79(A), the ball rental impossibility notification effect is executed. In this way, the display of the ball lending impossibility notification image TK enables the player who cannot play the game due to detection of illegal magnetism to strongly recognize that the ball cannot be lending. As in the case shown in FIG. 79(A), the card removal prompt effect is executed. As a result, the player can be urged to press the return button 63 and take out from the card unit CU a card containing information on the number of game balls that could be lent before the game was controlled to be unexecutable. be.

In this twelfth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue the game. At this time, if the player pushes down the ball lending button 62 and the game ball lending is executed, the player who cannot play the game will get an unnecessary ball, which will result in a loss. Resulting in. Therefore, after the game becomes unexecutable, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed down, the game ball lending is not executed, thereby preventing the player from being in a loss. is possible.

Further, in the twelfth modified example, when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated based on the difference number of balls being 80000 or more, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In this case, since the player cannot continue playing the game, the player stops playing the game and leaves the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Here, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, it is necessary to clear the RAM in order to return to a state where the game can be played. (On the day when the prize ball prevention function is activated), the game remains unexecutable. Therefore, there is a possibility that another player who does not know that the over-prize preventing function has been activated presses the ball lending button 62 on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to start the game. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed down, the game ball lending is not executed, so that the player who does not fully understand the over-prize preventing function will not lose. It is possible to prevent the situation to occur.

In particular, in the case of a popular pachinko machine, the player presses the ball lending button 62 to secure the pachinko machine (reserve the machine) with the game balls stored in the upper tray 34 to some extent. There is a fact that we go to look for another pachinko machine every time. Under such circumstances, there is a risk that the player will try to secure the machine by pressing the ball lending button 62 on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the over-prize preventing function has been activated. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed down, it is possible to prevent the table from being secured by not executing the ball lending of the game ball.

Further, in the twelfth modified example, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In this case, it is necessary to clear the RAM in order to return to a state where the game can be played, and the staff of the game arcade may not clear the RAM for a while. In that case, there is a possibility that a player who does not understand that the game cannot be executed on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 presses the ball lending button 62 and tries to start the game. Therefore, in this twelfth modification, even if the ball lending button 62 is pressed down, the lending of the game ball is not executed, so that the player who does not fully understand that the game cannot be executed will not lose. It is possible to prevent the situation to occur.

Further, in the twelfth modification, as shown in FIG. 1, the balance display unit 61 (informing means) displays a number (100) corresponding to the number of game balls that can be rented, so that the balls can be rented. indicates that there is Here, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the balance display unit 61 displays "E" as shown in FIG. 78(B) to indicate that ball lending is unexecutable. In this way, the player can easily grasp the situation in which the ball lending is not executed by showing "E" indicating that the ball lending is impossible on the balance display section 61.例文帳に追加

<Thirteenth Modification>
In the eleventh modified example, only the staff of the game hall can substantially set the performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. On the other hand, in the thirteenth modified example, the player can set the performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. Specifically, in the thirteenth modification, the player can set the above-described performance items in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed. Hereinafter, based on FIG. 80, the case where the player sets the above-described performance items will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the customer waiting state, a setting screen G101 for setting the performance of the pachinko game machine PY1 can be displayed on the display screen 50a as the customer waiting performance. . As described above, the setting screen G101 is displayed when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 shown in FIG. 18A-1 is being displayed. While the setting screen G101 shown in FIG. 80(A) is being displayed, when the player moves the cursor to "effect setting" and presses the normal button 40, the display screen 50a appears as shown in FIG. 80(B). , the effect setting image FX is displayed. This effect setting image FX is an image similar to the initial function setting image FS (see FIG. 75B) described in the eleventh modification.

Therefore, while the effect setting image FX shown in FIG. 80(B) is being displayed, the player moves the cursor to the item indicating "switch to setting screen" in the "over-balls abnormal notice effect setting" and presses the normal button 40. is pressed, it is possible to display the over prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 80(C). During the display of the over-prize abnormal notice effect setting image SX, it is possible to set performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice effect. On the other hand, while the effect setting image FX shown in FIG. is pressed, a residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 80(D) can be displayed. During the display of this residual ball number notification effect setting image SY, it is possible to set effect items related to the residual ball number notification effect.

In this thirteenth modification, in the customer waiting state, the player operates the normal button 40 and the select button while the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY is being displayed. , it is possible to set the performance items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. In particular, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. In this way, the player can appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the over-prize abnormal notice effect.

Further, in the thirteenth modification, the player can set whether or not to execute the abnormal over-prize-balls notice effect as a performance item related to the abnormal over-prize-balls notice effect. Therefore, when the player desires that the abnormal over-prize-balls notice effect is not executed, the player can prevent the abnormal over-price-balls-notice effect from being executed. In this way, the player can appropriately adjust whether or not to execute the over-prize abnormal notice effect by his/her own selection.

<14th Modification>
In the tenth modification, based on the number of difference balls being 79550 or more, the abnormal ball over prize announcement effect is executed, and then the residual ball number notification effect is executed (see FIG. 73). ). On the other hand, in the 14th modification, as shown in FIG. 81, based on the number of difference balls being 79550 or more, the over-prize abnormality notice effect is executed, and then the current difference number of balls suggestion effect is executed. is set to run. In the 14th modification, as in the 10th modification, the types of jackpots to be won include jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, jackpot pattern Z1, and jackpot pattern Z2 (see FIGS. 69 and 70). Then, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function. Differences from the tenth modification will be mainly described below.

In this fourteenth modification, as shown in FIG. 81, when the difference number of balls becomes 79550 or more, the over-price abnormal notice effect is executed. Then, when the over-prized ball abnormal notice effect is completed, the current difference ball number suggesting effect is started. Note that the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect and the current difference ball number suggestion effect are executed on the condition that the difference ball number is 79550 or more regardless of the execution of the jackpot game, but the jackpot game is being executed. , and may be executed on the condition that the difference number is 78550 or more.

The current ball number suggesting effect is an effect that suggests the player the current ball number difference, as will be described later. However, in the current difference ball number suggesting effect, the difference number counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101 is not always correctly notified, and the current difference ball number as a guideline is sent to the player. It is designed to be understood. Therefore, in the fourteenth modification, the player is allowed to correctly grasp the current number of difference balls by executing the later-described effect for adjusting the number of difference balls. Then, after the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, at the ending of the jackpot game, a game stop notice effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable with the end of the jackpot game state.

Next, based on FIG. 82, a rendering example of the fourteenth modification will be described. As a precondition, it is assumed that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the difference ball number is slightly less than 79,550. At this time, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a number-of-balls image G110 indicating "1200pt" and a round background image G114 are displayed. Then, it is assumed that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 and the number of difference balls becomes 79550 or more.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 82(B), an over-balls abnormality notice effect is executed on the display screen 50a. In the over-price abnormal notice effect of the 14th modification, an over-price abnormal notice image ZJ showing "the current difference number of balls is 79550 and the difference number of balls is 80000 is abnormal" is displayed. This allows the player to grasp in advance that the number of difference balls is 79550 at the present time and that the game will become unexecutable when the number of difference balls reaches 80000. This over-the-balls abnormal notice effect is executed for about 5 seconds (predetermined number of seconds), and when the over-the-balls abnormal notice effect ends, the current ball number suggesting effect is started.

As described above, the current ball number suggesting effect (specific count number effect) is an effect that suggests the current number of balls to the player. until controlled). Specifically, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 and the number of difference balls reaches 79565, as shown in FIG. At the same time, a current ball number suggestion image ZT showing "79565" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a as a current ball number suggestion effect. Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 and the number of difference balls reaches 79580, a prize number image G110 indicating "1230pt" is displayed as shown in FIG. At the same time, a current ball number suggestion image ZT showing "79580" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a as the current ball number suggestion effect. In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp at any time what the current ball number is by the current ball number suggestion effect.

Here, the present difference ball number suggesting effect of the fourteenth modification does not always correctly inform the difference ball number counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101 as described above. Explain why. In the following description, the number of difference balls counted (measured) by the game control microcomputer 101 will be referred to as "actual number of difference balls". Since the difference number of balls is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls, it is subtracted each time the player shoots a game ball. Therefore, if the number indicating the number of difference balls is subtracted and displayed every time a game ball is fired in the current ball number indication effect, the number of difference balls will be updated (subtracted) frequently. It will be displayed, which may annoy the player.

Therefore, in the fourteenth modification, when the actual difference ball number is subtracted in the current difference ball number indication effect, the subtracted actual difference number is not displayed, but the actual difference before subtraction is displayed. The number of balls is displayed as it is. In other words, even if the player shoots the game ball, the number indicated in the current ball number suggestion effect is not subtracted. In this way, in the current ball number suggestion effect, the displayed number changes (increases) only when the actual ball number increases, so it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from being frequently updated and displayed. Is possible.

Here, in the actual difference ball number indication effect, even if the actual difference ball number is subtracted, the indicated number does not change. The difference (divergence) between Therefore, in the 14th modification, the difference between the actual number of balls and the displayed number is eliminated by executing the actual number of balls with difference. That is, by executing the current ball number adjustment effect, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion effect is correctly displayed as the actual ball number. In this way, even if the correct number of balls is not shown in the current ball number suggestion performance, the current ball number adjustment effect is executed, so that the player can correctly grasp the current ball number difference. It is possible to

In the 14th modification, when the jackpot game ends after the execution of the over-prized abnormal notice performance, the current difference ball number adjustment performance is executed at the end of the ending, in other words, at the start of the game state to be shifted. Further, when the jackpot game is started after the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance is executed, the current difference ball number adjustment performance is executed at the start of the opening. In this way, at the start and end of the jackpot game, the player is allowed to correctly grasp the current number of difference balls. Further, in the fourteenth modification, after the actual difference number of balls reaches 80000 or more, the current difference number of balls adjustment effect is executed at the ending before the jackpot game state ends. This current difference ball number adjustment effect allows the player to correctly grasp the current difference ball number immediately before the game is stopped.

Returning to the description of the effect example of the fourteenth modification. As shown in FIG. 82(D), after the current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "79580" is displayed in the current ball number suggestion effect, the round game ends and the ending is started. It is assumed that As a result, as shown in FIG. 83(A), an ending image G111 suggesting the variable probability effect mode is displayed on the display screen 50a. At this time, although the actual ball number is 79870, the current ball number suggestion image ZT showing "the difference in ball number is 79895" is displayed as the current ball number suggestion effect.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends and the state shifts to the high probability/high base state, the current difference number of balls adjustment effect is executed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 83(B). Specifically, a difference ball number adjustment image ST showing characters of "difference ball number adjustment" is displayed, and a current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "difference ball number 79870" is displayed. Thus, the number shown in the current ball number suggestion image ZT is switched from "79895" to "79870" by the current ball number adjustment effect. In other words, the number of game balls shot by the player during execution of the jackpot game is subtracted from the start of the current ball number suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible for the player to correctly grasp the current number of difference balls at the time when the jackpot game ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed in the high probability/high base state. Also, on the lower side of the display screen 50a, the effect indicating the current number of balls is executed, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D), the variable display of the effect symbol EZ is executed. ing. Here, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, one ball, which is the number of prize balls, is given, so the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT is changed from "79870" to "79871". ”. However, although the game ball is being shot, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT is not subtracted.

In this way, even in the high probability/high base state, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion effect is increased and displayed only when the actual ball difference number increases, and the actual ball difference number decreases. In that case, it will not be displayed after subtraction. As a result, the number of difference balls is not frequently updated and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively conscious of the number of difference balls. That is, in a game state where the base (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls) is less than 1, such as a high-probability base state, the difference number of balls basically decreases as the game progresses. In this case, if the number indicating the actual ball difference number is always displayed accurately, the player may be overly conscious of the number of the ball difference number that decreases as the game progresses. Therefore, in the 14th modification, when the actual ball number decreases, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion effect is not decreased, thereby reducing the number of difference balls, that is, substantially reducing the base. It is possible to avoid excessive awareness.

After that, the game progresses, and it is assumed that SP reach is started by the special drawing 2 lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a background image G113 for SP reach is displayed on the display screen 50a as an effect dedicated to SP reach. Also, at this time, the current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "79890 ball numbers" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. Although the player shoots several game balls during the execution of the SP reach, the current ball number suggesting image ZT continues to show "79890 ball difference". .

Then, when the special figure variation pattern is "SP big hit variation", as shown in FIG. EZ3 stops and displays in a stop mode ("555") suggesting a big win. As a result, the player is informed that he/she has won the jackpot. It should be noted that at the time when the variable effect ends, the actual number of balls is 79,212, although the current number of balls suggesting image ZT indicates “79,890”.

Subsequently, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the current difference ball number adjustment effect is executed. Specifically, the difference ball number adjustment image ST is displayed, and the current difference ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "the difference number 79212" is displayed. In this way, due to the current ball number adjustment effect, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestive image ZT is switched from "79890" to "79212", and the number of game balls fired by the player in the high probability/high base state is increased. subtracted. As a result, it is possible for the player to correctly grasp the current number of difference balls at the time when the jackpot game is started.

Next, as an opening effect, a bonus acquisition image BK indicating "BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 84(C). Then, when the opening ends and the round game starts, the display screen 50a displays the round background image G114 as shown in FIG. As the ball is entered in 14, a prize number image G110 indicating "15pt" is displayed. Also, at this time, the current ball number suggestion image ZT showing "79227" is displayed as the current ball number suggestion effect. In this way, since the increment of the number shown in the winning ball number image G110 is the same as the increment of the number shown in the current ball number suggesting image ZT, the player is informed of the number of game balls that have been shot. I try not to make them aware of it.

After that, the round game progresses, and as shown in FIG. 85(A), the display screen 50a displays a round image G109 indicating "Round 6" and a winning balls image G110 indicating "765pt". Also, at this time, the current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "79989 ball difference" is displayed. Subsequently, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 14, as shown in FIG. A number suggestive image ZT is displayed. Here, in the current ball number suggestion image ZT, when the indicated number becomes 80000 or more, the border surrounding the number is switched to a thick red line. This makes the player aware that the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT is 80000 or more. Even if the number indicated by the current ball number suggesting image ZT is 80000 or more, the number of game balls shot by the player is not reflected, so the actual ball number may be 80000 or more. It's not fixed.

Subsequently, the round game progresses, and just before the round game ends, as shown in FIG. It is Also, at this time, the current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "the ball difference is 80712" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the actual number of balls is 80000 or more when the round game ends. In this case, when the ending starts, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the current ball number adjustment effect is executed. It should be noted that if the actual difference ball number is less than 80000 at the time the round game ends, the current difference ball number adjustment effect is not executed, and as described above, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the current difference A number-of-balls adjustment effect is executed. Thus, in the fourteenth modification, only when the over-prize preventing function is activated when the jackpot game ends, the current difference ball number adjustment performance is executed when the jackpot game ending is started. (See Figure 81).

As shown in FIG. 85(D), in the current ball number adjustment effect, a difference ball number adjustment image ST is displayed, and a current difference ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "the difference number 80602" is displayed. Thus, in the current ball number suggesting image ZT after the execution of the current ball number adjustment effect, it is shown that the difference ball number is 80000 or more. This allows the player to understand that the actual number of balls is 80000 or more and the over-prize prevention function is activated.

Subsequently, in the ending, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a game stop notice effect is executed on the display screen 50a. That is, when the over-prize preventing function is activated when the jackpot game ends, the ending image G111 (see FIG. 18 (C-3)) suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game is not displayed. , the game stop notice effect is executed. In the game stop notice effect, specifically, a game stop notice image YT showing characters "the game will be stopped soon" is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be strongly aware that the game will become unplayable when the ending ends. Note that even at this time, the current ball number suggesting image ZT indicating "the number of difference balls is 80612" is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize prevention function is activated, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. At this time, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the error canceling method image ERX indicating "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM" is displayed. be done. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game cannot be played.

In this fourteenth modification, after the current ball number suggestion effect is started, when the actual ball number becomes less than 78500 (lower limit of effect), the current ball number suggestion image ZT is displayed (the current ball number suggestion effect is executed). This is a number of prize balls larger than the number of prize balls (1500) of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern Z1) that can give the largest number of prize balls in one jackpot game until the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. is required. In other words, after the next jackpot game is over, considering that the over-prize preventing function does not work, the current ball number suggesting effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively conscious of the number of difference balls by continuing to execute the effect indicating the number of difference balls even though the number of difference balls is sufficiently smaller than 80000. be. Although the actual ball number difference (lower limit number of effects) that triggers the current ball number suggestion effect to stop being executed is less than 78500, it may be set to another number (for example, 78000) and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the fourteenth modification, after the current ball number suggesting effect is started, the current ball number suggesting effect is a jackpot game state (advantageous game state), a high probability high base state (advantageous game state), and a low game state. It is executed only when it is in a certain high base state (advantageous gaming state). That is, in the normal game state, the current ball number suggestion effect is not executed. This is because, after shifting to the normal game state in a situation where the actual difference ball number is 80000 or less, the possibility that the actual difference ball number becomes 80000 or more in the normal game state is extremely low. This is because it is preferable not to let the player care about the number of . In this way, even if the current ball number suggesting performance is started in the jackpot game state, the current ball number suggesting performance is not executed when the normal game state is subsequently entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the number of difference balls in the normal game state.

As described in detail above, in the fourteenth modification, when the actual number of balls becomes 79550 or more, as shown in FIG. executed. As a result, the player can grasp how close the game is to becoming unexecutable, that is, how close the over-prize prevention function is to being activated. Also, if the actual number of balls increases during execution of the actual ball number suggestion effect, the number will increase, and if the actual ball number decreases during the execution of the current ball number suggestion effect, the number will increase. Shown as non-decreasing. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of difference balls only when the actual number of difference balls increases. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively aware of the number of difference balls by preventing the player from seeing the number of difference balls frequently increase or decrease.

Further, in the fourteenth modification, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. Corrected to match numbers. Further, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the current ball number adjustment effect is executed, and the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT matches the actual ball number. It is corrected to be shown. In this way, even if the difference between the actual ball number and the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT becomes large, the correct number of difference balls can be obtained by starting or ending the big win game. can be made known to the player.

<Fifteenth Modification>
In the fourteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable (when the over-prize preventing function is activated), as shown in FIG. No one was involved in the production. On the other hand, in the fifteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the character input effect is executed so that the player can participate in the effect.

In the fifteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the attainment effect is executed. The reach achievement effect is a effect for celebrating that the difference number of balls is 80000 or more, as shown in FIG. 87(B). Specifically, in the attainment rendering, the attainment image OF showing the characters "Congratulations on achieving 80,000 shots" and the characters who are happy is displayed. This achievement image OF can be said to be an achievement image suggesting that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000. With this reach achievement effect, it is possible to give a positive impression by making the player feel a sense of accomplishment that he was able to create an extremely rare situation in which the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. That is, by displaying the attainment image OF shown in FIG. 87B instead of the error cancellation method image ERX shown in FIG. It is possible.

An input switching image NK is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 50a during execution of the attainment effect shown in FIG. 87(B). The input switching image NK is an image that prompts the user to press the normal button 40 in order to display a character input image MG, which will be described later. Specifically, the input switching image NK shows the shape of the normal button 40 and the characters "switch to character input screen". Therefore, when the normal button 40 is pressed while the input switching image NK is being displayed, the character input image MG is displayed as a character input effect as shown in FIG. 87(C).

In the character input image MG shown in FIG. 87(C), there is a column of "characters being input", characters that can be entered from "a" to "no", a column of "change characters", and a column of "delete". column, a column of "determination", and a column of "end" are shown. When the character input image MG is displayed, the cursor is moved to the "character change" column with the select button and the normal button 40 is pressed to change each character being displayed. The types of characters that can be switched are hiragana, katakana, romaji, and numbers. Also, while the character input image MG is being displayed, the cursor is moved to the "delete" column with the select button and the normal button 40 is pressed. character) is erased. While the character input image MG is being displayed, while selecting one of the displayed characters with the select button, the cursor is moved to the "determine" column with the select button, and the normal button 40 is pressed. The characters are displayed in the "Characters being entered" column. When the character input image MG is displayed and the cursor is moved to the "end" field by the select button and the normal button 40 is pressed, the character input image MG is displayed and the achievement image OF is displayed. return.

Thus, in the character input effect, the player can operate the select button and the normal button 40 to input arbitrary characters. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 can accept any character selected by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 87(D), when the display of the character input image MG is switched to the display of the attainment image OF, the character input by the player (the "character being input" column of the character input image MG is displayed). ) is displayed. In this way, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable (after the over-prized ball prevention function is activated), the player can display any character selected by the player on the display screen 50a.

Next, a rendering example of the fifteenth modified example will be described with reference to FIG. As a prerequisite, the number of actual difference balls is 80602, and the ending of the jackpot game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a game stop notice image YT is displayed on the display screen 50a as a game stop notice effect. In addition, on the lower side of the display screen 50a, a current ball number suggestion image ZT indicating "the number of balls in difference is 80612" is displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. At this time, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an attainment image OF is displayed as an achievement rendering. Also, at this time, an over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is executed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. The over-prize ball abnormality notification effect is an effect for letting the player know that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated, that is, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. ” is displayed. In this way, even when the attainment effect is executed, the player can be made aware that the game cannot be executed by executing the over-price ball abnormality notification effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an input switching image NK is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 50a during execution of the attainment effect. Here, when the player presses the normal button 40, a character input image MG is displayed as a character input effect as shown in FIG. 87(C). At this time, the player operates the select button and the normal button 40 (predetermined operating means) to cause the effect control microcomputer 121 to receive the character information "Clear BY Taro". As a result, "clear by Taro" is displayed in the "character being input" field. After that, while the character input image MG is being displayed, the player moves the cursor to the "End" column with the select button and presses the normal button 40 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the attainment image OF is displayed, and the input reflection image NP showing the characters "Clear BY Taro" is displayed. As a result, the player can display the input reflection image NP showing the characters "Clear BY Taro" selected by the player, accompanying the achievement image OF and the over-prize-ball abnormality notification image KF. At this time, the player photographs the attainment image OF, the over-the-ball abnormal notification image KF, and the input reflection image NP with the camera of the mobile phone or the like, and shows the photographed images to his friends, or transmits the photographed images to the Internet. It is possible to upload to and brag about. In other words, characters arbitrarily selected by the player are displayed along with the achievement image OF and the abnormal notification image KF, so that the player is put in an extremely rare situation where the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. It is possible to make evidence that has changed. Note that the display of the input reflected image NP corresponds to the "special operation presentation".

Here, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function is activated in a non-erasable storage area (not shown) of the effect RAM 124. It's becoming Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the character information received by the character input effect (for example, the character information of "Clear BY Taro" described above) in a non-erasable storage area (not shown) of the effect RAM 124. ing. The non-erasable storage area is a storage area in which the stored information is not erased by the effect CPU 122 even if the RAM clear is executed in the effect RAM 124 . Therefore, the operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function has been activated and the character information received by the character input effect are stored in the non-erasable area storage area of the effect RAM 124, even if the RAM is cleared. , is never erased. In other words, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the operation information indicating that the prize-ball prevention function has been activated and the character information entered by the player are then cleared by RAM clearing. Even if the control that makes the game unexecutable is canceled, the data remains stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124.例文帳に追加

Here, in the fifteenth modification, the over prize ball abnormal operation history effect will be described with reference to FIG. 88 . As a precondition, as described above, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the player inputs the character information of "Clear BY Taro" by the character input effect. As a result, in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the actuation information indicating that the over-prize preventing function is activated and the character information "Clear BY Taro" are stored. After the power is turned off, the RAM is cleared as the power is turned on, and the customer waiting effect is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the player presses the normal button 40 while the customer waiting demonstration animation G100 (see FIG. 18A-1) is being displayed during execution of this customer waiting effect.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 88A, the post-activation setting screen G201 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The post-operation setting screen G201 includes a field for setting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52, a field for setting the brightness of the display screen 50a ("light amount setting"), and a field for setting the frequency of effects to be executed ("effect setting"). In addition to the column, there is a column for the abnormal operation history of over prize balls. In this way, in the fifteenth modification, when the operation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the production RAM 124, during execution of the customer waiting production, FIG. 18 (A- The setting screen G101 shown in 2) is not displayed, and the post-activation setting screen G201 is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the column of abnormal operation history of over-prize balls on the post-activation setting screen G201 can grasp that the pachinko machine has previously activated the over-prize prevention function. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that the pachinko game machine is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, thereby enhancing the player's desire to play the game.

Then, while the post-activation setting screen G201 is being displayed, it is assumed that the player presses the normal button 40 while moving the cursor to the column of "abnormal operation history of over-prize balls" with the select button. In this case, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an attainment image OF is displayed on the display screen 50a as an attainment effect. Also, at this time, an over-price abnormality notification image KF is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a as an over-price abnormality notification effect. Furthermore, an input reflected image NP showing the characters "Clear BY Taro" is displayed.

In this way, in the fifteenth modification, when the character information "clear by Taro" is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the production RAM 124, when the over-prize preventing function is activated during execution of the customer waiting production. An input reflection image NP showing the character selected by the player is displayed. As a result, it is possible to give the player who activated the over-prize prevention function the privilege that the message continues to remain as proof that the over-prize prevention function has been activated even if the RAM is cleared. . As shown in FIG. 88(B), even if the arrival achievement image OF is displayed during execution of the customer waiting effect, it is different from the case where the arrival achievement image OF is displayed immediately after the over-prizing prevention function is activated. , the input switching image NK is not displayed. That is, since the character input effect (see FIG. 87(C)) is not executed while the customer waiting effect is being executed, the characters shown in the input reflection image NP are the game in which the over-prize prevention function is activated. It is a privilege only for people.

As described above in detail, in the fifteenth modification, the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 80000 or more. After the game is disabled, the player can input any character by operating the normal button 40 and the select button, as shown in FIG. 87(C). As a result, as shown in FIG. 87(D), an input reflected image NP showing the characters "Clear BY Taro" is displayed (a special operation effect is executed). Thus, it is possible to keep the player entertained even after the game has become unworkable. In particular, it is possible to give the player a special sense of accomplishment by displaying an arbitrary character to commemorate the number of difference balls being 80000 or more.

Further, in the fifteenth modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a game An input reflection image NP showing characters input by the user is displayed. As a result, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction by showing the attainment image OF and the characters that the player has input.

Further, in the fifteenth modified example, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the power is shut off. Thereafter, RAM clearing is executed (game information is erased) based on the fact that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on. However, even if the RAM clear is executed, the character information stored in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124 (for example, the character information of "Clear BY Taro") is not erased. As a result, as shown in FIG. 88(B), even after the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the characters input by the player who has set the number of difference balls to 80000 or more are displayed as a memorial. It is possible to

<Sixteenth Modification>
In the fifteenth modification, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, by looking at the over-prize abnormal operation history of the post-operation setting screen G201 shown in FIG. It was possible to grasp that it was the pachinko game machine PY1 in which the ball prevention function was activated. On the other hand, in the 16th modification, it is possible to grasp that it is the pachinko machine PY1 in which the over-prize preventing function has been activated before by seeing the effect after the over-prize abnormal operation shown below. there is The performance (special effect) after the abnormal activation of over-prize balls will not be executed if the over-prize prevention function has never been activated, and will be executed only when the over-prize prevention function has been activated. It's about a performance. In the 16th modification, special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B)), special cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90(B-2)), and special opening effect (see FIG. 91 (B-2) (C-2)) and a special guest waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2)), which will be described in order below.

First, based on FIG. 89, the case where the special SP reach (special reach effect) is executed will be described. The special SP reach is one of the SP reach (reach performance) that makes the player expect a big win, and may be executed only after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated. In other words, if the operation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not execute the special SP reach, and the performance RAM 124 is stored in the non-erasable storage area, the performance control microcomputer 121 can execute the special SP reach. The special SP reach of the 16th modification can be executed only when a special symbol lottery determines a big hit. In other words, if the special SP reach is executed, the loss is not notified, and the special SP reach is an effect indicating that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed.

When the special SP reach is executed, after the N reach, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the SP reach background image G113 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the SP reach start title image G1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 50a. is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89B, a special battle image G123 in which the main character and the enemy character fight with a rainbow effect is displayed on the display screen 50a. Here, in the case of normal SP reach, as shown in FIG. The character has a rainbow color effect. Therefore, by showing the main character with the rainbow effect to the player, it is easy to understand that the special SP reach is being performed instead of the normal SP reach. In addition, the normal SP reach shown in FIG. 21 may be executed not only before the over-prize prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

Then, when the final phase of the special SP reach is reached, a special battle victory image G124 in which the main character is happy to win the battle with a rainbow effect is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the effect symbol EZ1 is displayed. , EZ2, and EZ3 stop and display in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. That is, when the special SP reach is executed, the main character will not be defeated in the battle, and the winning of the jackpot will always be announced. In this way, the player who has grasped the special SP reach can be made to grasp that he has won the jackpot, and that it is the pachinko game machine PY1 in which the function of preventing over-prize balls has been activated before. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and to have great expectations for the subsequent rush.

Next, based on FIG. 90, the case where the special cut-in announcement effect is executed will be described. The notice effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the buttons 40, 41, and the like. I can say. Among the advance notice effects, there is a cut-in advance notice effect in which a cut-in image is temporarily interrupted in the effect being executed on the display screen 50a. The cut-in notice effects include a normal cut-in notice effect and a special cut-in notice effect.

When the normal cut-in advance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. The preview image XY is displayed temporarily. The normal cut-in preview image XY shows the profile of the transformed main character, and indicates that the probability of winning the jackpot is 30%. Therefore, the normal cut-in notice performance is not a performance indicating that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, but after the execution of the normal cut-in preview performance, winning or losing of the jackpot is announced. There is Then, this normal cut-in notice effect may be executed not only before the over-prize prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

On the other hand, the special cut-in notice effect (special notice effect) may be executed only after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated. In other words, if the operation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not execute the special cut-in notice performance. If the non-erasable storage area of the RAM 124 stores operation information indicating that the over-prize preventing function has been activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a special cut-in notice effect. The special cut-in notice effect of the 16th modification can be executed only when it is determined as a big hit in the lottery of special symbols. In other words, if the special cut-in notice effect is executed, the loss is not reported, and the special cut-in notice effect is an effect indicating that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed.

When the special cut-in notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 90(A), for example, during the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, as shown in FIG. 90(B-2), the special cut-in The preview image XZ is displayed temporarily. Although the special cut-in preview image XZ shows the main character's profile, unlike the normal cut-in preview image XY shown in FIG. 90(B-1), the profile of the main character is given a rainbow effect. In this way, by showing the player the profile of the main character with the rainbow effect, it is possible to easily understand that the special cut-in notice effect is being executed instead of the normal cut-in notice effect. After this special cut-in notice effect is executed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. Therefore, it is possible for a player who has grasped the special cut-in notice performance to suddenly grasp the winning of the jackpot and to grasp that the pachinko game machine has previously operated the over-prize preventing function. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and to have great expectations for the subsequent rush.

Next, based on FIG. 91, the case where the special opening effect is executed will be described. The opening effect is a effect indicating the start of the jackpot game, but the opening effect of the 16th modification includes a normal opening effect and a special opening effect.

When the normal opening effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 91(A), after the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win, as shown in FIG. 91(B-1). , a normal bonus image TV showing the characters "LOGO BONUS" is displayed. By displaying the normal bonus image TV, it is possible for the player to understand that the normal opening effect is being executed. Then, in the case of the normal opening effect, as shown in FIG. 91(C-1), the normal opening image TC in which the transformed main character appears appears. This normal opening effect is executed for either a V long jackpot that can substantially obtain a high probability state after a jackpot game or a V short jackpot that cannot obtain a high probability state after a jackpot game (see FIG. 70). be. In other words, the production control microcomputer 121 may execute the normal opening production regardless of the jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, jackpot pattern Z1, or jackpot pattern Z2. Then, this normal opening effect may be executed not only before the over-prize preventing function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated.

On the other hand, the special opening effect (special winning effect) may be executed only after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated. In other words, if the operation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not execute the special opening performance, and the performance RAM 124 does not execute the special opening performance. is stored in the non-erasable storage area, the performance control microcomputer 121 can execute a special opening performance. The special opening performance of the 16th modification can be executed only when the V long jackpot (jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Z1) that can substantially acquire a high probability state after the jackpot game is won. . In other words, if the special opening effect is executed, the effect indicates that the transition to the high-probability state is substantially confirmed as long as the game is played correctly.

When the special opening effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win, and then as shown in FIG. 91(B-2). , and a special bonus image SB showing characters of "special logo BONUS" is displayed. By displaying this special bonus image SB, it is possible for the player to understand that the special opening effect is being executed. In the case of the special opening effect, as shown in FIG. 91(C-2), a special opening image SC is displayed in which the transformed main character appears with a rainbow effect.

In this way, the pachinko game machine PY1, in which the player grasping the special opening performance is made to grasp that it is possible to shift to a high-probability state after the jackpot game by winning the V-long jackpot, and the function of preventing over-prized balls was previously operated. It is possible to grasp that. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and to have great expectations for the subsequent rush. It should be noted that even if the V-long jackpot (jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Z1) is won after the power is turned on after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the special opening effect is not always executed. However, it is set so that a special opening effect is executed very rarely (at a distribution rate of about 5%). In this way, the rarity value of the special opening effect is increased, and it is possible to give a great sense of exhilaration to the player who sees the special opening effect.

Next, based on FIG. 92, the case where the special guest waiting demonstration effect is executed will be described. The customer waiting demonstration effect is part of the customer waiting effect indicating that the variable effect is not being executed. That is, in the customer waiting effect, when the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the customer waiting demonstration effect is started. Note that in the 16th modification, if the player presses the normal button 40 during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the post-activation setting screen G201 shown in FIG. A setting screen G101 shown in A-1) is displayed. The customer-waiting demonstration effects of the sixteenth modification include a normal customer-waiting demonstration effect and a special customer-waiting demo effect.

When the normal customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed for, for example, 30 seconds, and then transformed as shown in FIG. 92(B-1). A normal customer waiting demonstration video TD is displayed in which the hero character and the enemy character fight each other. By displaying the normal customer waiting demonstration animation TD, it is possible for the player to understand that the normal customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed. Then, when the normal customer waiting demonstration animation TD ends, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 return to the state in which they are stop-displayed. After that, the state in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped for 30 seconds -> normal customer waiting demonstration performance -> the state in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped for 30 seconds are repeated. This normal customer waiting demonstration effect may be executed not only before the over-prize prevention function is activated, but also after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

On the other hand, the special customer waiting demonstration effect (special customer waiting effect) may be executed only after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated. In other words, if the operation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated is not stored in the non-erasable storage area of the production RAM 124, the production control microcomputer 121 does not execute the special customer waiting demonstration production. If the non-erasable storage area of the RAM 124 stores operation information indicating that the over-prize preventing function has been activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special customer waiting demonstration effect. Then, in the 16th modification, immediately after the power is turned on (before the first variable performance is started), the performance control microcomputer 121 determines by lottery whether or not the special guest waiting demonstration performance is to be executed. Therefore, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines by lottery not to execute the special guest waiting demonstration effect, the special guest waiting demonstration effect is not executed until the power supply is cut off. Note that in the sixteenth modification, the performance control microcomputer 121, when the operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function has been activated is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124, determines the 30% (predetermined value) by lottery. ratio), it is decided to execute the special customer waiting demonstration effect.

Furthermore, in the 16th modification, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the special guest waiting demonstration effect only from when the power is turned on until the variable display of the effect symbol EZ is started for the first time. In other words, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 decides to execute the special guest waiting demonstration effect by lottery, the special customer waiting demo effect will not be executed after the variable display of the effect symbol EZ is started for the first time after the power is turned on. It is not executed, and a normal customer waiting demonstration effect is executed. In this way, only the player who starts playing the game for the first time after turning on the power can grasp the special guest waiting demonstration effect.

When the special customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the initial display mode (initial roll "324") immediately after the power is turned on. . After the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the initial display mode, for example, for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. SD is displayed. By displaying this special guest waiting demonstration animation SD, it is possible for the player to understand that the special guest waiting demonstration effect is being executed. Then, when the special guest waiting demonstration animation SD ends, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are returned to the state of being stopped in the initial display mode. After that, the state in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped for 30 seconds→the special guest waiting demonstration performance→the state in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped for 30 seconds are repeated.

In this way, it is possible for a player who has grasped the special guest waiting demonstration effect to grasp that the pachinko game machine PY1 has previously operated the over-prize preventing function. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of winning an extremely large number of prize balls, and to make the player feel anticipation for the game to be started. In other words, it is possible to make the player want to activate the over-prize prevention function again during the whole day's game by showing the special guest waiting demo effect as a privilege to start the game for the first time after the power is turned on. be.

As described above in detail, in the 16th modification, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the fact that the over-prize prevention function is activated in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124. The operation information indicating is stored. This operation information is not erased even if RAM clear is executed. As a result, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 operates the over-prize prevention function based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124. It is possible to execute a special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B)) that is never executed before. As a result, the player who has grasped the special SP reach can enjoy the novel SP reach and recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 has been provided with excessive prize balls.

Further, in the 16th modification, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the over-prize ball based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124. It is possible to execute a special cut-in announcement effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2)) that is not executed before the prevention function is activated. As a result, the player who has grasped the special cut-in notice is allowed to enjoy the novel cut-in notice performance (notice performance), and at the same time, the player recognizes that the pachinko game machine PY1 has been provided with excessive prize balls. It is possible to

Further, in the 16th modification, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the over-prize ball based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124. A special opening effect (see FIG. 91 (B-2) and FIG. 91 (C-2)) that is not executed before the prevention function is activated can be executed. As a result, a player who has grasped the special opening performance can enjoy the novel opening performance and recognize that the pachinko game machine PY1 has been provided with excessive prize balls.

Further, in the 16th modification, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the over-prize ball based on the operation information stored in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124. It is possible to execute a special customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2)) which is not executed before the prevention function is activated. As a result, the player who selects the pachinko machine to play is made to recognize that it is the pachinko machine PY1 to which excessive prize balls have been awarded by showing the special guest waiting demonstration effect, thereby making him/her aware of the pachinko machine PY1. It is possible to make the player want to start a game on the pachinko game machine PY1.

<Seventeenth Modification>
In the above 16th modification, when the control for disabling the game continues after the power is turned on, the employee of the amusement arcade immediately recognizes that the control for disabling the game continues. It was difficult. On the other hand, in the 17th modification, when the control that disables the game execution continues after the power is turned on, the employee of the game hall continues the control that disables the game execution. is configured so that it can be grasped immediately.

Based on FIG. 93, the case where the control that disables the execution of the game continues after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated will be described. As a precondition, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and the jackpot game state is terminated, so that the over-prized ball prevention function is activated (predetermined stop condition is satisfied). In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the stop flag for preventing over-prize balls instead of the game stop flag of the above-described mode. As a result, in the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005), the game is controlled to be unexecutable by determining YES in the determination processing of step S101. After that, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off. It should be noted that the over-prize prevention stop flag is switched to OFF by executing the RAM clear.

Under these preconditions, it is assumed that the power is turned on as shown in FIG. 93(A). At this time (when the power is turned on), it is assumed that the RAM clear is not executed by the employee of the game arcade not pressing the RAM clear switch 191 . In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the stop flag for over-prize prevention is ON in the power-on process (S101) of the main control process, and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed ( RAM clear is not executed). When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the over-prize prevention stop flag is ON and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed, it indicates that the over-prize prevention function is not canceled. The over prize ball abnormality maintenance command shown is transmitted to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the over-prize prevention stop flag is OFF or determines that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, the game control microcomputer 101 issues an over-prize abnormality maintenance command to the production control board 120. do not send to

In this way, immediately after the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the over prize ball abnormality maintenance command, and executes the over prize ball abnormality maintenance effect shown in FIG. 93(B). Specifically, in the over-prize abnormality maintenance effect, a red background image RE is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (informing means), and "Error X over-price abnormality is not canceled. Please clear the RAM." is displayed. In addition, a voice (over-the-balls abnormality maintenance voice) saying "The over-the-balls abnormality has not been canceled, please clear the RAM" is output from the speaker 52 (informing means). Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 (informing means) blink in red, and all the board lamps 54 (informing means) blink in red. By this over-prize-ball abnormality maintenance effect, the game hall employee can easily understand that the operation of the over-prize-ball prevention function has not been canceled and the game cannot be executed. .

That is, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the RAM clear switch 191 must be pressed when the power is turned on the next day. There may be a case where the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power is turned on because the machine PY1 is not sufficiently recognized. Therefore, even if such a case occurs, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to immediately grasp that the control that makes the game unexecutable is continuing due to the extra prize ball abnormality maintenance effect. be. As a result, on the day after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the control that disables the game is maintained even after business hours (for example, 9:00) have started, and the player cannot play the game. can be reliably avoided from occurring.

Further, the over-prize-ball abnormality maintenance effect shown in FIG. 93(B) is a dedicated effect that is executed only when the operation of the over-prize-ball prevention function is continued after the power is turned on. In other words, the excessive prize ball abnormality maintenance effect is not executed except immediately after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated, except for the situation where the over prize ball prevention function continues to operate after the power supply is turned on. is. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the employee of the amusement arcade who grasps the over-balls abnormal maintenance effect after the power is turned on to recognize that the abnormality has occurred by showing the effect that they have never seen before. is.

Further, the over prize ball abnormality maintenance effect shown in FIG. 93(B) is started immediately after the power is turned on and continues until the power is cut off. In other words, the over-prize-ball abnormality maintenance effect is not interrupted while the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on. Therefore, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor to easily notice that the over-prize-ball abnormality maintenance effect is being executed after the power is turned on. In addition, the image display device 50 (display screen 50a), the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 for executing the over prize ball abnormal effect shown in FIG. 93(B) correspond to the "informing means". In addition, the image KRX for maintaining the over-prize abnormality displayed on the display screen 50a, the voice output from the speaker 52 saying "the over-prize abnormality is not canceled, please clear the RAM", the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 blinking in red corresponds to the "special abnormal mode".

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the case where the control that disables the execution of the game continues after the power is turned on after the illegal magnetism is detected will be described. As a prerequisite, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an illegal magnetism (specific abnormality) in the error processing (S111) (when a predetermined stop condition is established), the magnetism detection stop flag is turned ON. . As a result (because the magnetism detection stop flag is ON), in the main side timer interrupt processing (S005), the determination processing in step S101 is determined to be YES, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. After that, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off. It should be noted that the magnetism detection stop flag is switched to OFF when the RAM is cleared. That is, as in the twelfth modified example, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game can be returned to a state in which the game can be executed on condition that the RAM is cleared.

Under these preconditions, it is assumed that the power is turned on as shown in FIG. 94(A). At this time (when the power is turned on), it is assumed that the RAM clear is not executed by the employee of the game arcade not pressing the RAM clear switch 191 . In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the magnetism detection stop flag is ON in the power-on process (S101) of the main control process, and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed (RAM clear is not executed). Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the magnetism detection stop flag is ON and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed, the magnetism abnormality maintenance indicating that the abnormality based on the magnetism detection is not canceled A command is transmitted to the production control board 120. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the magnetism detection stop flag is OFF or determines that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, it does not transmit the magnetic abnormality maintenance command to the effect control board 120 .

In this way, immediately after the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121, upon receiving the magnetic abnormality maintenance command, executes the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect shown in FIG. 94(B). Specifically, in the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect, a blue background image BL is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (informing means), and "Error 1 Magnetic detection anomaly has not been canceled. Clear RAM. A magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1 indicating "Please turn on" is displayed. In addition, a voice (magnetic anomaly maintenance voice) is output from the speaker 52 (notification means) saying "Magnetism detection anomaly has not been canceled. Please clear the RAM." Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 (informing means) blink in blue, and all the board lamps 54 (informing means) blink in blue. This magnetic anomaly maintenance effect allows the employee of the game arcade to easily understand that the anomaly based on the magnetic detection has not been canceled and the game cannot be executed.

Further, the magnetic abnormality maintenance effect shown in FIG. 94(B) is a special effect that is executed only when the abnormality based on the magnetic detection continues after the power is turned on. In other words, the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect is an effect that is not executed except immediately after the power source is turned on, except for the situation where the abnormality based on the magnetic detection continues after the power source is turned on, including immediately after the detection of the illegal magnetism. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the employee of the amusement arcade who grasps the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect after the power is turned on to recognize that an abnormality has occurred by showing the effect that they have never seen before. .

Further, the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect shown in FIG. 94(B) is started immediately after the power is turned on and continues until the power is turned off. In other words, the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect is not interrupted while the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. Therefore, it is possible for the employees of the game arcade to easily notice that the magnetic anomaly maintenance effect is being executed after the power is turned on. Note that the magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1 displayed on the display screen 50a, the voice output from the speaker 52 saying "Magnetic detection anomaly has not been canceled. Please clear the RAM", the blue color of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 Blinking corresponds to the "special abnormal mode".

As described in detail above, in the seventeenth modification, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable. After that, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the employee of the game arcade may not press the RAM clear switch 191 . In this case, although the control that disables the game continues, the employee of the game hall may misunderstand that the pachinko machine PY1 is capable of executing the game. However, even in such a case, as shown in FIG. Ball abnormality has not been cleared. Please clear the RAM." is output, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 all blink in red. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the employees of the game arcade are aware that the control that disables the execution of the game continues.

Further, in the seventeenth modification, when illegal magnetism is detected, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable. After that, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the employee of the game arcade may not press the RAM clear switch 191 . In this case, although the control that disables the game continues, the employee of the game hall may misunderstand that the pachinko machine PY1 is capable of executing the game. However, even in such a case, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1 is displayed on the display screen 50a as a magnetic anomaly maintenance effect, and the loudspeaker 52 reads, "Magnetism detection anomaly is canceled. Please clear the RAM." is output, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 all blink in blue. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the employees of the game arcade are aware that the control that disables the execution of the game continues.

<18th Modification>
In the seventeenth modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable and before the game is started by the player, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k are turned on. never moved. On the other hand, in the eighteenth modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable and before the game is started by the player, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, the vibration The dividing member 16k is configured to be movable.

By the way, when the over-prize preventing function is activated (predetermined condition is established) or illegal magnetism is detected (predetermined condition is established), the game is controlled to be unexecutable. , the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the electric tube opening/closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k do not open/close (move). In the following description, the movable members whose driving is controlled by the game control microcomputer 101, that is, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k are appropriately referred to as "game movable members". I will call.

However, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are not stopped at the timing assumed by the game control microcomputer 101, so insufficient As a situation, ball jam may occur. Here, the ball biting means that the game ball is interposed between the movable member and the portion facing the movable member, and the state in which the game ball stays is maintained. In this way, as the game is controlled to be unexecutable, it is assumed that the ball is caught by the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the ball is caught by the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the ball is caught by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and the ball is caught by the distribution member 16k. can be

Therefore, in the eighteenth modification, the ball jamming prevention mode can be set after the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable so as to eliminate the ball jamming. The ball biting prevention mode is one of the modes set by the game control microcomputer 101 . Modes set by the game control microcomputer 101 mainly include a game mode and a RAM clear mode in addition to the ball biting prevention mode. A game mode is a mode in which a player can execute a game. Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 executes the processing of steps S102 to S114 (see FIG. 32) of the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) at, for example, a 4 msec cycle, the game mode is set. It can be said that there is The RAM clear mode is a mode when RAM clear is executed immediately after power-on. Therefore, when the RAM clear mode is set, the processing of steps S102 to S114 (see FIG. 32) of the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is not executed, and the player is disabled from playing the game. .

The ball biting prevention mode of the eighteenth modification is set on the condition that the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on after the game is disabled. That is, as shown in FIG. 95, the condition for starting the ball biting prevention mode is that the control that makes the game unexecutable is canceled by executing RAM clearing after the power is turned on. A condition for terminating the ball biting prevention mode is that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. That is, after the ball jam prevention mode is set, the ball jam prevention mode continues unless the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. As described above, the game mode is started when the RAM clear mode is finished, and the game mode is started when the game game mode is finished.

While the ball biting prevention mode is set, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large prize winning port 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large prize winning port 15, and the electric chew opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the second starting port 12 (electric tube 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the specific area 16 (see FIG. 3). As a result, even if the ball is jammed by the normal AT opening/closing member 14k around the first big prize hole 14, it is possible to eliminate the ball jam. Further, even if the VAT opening/closing member 15k causes ball jamming around the second big winning hole 15, it is possible to eliminate the ball jamming. Further, even if ball jamming occurs around the second starting port 12 due to the electric tube opening/closing member 12k, it is possible to eliminate the ball jamming. Further, even if the distribution member 16k causes the balls to be caught around the specific region 16, it is possible to eliminate the balls to be caught. It should be noted that the "first big winning opening 14", the "second big winning opening 15", the "second starting opening 12", and the "specific area 16" correspond to the "ball entering section".

Here, by eliminating the ball biting as described above, the game ball staying around the first big winning hole 14 starts to flow down, and the game ball may enter the first big winning hole 14. . Alternatively, the game ball staying around the second big winning hole 15 starts flowing down, and the game ball enters the second big winning hole 15. - 特許庁Alternatively, the game ball staying around the second starting hole 12 may begin to flow down and enter the second starting hole 12. - 特許庁Alternatively, the game ball that has stayed around the specific area 16 may begin to flow down, and the game ball may pass through the specific area 16 (enter the specific area 16). In these cases, if prize balls are paid out or a transition to a high-probability state is awarded, an unfair privilege will be awarded to the player.

Therefore, in the eighteenth modification, while the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game control microcomputer 101 detects the game ball by the first big winning hole sensor (detecting means), the second big winning hole sensor 15a ( The game ball detection by the detection means), the game ball detection by the second starting port sensor (detection means), and the game ball detection by the specific area sensor 16a (detection means) are set to be invalid. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 while the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game control microcomputer 101 enables detection of the game ball by the first big winning hole sensor. Since it does not judge that, prize balls are not awarded. Also, even if the game ball enters the second big prize hole 15, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second big prize hole sensor 15a is effective, so the prize ball is awarded. never. Also, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 12, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second start hole sensor is effective, so no prize ball is awarded. . Further, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is effective, so the transition to the high probability state is not given. . As described above, in the ball jamming prevention mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an unfair privilege while eliminating the ball jamming.

Next, the flow of the ball biting prevention mode of the eighteenth modification will be described with reference to FIG. As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 101 has controlled the game to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95, a red background image RE and an error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. Here, the employee of the game hall turns off the power switch 193 by grasping that the over-prize preventing function has been activated in the pachinko game machine PY1. After that, the employee of the game parlor keeps the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1 cut off without turning ON the power switch 193 on the day when the over-prize preventing function is activated.

Then, before the start of business hours on the next day, the employee of the amusement arcade turns on the power switch 193 while pressing the RAM clear switch 191 . As a result, RAM clear is executed and the RAM clear mode is set. When the RAM clearing mode is set, a RAM clearing notification image RC is displayed on the display screen 50a indicating "Please wait for a while. When the push button is pushed five times during the RAM clearing notification, the initial function setting image will be displayed." be done. When the RAM clearing is completed in this manner, the RAM clearing mode is automatically switched to the ball jam prevention mode.

When the ball sticking prevention mode is started, the display screen 50a displays the ball sticking prevention mode image TG showing the characters "ball sticking prevention mode", and the sound of "ball sticking prevention mode" is output from the speaker 52. be done. As a result, it is possible for an employee of the game arcade to easily grasp that the game is set to the ball bite prevention mode. While the ball biting prevention mode is set, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large prize winning port 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large prize winning port 15, and the electric tuner The opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second starting port 12 (electric tube 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening/closing operation for the specific area 16 (see FIG. 3). As a result, even if the balls are stuck around the first big prize winning hole 14, around the second big winning hole 15, around the second starting hole 12 and around the specific area 16, the ball sticking is eliminated. Is possible.

As described above, the ball biting prevention mode of the eighteenth modification continues until the employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 191 . That is, the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the opening/closing operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the opening/closing operation of the electric tuning opening/closing member 12k, and the opening/closing operation of the distribution member 16k continue until the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. In this way, the employee of the game parlor can continue the anti-ball sticking mode for an arbitrary amount of time until it is confirmed that the ball sticking has been eliminated.

Thus, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game mode is switched to the game mode. In the game mode, the normal daytime background image G102 is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the initial display mode (initial roll "324"). In this way, by shifting to the game mode, it becomes possible for the player to play a game.

In addition, in FIG. 95, the flow of the ball bite prevention mode when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated has been described as an example. However, in the flow of the ball biting prevention mode when illegal magnetism is detected, while the game is being controlled to be unexecutable, instead of the error cancellation method image ERX (see FIG. 95) on the display screen 50a, Since it is the same except that the error cancellation method image ER1 (see FIG. 27B) is displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the power-on process (S001) of the eighteenth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The power-on process (S001) of the eighteenth modification shown in FIG. 96 describes in detail the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG.

[Power ON Processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the power ON processing (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first performs access permission setting to the game RAM 104 (S011). As a result, information can be written to or read from the game RAM 104 . Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (whether or not it has been turned ON) (S012). That is, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a RAM clear operation signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed is received from the power supply board 190 when the power is turned on. If the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (YES in S012), the process proceeds to RAM clear processing in step S018. On the other hand, if the pressing operation has not been performed (NO in S012), then it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power failure flag is a flag indicating occurrence of power failure (that the supply of power is interrupted), and is a flag that is turned ON in the power failure monitoring process (S114) shown in FIG. 32 when the power is shut off.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S013), there is a possibility that the power has not been normally cut off, so the process proceeds to RAM clear processing in step S018. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S013), the checksum is calculated (S014) and compared with the checksum calculated at the time of power-off (S015). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the game RAM 104 as numerical values. If the checksum values do not match (NO in S015), the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are not normal, so the process proceeds to RAM clear processing in step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S016.

In step S016, setting management of the working area of the game RAM 104 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103 and set in the work area of the game RAM 104 . After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag (S017), and proceeds to step S019.

In step S019, as other initial settings, the game control microcomputer 101 sets, for example, the game CPU 102, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc., and finishes this process. .

[RAM Clear Processing] As shown in FIG. 97, in the RAM clear processing (S018), the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the effect control board 120 (S020). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121, which has received the RAM clear notification command, grasps that the RAM clear is started, and causes the image control board 140 to display the RAM clear notification image RC (see FIG. 95). command.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 clears (or delete) (S021). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not RAM clearing is completed (S022). If it is determined that the RAM clear has not been completed (NO in S022), the process returns to step S021. Thus, the RAM clear mode continues until the RAM clear is completed. On the other hand, in step S022, if it is determined that RAM clearing is completed (YES in S022), the action area of game RAM 104 is initialized (S023). In this initial setting (S023), the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. FIG.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game stop flag indicating that the game has been controlled to be unexecutable is ON (S024). If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S024), it means that it is not time to turn on the power after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable, and the process proceeds to step S019 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S024), it means that the power is turned on after the game has been disabled and the game stop flag is turned OFF (S025). As a result, the control that made the game unexecutable is released. Then, after the ball biting prevention mode process (S026) is executed, the process proceeds to step S019 shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, as described in the seventeenth modification, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, instead of the game stop flag, if the over-prize preventing stop flag is turned ON, in step S024, It is determined whether or not the stop flag for preventing over-prize balls is ON. Then, if it is ON, in step S025, the stop flag for over-prize prevention is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to ball biting prevention mode processing (S026). Further, as described in the 17th modified example, when an illegal magnetism is detected, instead of the game stop flag, if the magnetism detection stop flag is turned ON, in step S024, the magnetism detection stop flag is ON. If it is ON, the magnetism detecting stop flag is turned OFF in step S025, and the process proceeds to ball bite prevention mode processing (S026).

[Ball Biting Prevention Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 98, in the ball biting prevention mode processing (S026), the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a ball biting prevention mode notification command to the effect control board 120 (S030). . As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121, which has received the ball bite prevention mode notification command, grasps that the ball bite prevention mode has started, and displays the ball bite prevention mode image TG (see FIG. 95) to the image control board 140. ) is output. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 that has received the ball sticking prevention mode notification command controls the voice control circuit 161 (see FIG. 7) so that the speaker 52 outputs the sound "ball sticking prevention mode".

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes normal AT opening/closing member drive processing (S031). By this normal AT opening/closing member driving process (S031), the first large winning opening solenoid is driven, and the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large winning opening 14. FIG. Moreover, the game control microcomputer 101 executes VAT opening/closing member drive processing (S032). By this VAT opening/closing member driving process (S032), the second large winning opening solenoid is driven, and the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large winning opening 15. FIG. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 executes electric chew opening/closing member drive processing (S033). By this electric chew opening/closing member driving process (S033), the electric chew solenoid is driven, and the electric chew opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the second starting port 12. FIG. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 executes distribution member drive processing (S034). By this distribution member driving process (S034), the distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening and closing operation with respect to the specific area 16. FIG.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes sensor detection invalidation processing (S035). By this sensor detection invalidation process (S035), the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a is detected. It is set so that the detection of game balls by is disabled. As a result, even if the game ball enters the first big prize hole 14, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the first big prize hole sensor is effective, and the prize ball never given. Also, even if the game ball enters the second big prize hole 15, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second big prize hole sensor is effective, and the prize ball is awarded. never Also, even if the game ball enters the second start hole 12, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the second start hole sensor is effective, and the prize ball is awarded. There is no Also, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the game control microcomputer 101 does not determine that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid, and the transition to the high probability state is given. There is no

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (S036). If the RAM clear switch 191 has not been pressed (NO in S036), the process returns to step S031, and the processes of steps S031 to S036 are repeatedly executed. Thus, the ball jam prevention mode continues until the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed (YES in S036), it outputs a ball biting prevention mode end command to the effect control board 120 (S037). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121, which has received the ball biting prevention mode end command, grasps that the ball biting prevention mode has ended, and displays the normal daytime background image G102 for the image control board 140 (see FIG. 95). , and outputs a command for displaying the initial display mode of the effect symbol EZ (initial output "324"). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes sensor detection enable switching processing (S038), and proceeds to the processing of step S019 shown in FIG.

Thus, by the sensor detection enable switching process (S038), the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor, and the specific area is detected. It is set so that the detection of game balls by the sensor 16a is enabled. As a result, the player can play the game normally as the game mode shifts from the ball biting prevention mode to the game mode.

As described in detail above, in the eighteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric The chew opening/closing member 12k and the distribution member 16k) may cause ball engagement. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member) are set to the ball biting prevention mode from the time the power is turned on until the transition to the game mode. 12k and the distribution member 16k) move. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

In addition, in the eighteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution The member 16k) may cause ball jamming. Therefore, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are set to the ball biting prevention mode from the time the power is turned on until the transition to the game mode. moves. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

Further, in the eighteenth modification, when the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are moved to prevent ball biting. When is resolved, the game ball may enter the first big winning hole 14, the second big winning hole 15 and the second starting hole 12, or the game ball may pass through the specific area 16.例文帳に追加However, when the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, and the game ball is detected and specified by the second starting hole sensor. It is set so that the detection of game balls by the area sensor 16a is disabled. This makes it possible to prevent an unintended benefit from being granted after the power is turned on.

Further, in the eighteenth modification, if the game is not controlled to be unexecutable before the power is turned on, the game movable member is not set to the ball biting prevention mode from when the power is turned on until it shifts to the game mode. (Normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) do not move. On the other hand, if the control that makes the game unexecutable is canceled by executing the RAM clear after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. As a result, the game movable member moves. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game movable member from moving every time after the power is turned on. That is, only in a special situation where the game is controlled to be unexecutable before the power is turned on and the control that makes the game unexecutable is canceled after the power is turned on, the game movable member is moved to engage the ball. can be eliminated (prevented).

<Nineteenth Modification>
In the eighteenth modified example, the ball biting prevention mode is set after the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable (see FIG. 95). On the other hand, in the nineteenth modified example, as shown in FIG. 99, the ball biting prevention mode is set from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable to when the power is turned off. Differences from the eighteenth modified example will be mainly described below.

In the 19th modified example, the ball bite prevention mode automatically shifts to the ball bite prevention mode after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. That is, in the 19th modification, the condition for starting the ball biting prevention mode is only that the game is controlled to be unexecutable, and no operation by the staff of the game arcade is required. While the ball bite prevention mode is set, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the first large prize winning port 14, and the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large prize winning port, as in the eighteenth modified example described above. 15, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening/closing operation for the specific area 16 (see FIG. 3). As a result, even if the ball is jammed by the normal AT opening/closing member 14k around the first big prize hole 14, it is possible to eliminate the ball jam. Also, even if ball sticking due to VAT occurs around the second big winning hole 15, it is possible to eliminate the ball sticking. Further, even if ball jamming occurs around the second starting port 12 due to the electric tube opening/closing member 12k, it is possible to eliminate the ball jamming. Further, even if the distribution member 16k causes the balls to be caught around the specific region 16, it is possible to eliminate the balls to be caught.

Further, while the ball biting prevention mode is set, similar to the eighteenth modification described above, the game control microcomputer 101 detects the game ball by the first big winning hole sensor, and detects the game ball by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is set so that the detection of the ball, the detection of the game ball by the second starting hole sensor, and the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 16a are disabled. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first big winning hole 14 during the period from when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated until the power is cut off, no prize ball is awarded and the game is temporarily played. Even if the ball enters the second big winning hole 15, the prize ball is not awarded, and even if the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, the prize ball is not awarded. , even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the transition to the high probability state is not granted. As described above, even in the 19th modification, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an unfair privilege while eliminating the ball biting in the setting change mode.

Here, in the nineteenth modification, the ball biting prevention mode is automatically terminated when a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after starting. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the end condition of the ball biting prevention mode is that a specified time has passed since the ball biting prevention mode was started. In this way, since the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) do not move due to the passage of the specified time, the game movable member is longer than necessary. It is possible to avoid the situation of continuing to move.

That is, it is assumed that the player is still sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 immediately after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In such a situation, if the game movable member continues to move for a long time, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the setting of the ball biting prevention mode is limited to the specified time, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game movable member continues to move as much as possible. .

Next, the flow of the ball biting prevention mode of the nineteenth modification will be described with reference to FIG. As a precondition, it is assumed that the jackpot game is being executed and the difference number of balls is 80000 or more. In this case, as shown in FIG. 99, the game mode is still set and the over-prize preventing function is not activated. After that, when the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function, but at this time, the game mode is automatically switched to the ball biting prevention mode.

When the ball biting prevention mode is started, the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large prize winning port 14, the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large prize winning port 15, and the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the second starting port 12 (electric tube 12D), and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the specific area 16 (see FIG. 3). As a result, even if the balls are stuck around the first big prize winning hole 14, around the second big winning hole 15, around the second starting hole 12 and around the specific area 16, the ball sticking is eliminated. Is possible.

Here, in the nineteenth modification, even when the ball biting prevention mode is started, as shown in FIG. 96, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display screen 50a. As a result, the player who activates the over-prized ball prevention function is made to grasp only that the game cannot be executed, and is not conscious of the fact that the ball biting prevention mode is set. . In this way, in the ball biting prevention mode before the power is turned off, the effect suggesting that the ball biting mode is set is not executed, thereby giving the player a sense of incongruity that the game movable member is moving. I try not to

When a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the start of the ball-biting prevention mode, the ball-biting prevention mode automatically ends. In this way, unlike the 18th modification, it is possible to end the ball bite prevention mode without any operation by the employee of the game arcade. Note that the display screen 50a continues to display the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX before the ball biting prevention mode ends and even after the ball biting prevention mode ends. . After that, the employee of the game hall will turn off the power switch 193 after grasping that the over-prize preventing function is operating in the pachinko game machine PY1.

In addition, in FIG. 99, the flow of the ball biting prevention mode when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated has been described as an example. However, in the flow of the ball biting prevention mode when illegal magnetism is detected, while the game is being controlled to be unexecutable, instead of the error cancellation method image ERX (see FIG. 99) on the display screen 50a, Since it is the same except that the error cancellation method image ER1 (see FIG. 27B) is displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the nineteenth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The main timer interrupt process (S005) shown in FIG. 100 is executed instead of the main timer interrupt process (S005) shown in FIG.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] As shown in FIG. 100, in the main side timer interrupt processing (S100), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the game stop flag is ON. If the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), it means that the game is not controlled to be unexecutable, and steps S102 to S114 are performed as described above. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), it means that the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the ball biting prevention mode process is executed (S116), and the process proceeds to step S114.

It should be noted that, as described in the seventeenth modification, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, instead of the game stop flag, if the over-prize ball prevention stop flag is turned ON, in step S101, It is determined whether or not the stop flag for preventing over-prize balls is ON. Then, if it is ON, the process proceeds to the ball biting prevention mode process (S116). Further, as described in the 17th modified example, when an illegal magnetism is detected, instead of the game stop flag, when the magnetism detection stop flag is turned ON, in step S101, the magnetism detection stop flag is ON. Then, if it is ON, the process proceeds to the ball biting prevention mode process (S116).

[Ball Biting Prevention Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 101, in the ball biting prevention mode processing (S116), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the ball biting prevention mode end flag is ON (S040). . The ball engagement prevention mode end flag indicates that the ball engagement prevention mode has ended. If the ball engagement prevention mode end flag is ON (YES in S040), the ball engagement prevention mode is terminated, and this processing is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the ball engagement prevention mode end flag is not ON (YES in S040), then it is determined whether or not the ball engagement prevention mode start flag is ON (S041). The ball engagement prevention mode start flag indicates that the ball engagement prevention mode has started.

If the ball engagement prevention mode start flag is ON (YES in S041), the process proceeds to step S043. On the other hand, if the ball engagement prevention mode start flag is not ON (NO in S041), the ball engagement prevention mode start flag is turned ON (S042), and the process proceeds to step S043. In step S043, normal AT opening/closing member drive processing is executed. By this normal AT opening/closing member driving process (S043), the first large winning opening solenoid is driven, and the normal AT opening/closing member 14k repeats the opening/closing operation for the first large winning opening 14. FIG. Next, a VAT opening/closing member driving process is executed (S044). By this VAT opening/closing member drive processing (S044), the second large winning opening solenoid is driven, and the VAT opening/closing member 15k repeats the opening/closing operation for the second large winning opening 15. FIG. Next, electric chew opening/closing member drive processing is executed (S045). By this electric chew opening/closing member driving process (S045), the electric chew solenoid is driven, and the electric chew opening/closing member 12k repeats the opening/closing operation with respect to the second starting port 12. FIG. Next, a distribution member driving process is executed (S046). By this distribution member driving process (S046), the distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the distribution member 16k repeats the opening and closing operation with respect to the specific area 16. FIG.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes sensor detection invalidation processing (S047). By this sensor detection invalidation process (S047), the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor, and the specific area sensor 16a is detected. It is set so that the detection of game balls by is disabled. Thus, even if the game ball enters the first big prize hole 14, no prize ball is given, and even if the game ball enters the second big prize hole 15, the prize ball is given. Even if the game ball enters the second starting port 12, no prize ball is given, and even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the transition to the high probability state is given. never be

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the ball biting prevention mode started (S048). If the specified time has not passed (NO in S048), it is not the timing to end the ball biting prevention mode, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if the specified time has elapsed (YES in S048), it is time to end the ball biting prevention mode. Therefore, the ball biting prevention mode end flag is turned ON (S049), the ball biting prevention mode start flag is turned OFF (S050), and this processing is finished.

As described in detail above, in the 19th modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric The chew opening/closing member 12k and the distributing member 16k) may cause ball engagement. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k) The electric chew opening/closing member 12k and the distribution member 16k) move. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

In addition, in the nineteenth modification, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution The member 16k) may cause ball jamming. Therefore, the game movable members (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution mode are set to the ball bite prevention mode from the time when the game is controlled to be unexecutable until the power is cut off). Member 16k) moves. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

Further, in the nineteenth modification, when the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are moved to prevent ball biting. If this is resolved, the game ball may enter the first big winning hole 14, the second big winning hole 15, or the second starting hole 12, or the game ball may pass through the specific area 16.例文帳に追加However, when the ball biting prevention mode is set, the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a, and the game ball is detected and specified by the second starting hole sensor. It is set so that the detection of game balls by the area sensor 16a is disabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unintended award from being given during the period from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable until the power is cut off.

<Twentieth Modification>
In the eleventh modified example, the employee of the game hall can appropriately set the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. That is, an employee of the game hall sets the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect to, for example, 75000, and the number of difference balls becomes 75000 or more as shown in FIG. 76(B). Based on this, the over-prize ball abnormal notice effect was started. However, in the eleventh modified example, the information that the number of difference balls is 75000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-price abnormal notice effect, is stored in the effect RAM 124 . Therefore, when the power supply is turned off (power-off state), there is a possibility that the information that the number of difference balls is 75000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, is erased from the effect RAM 124 .

Therefore, in the twentieth modification, as shown in FIG. 102, FRAM (registered trademark) 125 is provided on sub-control board 125, and FRAM 125 contains information on the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-price abnormal notice effect. It is designed to be remembered. The FRAM 125 is non-volatile storage means (power-off holding storage means) capable of holding stored information even in a power-off state. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, it is possible to hold the information on the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect.

By the way, after a pachinko game machine is designed and developed, an application is made to check whether or not it meets the appropriate specifications. Therefore, the FRAM 125 stores information (predetermined storage information) indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is, for example, 75000 or more. However, after the inspection is finished, there may be a case where it is desired to change the number of difference balls, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, from 75000 or more according to market conditions and trends. In this case, the information stored in the FRAM 125, which is a non-volatile storage means, cannot be easily rewritten.

Therefore, in the twentieth modification, the information stored in the FRAM 125 can be rewritten using the shipping inspection process in order to deal with the above problem. The inspection process at the time of shipment is an inspection performed at the time of shipment after the pachinko game machine PY1 is mass-produced. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is mass-produced and assembled, sensors (such as the first starter sensor), lamps (board lamp 54 and frame lamp 53), movable bodies (movable devices 55, 56, 58 ), the pachinko machine PY1 receives an inspection command (shipping inspection command) from the inspection substrate to confirm whether the display means (image display device 50) operates without problems.

Here, threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 shown in FIG. 103 are stored in advance in the rendering ROM 123 as a threshold setting information pattern determination table. The threshold value setting information patterns A1 to F1 are setting information for setting the number of difference balls to the FRAM 125 as a trigger for starting the over-prize abnormal notice effect. Concretely, as shown in FIG. 103, the threshold setting information pattern A1 is setting information for setting the number of difference balls to be 30000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern A1 is selected (selected) from threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF01" from an inspection board 400 (see FIG. 104) described later. be done. The threshold value setting information pattern B1 is setting information for setting the difference ball number to be 40000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern B1 is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF02" from the inspection board 400, which will be described later. The threshold value setting information pattern C1 is setting information for setting the difference ball number to be 50000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern C1 is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF03" from the inspection board 400, which will be described later.

The threshold value setting information pattern D1 is setting information for setting the difference ball number to be 60000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern D1 is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF04" from the inspection board 400, which will be described later. The threshold setting information pattern E1 is setting information for setting the difference ball number to be 70000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern E1 is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF05" from the inspection board 400, which will be described later. The threshold value setting information pattern F1 is setting information for setting the difference ball number to be 75000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. This threshold setting information pattern F1 is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command "AF06" from the inspection board 400, which will be described later. Thus, when one threshold setting information pattern is selected from the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the threshold setting information pattern in the FRAM125.

Next, based on FIG. 104, the case of rewriting the information stored in the FRAM 125 in the shipping inspection process will be described. As a premise, it is assumed that the FRAM 125 stores in advance information indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is, for example, 75000 or more. Then, it is assumed that there is a request from the market to speed up the start timing of the over-prize abnormal notice effect because the start timing of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is slow at 75000 or more. In this case, the inspection board 400 is connected to the performance control board 120 as shown in FIG. The inspection substrate 400 has a changeover switch 401 that can be switched by an inspector (manufacturer). Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, an inspection command (specific command) is output from the inspection board 400 to the effect control board 120 according to the position of the switch 401 set by the inspector.

Here, the inspector adjusts the position of the changeover switch 401 to output the inspection command “AF04” from the inspection board 400 to the effect control board 120 . Thereby, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives the inspection command "AF04", it selects (selects) the threshold setting information pattern D1 from among the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 stored in the production ROM 123. And the production|presentation control microcomputer 121 makes FRAM125 memorize|store the selected threshold value setting information pattern D1 (specific storage information). In this way, the pachinko game machine PY1 in which the threshold setting information pattern D1 is stored in the FRAM 125 is shipped to the market and installed in the game arcade.

After that, during the game, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a differential ball number command including information on the calculated differential ball number to the production control board 120, so the production control microcomputer 121 sequentially grasps the differential ball number. can do. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121, while grasping the number of difference balls at the present time, refers to the threshold setting information pattern D1 stored in the FRAM 125 to determine whether the number of difference balls at the present time is 60000 or more. determine whether Then, when it is determined that the number of difference balls at the present time is 60000 or more, an over-prize abnormal notice effect (see FIG. 74(B)) is executed. However, in this case, unlike the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect shown in FIG. 74(B), the over-the-ball abnormal notice image showing "the remaining 20,000 shots increase and the over-the-ball abnormality" is displayed on the display screen 50a. ZI is displayed. As described above, even if the FRAM 125 stores at the time of application (inspection) information indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is, for example, 75000 or more, the inspection process at the time of shipment is used. By doing so, it is possible to rewrite the information on the difference number of balls to 60000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect.

By the way, in the shipping inspection process, it is preferable that the inspector (manufacturer) can confirm that the desired threshold value setting information pattern is correctly stored in the FRAM 121 . Therefore, in the twentieth modification, when the threshold setting information pattern is stored in the FRAM 125, as shown in FIGS. KC" is displayed.

In the left two digits of the six-digit confirmation code KC, "99" is displayed to indicate that the process of storing the threshold setting information pattern in the FRAM 125 has been executed. Therefore, if the inspector sees "99" in the left two digits of the confirmation code KC, he/she can grasp that the process of storing the threshold setting information pattern in the FRAM 125 has been executed. In the middle two digits of the 6-digit confirmation code KC, a symbol indicating the threshold setting information pattern that the effect control microcomputer 121 tried to store in the FRAM 125 is displayed. Accordingly, the inspector can determine whether or not the pattern is the threshold setting information pattern selected by the inspector by looking at the symbol indicated by the middle two digits of the confirmation code KC. In the right two digits of the 6-digit confirmation code KC, the effect control microcomputer 121 reads the threshold setting information pattern stored in the FRAM 125, and a symbol indicating the read threshold setting information pattern is displayed. Therefore, the inspector can grasp the threshold setting information pattern currently stored in the FRAM 125 by looking at the symbol indicated by the right two digits of the confirmation code KC.

In this way, the inspector compares the middle 2 digits and the right 2 digits of the confirmation code KC displayed on the display screen 50a to determine the threshold setting information pattern selected by him/herself (the trigger for starting the over-prize abnormal notice effect). It is possible to confirm whether the difference number of balls) is correctly stored in the FRAM 125 . That is, as shown in FIG. 105(A), it is assumed that the confirmation code KC indicating "99D1D1" is displayed. In this case, since the middle two digits are "D1", it can be seen that the threshold setting information pattern to be stored in the FRAM 125 is the threshold setting information pattern D1. Since the right two digits are "D1", it can be understood that the threshold setting information pattern currently stored in the FRAM 125 is the threshold setting information pattern D1. In this way, when the middle two digits and the right two digits of the confirmation code KC match, the inspector sends the FRAM 121 the desired threshold value setting information pattern (the difference ball that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect). number) has been correctly memorized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(B), it is assumed that the confirmation code KC indicating "99D1F1" is displayed. In this case, since the middle two digits are "D1", it can be seen that the threshold setting information pattern to be stored in the FRAM 125 is the threshold setting information pattern D1. However, since the right two digits are "F1", it can be understood that the threshold setting information pattern currently stored in the FRAM 125 is the threshold setting information pattern F1. In this way, in the confirmation code KC, the middle two digits and the right two digits do not match, so that the inspector sends the desired threshold setting information pattern to the FRAM 121. number) is not stored correctly.

As described in detail above, in the twentieth modification, at the time of inspection (at the time of application), the FRAM 125 stores information ( (predetermined storage information) is stored. In this case, in the shipping process at inspection, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives an inspection command (see FIG. 104) from the inspection board 400 outside the pachinko game machine PY1, and is stored in the FRAM 125. The information can be rewritten, for example, to a threshold setting information pattern D1 (specific storage information) indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is 60000 or more. As a result, it is possible to execute over-the-ball abnormal notice effect (specific effect, advance notice effect) based on the difference ball number becoming 60000 or more. That is, before the pachinko game machine PY1 is put on the market, it is possible to set the specifications so that the over-prize abnormal notice effect is executed when the number of difference balls becomes 60000 or more.

Further, in the twentieth modification, when the information stored in the FRAM 125 is rewritten to the threshold setting information pattern D1 indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is 60000 or more, the image is displayed. The device 50 (rewrite notification means) displays the confirmation code KC indicating "99D1D1" on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 105(A). This makes it possible to confirm that rewriting to the threshold setting information pattern D1 has been correctly executed in the FRAM 125 . In other words, when the image display device 50 displays the confirmation code KC indicating "99D1F1" on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. It is possible to grasp that it was not executed.

<21st Modification>
In the twentieth modified example, it was possible to change the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect before the pachinko game machine PY1 is put on the market (before it is installed in the game hall). On the other hand, in the twenty-first modification, after the pachinko machine PY1 is put on the market (installed in the game hall), it is possible to change the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormality notice effect. configured to allow However, rewriting of the information stored in the FRAM 125 is preferably not executable by the player, and is preferably executable only by an employee of the game arcade. Therefore, in the 21st modification, only during the initial setting after the power is turned on, the employee of the game hall performs a special operation on the select button (operating means) to start the extra prize abnormal notice effect. It is possible to change the number of difference balls that triggers.

In the 21st modification, similarly to the 20th modification described above, the effect ROM 123 stores in advance the threshold value setting information patterns A1 to F1 shown in FIG. Then, when the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one of the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 in response to a special operation on the select button at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on, The selected threshold setting information pattern is stored in the FRAM 125 . As a result, by referring to the threshold value setting information pattern stored in the FRAM 125 while grasping the number of difference balls at the present time of the performance control microcomputer 121, the difference number of balls determined by the threshold value setting information pattern is exceeded. It is possible to start a ball abnormality notice effect.

In this 21st modification, as shown in FIG. 106, operation password information corresponding to the threshold value setting information patterns A1 to F1 is stored in the performance ROM 123, respectively. The operation password information is operation information for the select button for selecting the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1.

Specifically, the effect ROM 123 stores operation password information "up, down, down, right, right" for selecting the threshold setting information pattern A1. Therefore, when a special operation of "up, down, down, right, right" is performed using the select button (cross key) in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 detects the select button sensor (not shown). Receives operation information indicating "up, down, down, right, left" from. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern A1 when judging that the operation information matches the operation password information "up, down, down, right, right". Further, the effect ROM 123 stores operation password information "up, down, down, left, left" for selecting the threshold value setting information pattern B1. Therefore, when a special operation of "up, down, down, left, left" is performed using the select button in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs "up, down, down, left, left" from the select button sensor. receive operation information indicating Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern B1 when judging that the operation information matches the operation password information "up, down, down, left, left". Further, the effect ROM 123 stores operation password information "down, down, up, up, right, right" for selecting the threshold setting information pattern C1. Therefore, when a special operation of "down, down, up, right, right" is performed using the select button in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs "down, down, up, up, right" from the select button sensor. Receive operation information indicating "Right". As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern C1 when determining that the operation information matches the operation password information "down, down, up, right, right".

Further, the effect ROM 123 stores operation password information "down, down, left, right, left, right" for selecting the threshold setting information pattern D1. Therefore, when a special operation of "down, down, left, right, left, and right" is performed using the select button in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs "down, down, left, right, left, and right" from the select button sensor. receive operation information indicating Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern D1 when judging that the operation information matches the operation password information "down, down, left, right, right". The effect ROM 123 also stores operation password information "left, right, left, right, upper right" for selecting the threshold setting information pattern E1. Therefore, when a special operation of "left, right, left, right, up" is performed using the select button in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 indicates "left, right, left, right, up, up" from the select button sensor. Receive operation information. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern E1 when judging that the operation information matches the operation password information "left, right, left, right, upper". Further, the effect ROM 123 stores operation password information "right, right, left, left, bottom, bottom" for selecting the threshold value setting information pattern F1. Therefore, when a special operation of "right, right, left, left, bottom, bottom" is performed using the select button in the password setting at the time of initial setting, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 121 indicates "right, right, left, left, bottom, bottom" from the select button sensor. Receive operation information. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold value setting information pattern F1 when judging that the operation information matches the operation password information "right, right, left, lower, left, lower".

Next, based on FIG. 107, the case where the threshold value setting information pattern is stored in the FRAM 125 at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on will be described. As shown in FIG. 107A, when RAM clearing is started after power is turned on, a RAM clearing notification image RC is displayed on the display screen 50a. The RAM clearing notification image RC is displayed only for 30 seconds after the start of RAM clearing as described above. Therefore, when the game hall employee presses the normal button 40 five times while the RAM clear notification image RC is being displayed, the initial function setting image FS can be displayed as shown in FIG. 107(B). .

As shown in FIG. 107(B), in the initial function setting image FS, the employee of the game hall uses the select button to move the cursor to the item indicating "switch to setting screen" of "over-prize abnormal notice effect setting". When the normal button 40 is pressed at the same time, the over-price abnormal notice effect setting image SZ shown in FIG. 107(C) can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 107(C), in the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect setting image SZ, an item indicating "ON" and "OFF" are selected in "Set ON/OFF of the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect." There are items shown. Therefore, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "ON", the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set to be executable. On the other hand, when the cursor is moved to the item indicating "OFF", the over-prize abnormal notice effect is set to be unexecutable.

Also, in the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect setting image SZ, you can enter the operation password information in "Set the number of balls to execute the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect. Please press the password setting and enter the password." It's becoming That is, the employee of the game hall moves the cursor to the item indicating "password setting", presses the normal button 40, and then uses the select button to input any of the operation password information shown in FIG. In this way, when the employee of the game hall inputs, for example, "bottom, bottom, left, right, right" as the operation password information, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the operation information indicating "bottom, bottom, left, right, right". Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the threshold setting information pattern D1 by referring to the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 shown in FIG. 106 for the received operation information. As a result, the threshold value setting information pattern D1 is stored in the FRAM 125, and it is possible to change the number of difference balls to 60000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prized abnormal notice effect.

In addition, in the initial function setting image FS shown in FIG. 107(B), there is an item indicating "initial setting" in the "over prize ball abnormality notice effect setting". Therefore, the employee of the game hall uses the select button to align the cursor with the item indicating "initial setting" of the "over-the-ball abnormal notice effect setting", and presses the normal button 40 to perform the over-the-ball abnormal notice. It is possible to return the setting of the production to the default. That is, when the setting of the over-prized ball abnormality notice effect is returned to the default, the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is set to be executable, and the threshold value setting information pattern F1 is selected. As a result, the threshold value setting information pattern F1 is stored in the FRAM 125, and the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prized abnormal notice effect becomes 75000 or more, which is the default value. In this way, the employee of the game hall can select the item indicating "initial setting" without performing a special operation to the select button (for example, "right, right, left, bottom, left, bottom" for storing the threshold setting information pattern F1). Only by pressing the normal button 40, it is possible to return the setting of the over-prize abnormal notice effect to the default.

In this 21st modification, it is possible to grasp which threshold setting information pattern is stored (how many difference balls are used as the trigger for starting the over-prize abnormal notice effect) even during the game. It has become. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108, the threshold notification effect is executed in the lower left display area 50f of the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. The threshold value notification effect is the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-ball abnormal notice effect, that is, the threshold setting information stored in the FRAM 125, depending on the color (notification mode) of the circular threshold icon QT displayed in the lower left display area 50f. This is an effect that notifies the type of pattern.

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the color (notification mode) of the threshold icon QT according to the type of the threshold setting information pattern stored in the FRAM 125, as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the threshold setting information pattern A1 (the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is 30000) is stored, the color of the threshold icon QT is white, and the threshold setting information When the pattern B1 (the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormality notice effect is 40000) is stored, the color of the threshold icon QT is blue, and the threshold setting information pattern C1 (over-prize abnormality notice effect) is stored. 50000) is stored as the trigger for starting the production, the color of the threshold icon QT is green, and the threshold setting information pattern D1 60000) is stored, the color of the threshold icon QT is purple, and the threshold setting information pattern E1 (70000 difference balls that trigger the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect) is stored. If yes, the color of the threshold icon QT is red, and if the threshold setting information pattern F1 (75000 difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect) is stored, the threshold icon QT is gold in color.

In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the threshold icon QT in the lower left display area 50f that does not interfere with the effect while the image display device 50 is activated, such as during the execution of the variable effect or during the execution of the customer waiting effect. Always display (execute threshold notification effect). For example, as shown in FIG. 108, even when the SP reach background image G113 is displayed on the display screen 50a during SP reach, the purple threshold icon QT is displayed in the lower left display area 50f. Is displayed. In this way, while the image display device 50 is activated, the employee of the game hall or the like stores the threshold value setting information pattern D1, that is, the difference ball that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. It is possible to let them know that the number is 60000 or more. Although the threshold icon QT is displayed in the lower left display area 50f, it may be displayed in the upper left display area, the upper right display area, or the lower right display area as long as it does not interfere with the rendering on the display screen 50a. can be changed as appropriate.

In the twenty-first modification, the threshold setting information pattern F1 is stored in the FRAM 125 in advance in the initial setting (at the time of shipment from the factory). Therefore, the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is preset to be 75000 or more. Therefore, in the initial setting, the golden threshold icon QT is always displayed in the lower left display area 50f of the display screen 50a.

As described in detail above, in the twenty-first modification, at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on (see FIG. 107(C)), the employee of the game hall performs a special operation on the select button (for example, "Down, down, left, right, right") for storing the threshold setting information pattern D1 is performed. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the operation information based on the special operation (operation information indicating "down, down, left, right, left") from the select button detection switch (not shown), and stores it in the FRAM 125. information (for example, the default threshold setting information pattern F1) is rewritten to the threshold setting information pattern D1. In other words, the number of difference balls, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, changes from 75000 or more to 60000 or more. Thus, by operating the select button, the employee of the game hall can rewrite the threshold setting information pattern stored in the FRAM 125 and change the value that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect. .

In the twenty-first modified example, unlike the twentieth modified example described above, even after shipment from the factory, the employees of the amusement center can change the threshold value setting information stored in the FRAM 125 according to market conditions and trends. It is possible to rewrite the pattern. The threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 stored in the FRAM 125 can be rewritten only during initial setting after the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from rewriting the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 stored in the FRAM 125 by mischief or the like.

<22nd Modification>
In the above mode and each modification, the number of difference balls that triggers the game to be controlled to be unexecutable is limited to 80000 (reference number). On the other hand, in the 22nd modification, the number of difference balls that triggers the game to be controlled to be unexecutable is not limited to 80000, and there are a plurality of them. Specifically, in the 22nd modification, the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the difference ball number being 20000 (first reference number) or more, and the game is controlled based on the difference ball number being 40000 or more. The game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the difference ball number being 60000 or more, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the difference ball number being 80000 (second reference number) or more. be done.

Here, the condition for resetting the difference number of balls in the twenty-second modification will be described. The condition for resetting the number of difference balls in the 22nd modification is that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the RAM is cleared (the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on). In other words, the number of difference balls is not reset only by executing the RAM clear. Specifically, information on the number of difference balls that has been measured is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6) of the non-delete storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104. FIG. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101, only when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more when the power is turned on and the RAM is cleared, can is cleared.

In addition, in the 22nd modification, when the jackpot game state ends after the number of difference balls reaches 20000, 40000, 60000, 80000 or more, the game becomes unexecutable (over-prize prevention function operates). After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the RAM is cleared so that the game can be returned to the executable state.

Next, based on FIG.110 and FIG.111, the case where the over-prized ball prevention function operates is demonstrated. As a precondition, it is assumed that the power is turned on in a state in which the number of difference balls is less than 20,000. After that, as shown in FIG. 110, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 20000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prized ball prevention function. In this way, since the player cannot continue the game, the employee of the game parlor turns off the power switch 193 to cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1.

Thereafter, the employee of the game arcade turns on the power switch 193 and presses the RAM clear switch 191 . That is, RAM clear is executed when the power is turned on. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, at this time, since the number of difference balls is less than 80000, the information of the number of difference stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the normal game state in a situation where the difference ball number is 20000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the number of difference balls reaches 40000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, since the player cannot continue the game, the employee of the game hall turns off the power switch 193 to cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1.

Thereafter, the employee of the game arcade turns on the power switch 193 and presses the RAM clear switch 191 . As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, at this time, since the number of difference balls is less than 80000, the information of the number of difference stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the normal game state in a situation where the difference ball number is 40000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 60000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prized ball prevention function. In this way, since the player cannot continue the game, the employee of the game parlor turns off the power switch 193 to cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111, the employee of the game parlor turns on the power switch 193 and presses the RAM clear switch 191 . As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, at this time, since the number of difference balls is less than 80000, the information of the number of difference stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the normal game state in a situation where the difference number of balls is 60000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the number of difference balls reaches 80000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prized ball prevention function. In this way, since the player cannot continue the game, the employee of the game parlor turns off the power switch 193 to cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1.

Thereafter, the employee of the game arcade turns on the power switch 193 and presses the RAM clear switch 191 . That is, RAM clear is executed when the power is turned on. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. At this time, since the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage section 107c. In this way, the game is restarted in the normal game state in a situation where the difference ball number is reset to "0".

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the number of difference balls reaches 20000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prized ball prevention function. In this way, afterward, similarly, whenever the number of difference balls reaches 40,000, 60,000, and 80,000, the over-prize preventing function operates, and when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more, the RAM is cleared. A number of information will be cleared.

As described above, in this 22nd modification, not only is the game unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 80000 or more, but also the number of difference balls being 20000, 40000, 60000 or more, which is less than 80000. Also based on, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. Therefore, even if a certain player continues to rush for a long time, it is possible to award only 20,000 prize balls at maximum in one rush. In this way, by providing a plurality (20000, 40000, 60000, 80000) of the number of difference balls (20000, 40000, 60000, 80000) as a trigger for the game to be controlled to be unexecutable, it is easy to operate the over-prize prevention function, It is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive prize balls such as 80000 shots are awarded. In addition, by facilitating the operation of the over-prize prevention function, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls (distributed balls) from increasing excessively for a predetermined time, and pass the inspection in the pachinko machine test. can be made easier.

Further, in the twenty-second modification, if the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 20000 or more, the player cannot continue the game. However, immediately after that, if the employee of the game parlor clears the RAM, it returns to a state where the game can be played. In this case, the information on the number of difference balls is not reset to "0", and the game is restarted from the number of difference balls when the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, the player who has reached 20000 or more in the number of difference balls wants to start the game from the continuation of his own number of difference balls, and to reach 40000 or more, 60000 or more, or 80000 or more in the next number of difference balls. It is possible to

Next, the difference ball number measurement process of the 22nd modification (S106), the special electric accessory process of the 22nd modification (S1307), the game stop determination process of the 22nd modification (S2722), the RAM of the 22nd modification The clear processing (S018) will be explained. However, the difference between the difference ball number measurement process (S106) shown in FIG. 34, the special electric accessory process (S1307) shown in FIG. 44, and the RAM clear process (S018) shown in FIG. 97 will be mainly described.

[Different ball number measurement process] As shown in FIG. 112, in the difference ball number measurement process (S106), first, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the total prize ball number count process (S301), The total number of shot ball count processing (S302) and the difference number calculation processing (S303) are executed. As a result, information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game status flag is "1" (S404). The game status flag indicates how many difference balls are counted at the present time. Specifically, when the number of difference balls is 0 or more and less than 19999, the value of the game status flag becomes "1", and when the number of difference balls is 20000 or more and less than 39999, the value of the game status flag When the value becomes "2" and the number of difference balls is 40000 or more and less than 59999, the value of the game status flag becomes "3", and when the number of difference balls is 60000 or more, the value of the game status flag The value becomes "4".

Incidentally, the game status flag is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104 . Therefore, even if RAM clear is executed, the value of the game status flag is basically held. However, as will be described later, when RAM clear is executed in a situation where the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the value of the game status flag is reset to "1".

In step S404, if it is determined that the game status flag is "1" (YES in S404), the number of difference balls is 0 or more and less than 19999. It is determined whether or not there is (S405). The over-prize ball notice flag indicates that an over-prize ball abnormality notice effect (advance notice effect) for notifying that the game becomes unexecutable has been executed. If the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (NO in S405), since the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect has already been executed, the process proceeds to step S409. On the other hand, if the over-prize notice flag is OFF (YES in S405), then, based on the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c, whether the number of difference balls is 15000 or more. It is determined whether or not (S406).

If the number of difference balls is not 15000 or more (NO in S406), it is not yet time to execute the over-prize abnormal notice effect, so the process proceeds to step S409. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 15000 or more (YES in S406), it is time to execute the over-balls abnormal notice effect, so the over-balls notice flag is turned ON (S407). Then, the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S408), and the process proceeds to step S409. In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 15000 or more, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. On the screen 50a, a purple frame image EFa and an over-price preview image KY indicating "an over-price error with 5,000 remaining shots" are displayed.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. If the over prize ball flag is ON (NO in S409), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the over-prize flag is OFF (YES in S409), then, based on the difference number information stored in the difference number storage unit 107c, whether or not the difference number is 20000 or more. (S410). If the number of difference balls is not 20000 or more (NO in S410), it is not the time to activate the over-prize preventing function, so this process is finished. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 20000 or more (YES at S410), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S411). Then, the over prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S412). In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 20000 or more, when the over prize ball notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, a red border image is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. EFb and a game stop notice image KH indicating "game stop when jackpot game ends" are displayed. Subsequently, the game status flag is set to "2" (S413), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S404 that the game status flag is not "1" (NO in S404), the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, in step S414, it is determined whether or not the game status flag is "2". If it is determined that the game status flag is "2" (YES in S414), the number of difference balls is 20,000 or more and less than 39,999. Judge (S415). If the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (NO in S415), since the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect has already been executed, the process proceeds to step S419. On the other hand, if the over-prize notice flag is OFF (YES in S415), then, based on the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c, whether the number of difference balls is 35000 or more. It is determined whether or not (S416).

If the number of difference balls is not 35000 or more (NO in S416), it is not yet time to execute the over-prize abnormal notice effect, so the process proceeds to step S419. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 35000 or more (YES in S416), it is time to execute the over-balls abnormal notice effect, so the over-balls notice flag is turned ON (S417). Then, the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S418), and the process proceeds to step S419. In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 35000 or more, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. On the screen 50a, a purple frame image EFa and an over-price preview image KY indicating "an over-price error with 5,000 remaining shots" are displayed.

In step S419, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. If the over prize ball flag is ON (NO in S419), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the over-prize flag is OFF (YES in S419), then, based on the difference number information stored in the difference number storage unit 107c, whether the difference number is 40000 or more. (S420). If the number of difference balls is not 40000 or more (NO in S420), it is not the time to activate the over-prize preventing function, so this process is finished. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 40000 or more (YES at S420), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S421). Then, the over prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S422). In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 40000 or more, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. EFb and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the jackpot game" are displayed. Subsequently, the game status flag is set to "3" (S423), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S414 that the game status flag is not "2" (NO in S414), the process proceeds to step S424 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 114, in step S424, it is determined whether or not the game status flag is "3". If it is determined that the game status flag is "3" (YES in S424), the number of difference balls is 40,000 or more and less than 59,999. Judge (S425). If the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (NO in S425), since the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect has already been executed, the process proceeds to step S429. On the other hand, if the over-prize notice flag is OFF (YES in S425), then, based on the difference number information stored in the difference number storage unit 107c, whether the difference number is 55000 or more. It is determined whether or not (S426).

If the number of difference balls is not 55000 or more (NO in S426), it is not yet time to execute the over-prize abnormal notice effect, so the process proceeds to step S429. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 55000 or more (YES in S426), it is the timing to execute the over-balls abnormal notice effect, so the over-balls notice flag is turned ON (S427). Then, the over prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S428), and the process proceeds to step S429. In this way, when the number of difference balls becomes 55000 or more, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. On the screen 50a, a purple frame image EFa and an over-price preview image KY indicating "an over-price error with 5,000 remaining shots" are displayed.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. If the over prize ball flag is ON (NO in S429), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the over-prize flag is ON (YES in S429), then, based on the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c, it is determined whether the number of difference balls is 60000 or more. (S430). If the number of difference balls is not 60000 or more (NO in S430), it is not the time to activate the over-prize preventing function, so this process is finished. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 60000 or more (YES at S430), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S431). Then, the over prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S432). In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 60000 or more, when the over prize ball notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. EFb and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the jackpot game" are displayed. Subsequently, the game status flag is set to "3" (S413), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S424 that the game status flag is not "3" (NO in S424), the game status flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S434 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 115, in step S434, it is determined whether or not the over-prize notice flag is OFF. If the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (NO in S434), the process proceeds to step S438 because the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect has already been executed. On the other hand, if the over-prize notice flag is OFF (YES in S434), then, based on the difference number information stored in the difference number storage unit 107c, whether the difference number is 75000 or more. It is determined whether or not (S435).

If the number of difference balls is not 75000 or more (NO in S435), it is not yet the timing to execute the over-prize abnormal notice effect, so the process proceeds to step S438. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 75000 or more (YES in S435), it is time to execute the over-balls abnormal notice effect, so the over-balls notice flag is turned ON (S436). Then, the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 75000 or more, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. On the screen 50a, a purple frame image EFa and an over-price preview image KY indicating "an over-price error with 5,000 remaining shots" are displayed.

In step S438, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. If the over-prize flag is ON (NO in S438), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the over-prize flag is ON (YES in S438), then based on the difference number information stored in the difference number storage unit 107c, whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more. (S439). If the number of difference balls is not 80000 or more (NO in S439), it is not the time to activate the over-prize preventing function, so this process is finished. On the other hand, if the number of difference balls is 80000 or more (YES in S439), the over prize ball flag is turned ON (S440). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S441), and this process is finished. In this way, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, when the over prize ball notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG. EFb and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the jackpot game" are displayed.

[Special electric auditors processing (jackpot game)] In the 22nd modification, in the special electric auditors processing (S1307) shown in FIG. Execute the processing of S2721. As shown in FIG. 116, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special action status to "1" in step S2721, then executes the game stop determination process (S2722), and ends this process.

[Game Stop Judgment Process] The game stop judgment process (S2722) is a process for judging whether or not the over-prize preventing function is to be activated when the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 117, in the game stop determination process (S2722), first, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the over-prize flag is ON (S2800). If the over-prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2800), the process is finished because the situation is not such that the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES at S2800), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2801). As a result, the over-prize preventing function is activated. Then, the over-prize ball notice flag is turned off (S2802), the over-prize ball flag is turned off (S2803), and this processing is finished.

[RAM Clear Processing] As shown in FIG. 118, in the RAM clear processing (S018), the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the effect control board 120 (S020). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121, which has received the RAM clear notification command, grasps that the RAM clear is started, and causes the image control board 140 to display the RAM clear notification image RC (see FIG. 95). command.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure suspensions and the result of winning a big hit). delete) (S021). In this way, the RAM is cleared, but in the process of step S021, the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-delete storage unit 107 and the value of the game status flag are not cleared (erased). After step S022, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not RAM clearing is completed (S022). If it is determined that the RAM clear has not been completed (NO in S022), the process returns to step S021. On the other hand, in step S022, if it is determined that RAM clearing is completed (YES in S022), the action area of game RAM 104 is initialized (S023).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game stop flag indicating that the game has been controlled to be unexecutable is ON (S024). If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S024), it means that it is not time to turn on the power after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable, and the process proceeds to step S019 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S024), it means that the power is turned on after the game has been disabled and the game stop flag is turned OFF (S025). As a result, the control that made the game unexecutable is released. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the game status flag is "4" (S051).

Here, the fact that the value of the game status flag is "4" means that the difference ball number is 80000 or more because the game has already been controlled to be unexecutable. Therefore, if the value of the game status flag is "4" (S051), it means that the RAM has been cleared when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and non-erase clear processing is performed (S052). In the non-erasing clear processing (S052), the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107 and the value of the game status flag are cleared (erased). That is, the information on the difference number of balls stored in the non-delete storage unit 107 is reset to "0", and the value of the game status flag is reset to "1". Then, the non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S053), and the process ends. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, as shown in FIG.

As described in detail above, in the twenty-second modification, as shown in FIG. 110, the game becomes unexecutable when the difference ball number becomes 20000 or more. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine PY1 that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. However, in this pachinko game machine PY1, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the game becomes unexecutable when the difference ball number becomes 40000 or more, 60000 or more, or 80000 or more. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel pachinko gaming machine PY1 by providing a plurality of differential ball numbers that trigger the game to be controlled to be unexecutable.

Further, in the 22nd modification, after the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 20000 or more, the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 40000 or more. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has reached 20,000 the number of difference balls want to reach 40,000 the number of difference balls next time. Next, after the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 40000 or more, the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls being 60000 or more. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has reached 40,000 the number of difference balls want to reach 60,000 the number of difference balls next time. Subsequently, after the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls becoming 60000 or more, the game becomes unexecutable based on the number of difference balls becoming 80000 or more. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has reached 60,000 the number of difference balls want to reach 80,000 the number of difference balls next time. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the over-prize preventing function is operated in multiple stages.

Further, in the twenty-second modification, the power supply is cut off after the game becomes unexecutable based on the difference number of balls being 20000 or more. After that, when the power is turned on, the game can be executed based on the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191 . However, at this time, as shown in FIG. 111, the information on the difference number is not erased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to restart the game after the number of difference balls reaches 20000 or more.

Further, in the 22nd modification, the power supply is cut off after the game becomes unexecutable based on the difference number of balls being 80000 or more. After that, when the power is turned on, the game can be executed based on the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191 . However, at this time, as shown in FIG. 112, the information on the difference number is erased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to restart the game from a state in which the number of difference balls is erased, that is, from a state in which the number of difference balls is "0".

<23rd modification>
In the twenty-second modification described above, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the RAM is cleared so that the game can be returned to the executable state. On the other hand, in the twenty-second modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the special reset switch 181 (see FIG. 8) is pressed so that the game can be returned to the executable state. is configured to That is, in the 22nd modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, only by pressing the special reset switch 181 without shutting off and turning on the power, the game is returned to the state in which the game can be executed. . This is based on the following reasons.

As in the 22nd modification, if the over-prize prevention function operates every time the number of difference balls increases by 20,000, the over-prize prevention function is activated based on the number of difference balls being 80,000 or more as in the above embodiment. The game is controlled to be unexecutable more frequently than when it works. Therefore, every time a game is controlled to be unexecutable, an employee of the game hall has to press the RAM clear switch 191 when turning off and turning on the power to the pachinko game machine PY1. work becomes complicated. Also, the player wants to be able to restart the game as soon as possible after the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the increase in the number of difference balls by 20,000.

Therefore, in the twenty-third modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game control microcomputer 101 allows the game to be executed by pressing the special reset switch 181 even if the RAM is not cleared. It is designed to return to a normal situation. That is, after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable, the employee of the game hall returns to a state in which the game can be executed without depressing the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned off and turned on. It is possible to As a result, it is possible to reduce the work load on the employees of the game arcade and to restart the game as soon as possible for the player who activated the over-prize preventing function.

In addition, in the twenty-third modification, even if the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, the information on the difference number of balls is not reset. As in the above mode, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls is reset. Further, in the twenty-third modification, pressing the special reset switch 181 can return to the unexecutable state of the game, but the execution of the RAM clear also enables the return to the unexecutable state of the game. ing.

Next, based on FIG.119 and FIG.120, the case where the over-prized ball prevention function operates is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 119, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 20000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prize preventing function. Here, the employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181 without shutting off the power. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, since RAM clearing is not executed at this time, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the game state after the jackpot game (for example, the high probability high base state) in the situation where the number of difference balls is 20000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the number of difference balls reaches 40000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prize preventing function. Here, the employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181 without shutting off the power. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, since RAM clearing is not executed at this time, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the game state after the jackpot game (for example, the high probability high base state) in a situation where the difference ball number is 40000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 60000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prize preventing function. Here, the employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181 without shutting off the power. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored. However, since RAM clearing is not executed at this time, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not cleared. In this way, the game is restarted in the game state after the jackpot game (for example, the high probability high base state) in a situation where the difference ball number is 60000 or more.

Then, as the game progresses, it is assumed that the number of difference balls reaches 80000 in the jackpot game state. Then, when the jackpot game state ends, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by operating the over-prized ball prevention function. In this way, since the player cannot continue the game, the employee of the game parlor turns off the power switch 193 to cut off the power supply to the pachinko game machine PY1. Thereafter, the employee of the game arcade turns on the power switch 193 and presses the RAM clear switch 191 . That is, RAM clear is executed when the power is turned on. As a result, the state in which the game can be executed is restored, and since the number of different balls is 80000 or more, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the information of the number of different balls stored in the number of different balls storage unit 107c. . In this way, the game is restarted in the normal game state in the situation where the difference ball number is reset to "0".

As described in detail above, in the 23rd modification, as in the 22nd modification, the over-prize preventing function is activated every time the number of difference balls increases by 20000, so that the player can start the game relatively quickly. becomes unexecutable. However, unlike the 22nd modification, the employee of the game hall does not perform the OFF operation and ON operation of the power switch 193 and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191, and only presses the special reset switch 181. It is possible to restore the state in which the game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily and quickly return to the state in which the game can be executed.

<24th Modification>
In the 23rd modification described above, after the number of difference balls is 20,000 or more and the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the number of difference balls that triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function was always 40,000. . On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth modification, the employee of the game hall arbitrarily sets the difference number of balls that triggers the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function from among 20000, 40000, 60000, 80000, 100000, and 120000. It is possible. In addition, below, the number of difference balls that triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function is referred to as "activation trigger difference number of balls".

In the twenty-fourth modification, when the setting key cylinder 180 (see FIG. 8) is in the rotating position when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game to be unexecutable. switch to (set) mode. When this setting mode is set, the trigger setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9) of the 7-segment display 300. FIG. The trigger setting value has six kinds of numbers from "1" to "6", and the trigger setting value corresponds to the number of difference balls to be activated. When the setting mode is set, the trigger setting value displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 is changed from "1" to " every time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. 2"⇒"3"⇒"4"⇒"5"⇒"6"⇒"1". Thus, the employee of the arcade can select the trigger settings when the setting mode is set. When the game hall employee returns the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotational position to the initial position, the setting mode ends and the selected trigger setting value can be determined. When the setting mode ends, the game mode is entered.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(A), in the setting mode, in the state where "1" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the amusement arcade presses the setting key cylinder. 180 is returned from the rotated position to the initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation trigger difference ball number to 20000, and shifts to the game mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 121(B), in the setting mode, while "2" is being displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the amusement arcade rotates the setting key cylinder 180. Return from position to initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation trigger difference ball number to 40000, and shifts to the game mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 121(C), in the setting mode, while "3" is being displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the game arcade rotates the setting key cylinder 180. Return from position to initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation timing difference ball number to 60000, and shifts to the game mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121(D), in the setting mode, while "4" is being displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the amusement arcade rotates the setting key cylinder 180. Return from position to initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation trigger difference ball number to 80000, and shifts to the game mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 121(E), in the setting mode, while "2" is being displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the game arcade rotates the setting key cylinder 180. Return from position to initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation trigger difference ball number to 100000, and shifts to the game mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 121(F), in the setting mode, while "6" is being displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the employee of the game parlor rotates the setting key cylinder 180. Return from position to initial position. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the activation trigger difference ball number to 120000, and shifts to the game mode.

As described in detail above, in the twenty-fourth modification, the employee of the game hall can arbitrarily set the activation timing difference number of balls from among 20000, 40000, 60000, 80000, 100000 and 120000. be. As a result, the employee of the game hall can control how much the pachinko game machine PY1 does not give excessive prize balls.

<25th Modification>
In the above embodiment and each modification, the game control microcomputer 101 cannot transmit a command after controlling the game to be unexecutable. On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 is configured to be able to transmit a command after controlling the game to be unexecutable. The twenty-fifth modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 122 to 129. FIG.

Here, first, the flow of commands between the game control board 100, the payout control board 170 and the effect control board 120 will be explained based on FIG. FIG. 122(1) shows the flow of commands when a game ball enters the big winning openings 14, 15 (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15) during execution of a jackpot game. there is As shown in FIG. 122 (1), the game control board 100 sends an operating command (specific command) is basically sent at intervals of 1 second. In addition, the operating command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 when 1 second has passed since the last command (operating command, prize ball command, etc.) that the game control board 100 transmitted to the payout control board 170. be. Therefore, the operating command is not necessarily transmitted to the payout control board 170 every second. The operating command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 not only during execution of the jackpot game, but also as long as the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally (for example, even in a customer waiting state or a normal game state).

Thus, the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) can recognize that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally by receiving the operating command from the game control board 100. Then, the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally, so that the game control board 100 receives various commands (a prize ball start command to be described later). , lower tray full command, etc.) can be sent. That is, the payout control board 170 receives the command from the game control board 100 within one second, and determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally, and sends the command to the game control board 100. can be sent. In other words, the payout control board 170 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is not operating normally when one second elapses after the last command is received from the game control board 100, and after that, the game control board 100 to not send commands to

As shown in FIG. 122(1), in a situation where the operating command is transmitted to the payout control board 170 every second, when the game ball enters the big winning openings 14 and 15, the game control board 100 A winning ball command based on the ball entering the big winning openings 14 and 15 is transmitted to the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the payout control microcomputer 171 controls the payout device 73 so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Then, the payout control board 170 transmits a prize ball start command indicating that the payout of prize balls has started to the game control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command, grasps that the payout of the prize balls has started, and instructs the production control board 120 to execute the big winning opening winning production. Send a ball instruction command (specific command).

In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the big winning opening winning effect, for example, as shown in FIG. The big prize winning performance is a performance that makes the player understand that the game ball has entered the big winning gates 14 and 15.例文帳に追加Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the display screen 50a displays a win number image G119 indicating "+15", and displays the total number of prize balls paid out during execution of the jackpot game. A suggested number-of-balls image G110 is displayed. In FIG. 123A, since the round game is being executed, a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a background image (background image for round G114) indicating the city are displayed.

Here, in this embodiment, the payout control board 170 monitors whether or not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a predetermined abnormality. A predetermined abnormality (abnormality of the gaming machine) is that the bottom tray 35 is full and that the storage tank provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 2 has no game balls. The pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a lower tray full detection switch capable of detecting that the lower tray 35 is full. Therefore, when the lower tray 35 is full, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch is input to the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171). In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a storage tank monitoring sensor capable of detecting that there are no game balls in the storage tank (not stored). Therefore, when there is no game ball in the storage tank, a detection signal from the storage tank monitoring sensor is input to the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171). Thus, the "lower tray full switch and storage tank monitoring sensor" correspond to the "abnormality detection means".

FIG. 122(2) shows the flow of commands when the lower tray 35 is full in the normal state before the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In this case, when the lower tray full switch detects that the lower tray 35 is full, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch is input to the payout control board 170 . At this time, as described above, the payout control board 170 inputs the operating command every second from the game control board 100, and recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. . Therefore, the payout control board 170 transmits the lower tray full command to the game control board 100 based on the input of the detection signal by the lower tray full switch. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the lower plate full command, grasps that the lower plate 35 is full, and instructs the effect control board 120 to execute the lower plate full error effect. Send a full instruction command (specific command).

In this way, the production control microcomputer 121 executes a full-bottom-plate error production, for example, as shown in FIG. The lower tray full error effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the lower tray 35 is full. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a lower tray full error image G120 indicating "Please remove balls from the lower tray" is displayed on the display screen 50a as a full lower tray error rendering. In FIG. 123B, since the round game is being executed, the round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and the background image (round background image G114) indicating the city are displayed.

Here, in the twenty-fifth modification, the presentation mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 124(A). When the over-prize prevention function operates, as shown in FIG. 124(A), on the display screen 50a, in a blacked out state with no background, an over-prize abnormal image FRX indicating "error X over-prize abnormal" is displayed. is displayed. Further, no sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 124(A) continues until the power is cut off.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth modification, an effect mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 124(B). When the magnetic sensor detects illicit magnetism, as shown in FIG. 124(B), the display screen 50a displays a red background image RE and a magnetic detection abnormality image indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality". FR1 is displayed. Further, no sound is output from the speaker 52, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in red, and all the board lamps 54 are lit in red. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 124(B) continues until the power is cut off.

By the way, after the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize prevention function or the detection of illegal magnetism, the following problems may occur. That is, immediately before the game is controlled to be unexecutable, for example, the game ball enters the big winning holes 14 and 15, and the game control board 100 tells the payout control board 170 that the ball enters the big winning holes 14 and 15. It is assumed that a prize ball command based on is transmitted. Immediately after that, the game is controlled to be unexecutable, and the game control board 100 stops transmitting the operating command to the payout control board 170 . In this case, the payout control board 170 (payout control microcomputer 171) cannot grasp whether the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. Therefore, the payout control board 170 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is not operating normally, and does not transmit the prize ball start command in spite of the situation in which the prize ball start command is transmitted to the game control board 100. There is a risk. As a result, the game control board 100 does not transmit the prize ball instruction command to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 may not execute the big winning opening winning effect shown in FIG. 123(A).

It is also assumed that the lower tray 35 becomes full after the game is disabled and a detection signal from the lower tray full switch is input to the payout control board 170 . Also in this case, as described above, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the payout control board 170 does not receive the operating command, so it is possible to grasp whether the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. I can't. Therefore, the payout control board 170 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is not operating normally, and does not transmit the lower tray full command in spite of the situation in which the lower tray full command is transmitted to the game control board 100. There is a risk. As a result, the game control board 100 does not transmit the lower plate full instruction command to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 may not execute the lower plate full error effect shown in FIG. 123(B).

In addition, although the above-described problem has been described in the case where the lower tray 35 is full, it is the same when there are no game balls in the storage tank. That is, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the storage tank runs out of game balls and the detection signal from the storage tank monitoring sensor is input to the payout control board 170 . Also in this case, as described above, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the payout control board 170 does not receive the operating command, so it is possible to grasp whether the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. I can't. Therefore, the payout control board 170 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is not operating normally, and may not transmit the no-ball command in spite of the situation in which the no-ball command is transmitted to the game control board 100. be. In addition, the no ball command is a command indicating that there is no game ball in the storage tank. As a result, the game control board 100 does not transmit the no-ball instruction command to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 does not execute the no-ball notification effect (not shown) indicating that there is no game ball in the storage tank. There is a risk. As described above, since the problem when the lower tray 35 is full after the game is controlled to be unexecutable is substantially the same as the problem when there are no game balls in the storage tank, the lower tray 35 is full.

In the twenty-fifth modification, in order to deal with the above-described problem, the game control board 100, even after controlling the game to be unexecutable, commands (running command, award ball instruction command, lower tray full instruction command, no ball instruction command) can be sent. Specifically, the game control board 100, even after controlling the game to be unexecutable, basically sends the operating command to the payout control board 170 at intervals of 1 second, just like before controlling the game to be unexecutable. It is designed to send. Thereby, the payout control microcomputer 171 (payout control board 170) can grasp that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

In FIG. 125 (1), just before the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, game balls enter the big winning holes 14 and 15, and the game control board 100 moves the payout control board 170 to the big winning holes 14 and 15. It shows a situation in which a game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize prevention function immediately after a prize-ball command based on the entry of a ball into the game is transmitted. In this situation, the payout control board 170 controls the payout device 73 so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out. As described above, the payout control board 170 recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. Transmit to substrate 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command, grasps that the payout of the prize balls has started, and transmits the prize ball instruction command to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加

As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the big winning opening winning effect as shown in FIG. 126(A). That is, in a state where the over-prize abnormal image FRX indicating "error X over-prize abnormal" is displayed on the display screen 50a, the winning number image G119 indicating "+15" is displayed, and the jackpot game is executed. A winning ball number image G110 suggesting the total number of paid out winning balls is displayed. In this way, even in the state where the abnormal image FRX is displayed after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the player can receive the prize balls based on the balls entering the big winning holes 14 and 15. It is possible to let them know what they have achieved. In other words, it is possible to let the player know that the awarding of prize balls is continued, without the fact that the special prize mouth prize effect is not executed immediately after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated.

FIG. 125(2) shows a state in which the lower tray 35 is full after the over-prize prevention function is activated, and a detection signal from the lower tray full switch is input to the payout control board 170 . In this situation, the payout control board 170 recognizes that the lower tray 35 is full and, as described above, recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. , a lower tray full command is transmitted to the game control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the lower tray full command, grasps that the lower tray 35 is full, and transmits the lower tray full instruction command to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加

As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the lower tray full error effect as shown in FIG. 126(B). That is, in a state in which the over-price abnormal image FRX indicating "error X over-price abnormality" is displayed on the display screen 50a, the lower tray full error image G120 indicating "please remove the ball from the lower tray" is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, even in a state where the abnormal image FRX is displayed after the over-prize prevention function is activated, it is possible for the player to understand that the lower tray 35 is full. be.

In FIG. 127 (1), the game ball enters the big winning openings 14 and 15 just before the illegal magnetism is detected. This shows a situation in which a winning ball command based on the incoming ball is transmitted, and immediately after that, the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism. In this situation, the payout control board 170 controls the payout device 73 so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out. As described above, the payout control board 170 recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. Transmit to substrate 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command, grasps that the payout of the prize balls has started, and transmits the prize ball instruction command to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加

However, in this case (see FIG. 127(1)), unlike the case where the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 125(1)), the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the prize ball instruction command, Do not execute the special prize mouth prize effect. That is, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 124B, only the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality" are displayed, and the acquired number image G119 and The prize number image G110 is not displayed. In this way, the reason why the grand prize winning effect is not executed after the illegal magnetism is detected is that the importance of the display of the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 is the same as the winning number image G119 and the number of winning balls. This is because the importance of the image G110 is higher than that of the image G110, and the visibility of the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 is ensured.

FIG. 127(2) shows a state in which the lower tray 35 is full after the illegal magnetism is detected and a detection signal from the lower tray full switch is input to the payout control board 170 . In this situation, the payout control board 170 recognizes that the lower tray 35 is full and, as described above, recognizes that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally. , a lower plate full command is transmitted to the game control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the lower tray full command, grasps that the lower tray 35 is full, and transmits the lower tray full instruction command to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加

However, in this case (see FIG. 127(2)), unlike the case where the over-prizing prevention function is activated (see FIG. 125(2)), the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the lower tray full instruction command. , Do not execute the full plate error rendering. That is, on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 124B, only the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality" are displayed, and the lower plate full error image is displayed. G120 is not displayed. In this way, the reason why the lower plate full error effect is not executed after the illegal magnetism is detected is that the importance of displaying the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 is the same as the importance of the lower plate full error image G120. This is to ensure the visibility of the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1.

Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) of the twenty-fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The main timer interrupt process (S005) shown in FIG. 128 is executed instead of the main timer interrupt process (S005) shown in FIG.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] As shown in FIG. 128, in the main side timer interrupt processing (S100), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the game stop flag is ON. If the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), it means that the game is not controlled to be unexecutable, and steps S102 to S114 are performed as described above. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), it means that the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game stop command processing is executed (S117), and the process proceeds to step S114.

It should be noted that, as described in the seventeenth modification, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, instead of the game stop flag, if the over-prize ball prevention stop flag is turned ON, in step S101, It is determined whether or not the stop flag for preventing over-prize balls is ON. Then, if it is ON, the process proceeds to command processing (S117) after the game is stopped. Further, as described in the 17th modified example, when an illegal magnetism is detected, instead of the game stop flag, when the magnetism detection stop flag is turned ON, in step S101, the magnetism detection stop flag is ON. Then, if it is ON, the process proceeds to command processing (S117) after the game is stopped.

[Post-Game Stop Command Processing] As shown in FIG. 129, in the post-game stop command processing (S117), the game control microcomputer 101 executes command output processing during operation (S060). In the operating command output process (S060), the operating command is basically sent to the payout control board 170 at intervals of 1 second. However, the operating command is not necessarily transmitted to the payout control board 170 at intervals of 1 second as described above, and the last command sent to the payout control board 170 (operating command, prize ball command, etc.) ), it is transmitted to the payout control board 170 when one second has elapsed. In this way, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the in-operation command can be transmitted to the payout control board 170. - 特許庁In addition, in the output process (S112) shown in FIG. 128, the same process as the command process during operation (S060) described above is executed. Therefore, even before the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the operating command is basically transmitted to the payout control board 170 at intervals of one second.

After step S060, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a game stop outer end signal output process (S061). This game stop outer edge signal output process (S061) is the same as the game stop outer edge signal output process (S3106) shown in FIG. game stop outer end signal”) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170. The outer end signal for game stop is specifically a security signal that is output even during RAM clear, large winning opening illegal winning error, magnetic sensor error, setting confirmation, and the like. In this way, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function or the detection of illegal magnetism, the outer end signal for game stop is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 to the external terminal board. 160. The game stop outer end signal continues to be output until the power supply is cut off.

After step S061, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a prize ball start command is received from the payout control board 170 (S062). If not received (NO in S062), proceed to step 064. On the other hand, if received (YES in S062), the prize ball instruction command output process (S063) outputs the prize ball instruction command to the effect control board 120 (Fig. 125 (1), Fig. 127 (1) reference).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the lower tray full command is received from the payout control board 170 (S064). If not received (NO in S064), proceed to step 066. On the other hand, if received (YES in S064), the lower tray full instruction command output process (S065) outputs the lower tray full instruction command to the effect control board 120 (Fig. 125 (2), Fig. 127 ( 2) See).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a no ball command is received from the payout control board 170 (S066). If not received (NO in S066), this processing ends. On the other hand, if received (YES in S066), no ball instruction command output processing (S067) outputs a no ball instruction command to the effect control board 120, and ends this processing. When the performance control board 120 receives the no-ball instruction command after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the performance control board 120 performs a no-ball notification performance (not shown) indicating that there is no game ball in the storage tank. Execute. On the other hand, when the effect control board 120 receives the no-ball instruction command after the illegal magnetism is detected, the effect control board 120 does not execute the no-ball notification effect.

As described in detail above, in the twenty-fifth modification, the game control board 100 can transmit the operating command to the payout control board 170 after controlling the game to be unexecutable. As a result, the payout control board 170 can recognize that the game control microcomputer 101 is operating normally, and can cause the game control board 100 to output a winning ball start command or a lower tray full command. In addition, the game control board 100 can transmit a winning ball instruction command or a lower tray full instruction command to the effect control board 120 after controlling the game to be unexecutable. As a result, the effect control board 120 can execute the big winning mouth winning effect and the bottom plate full error effect. In this way, the game control board 100 causes the payout control board 170 to execute processing based on the command during operation even after controlling the game to be unexecutable, or causes the performance control board 120 to respond to the prize ball instruction command or the lower tray full instruction command. It is possible to execute processing based on

Further, in the twenty-fifth modification, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function, and then issues a prize ball start command from the payout control board 170 as shown in FIG. When received, it transmits a prize ball instruction command to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁As a result, the effect control board 120 executes the big winning opening winning effect as shown in FIG. 126(A). Further, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize prevention function, and then, as shown in FIG. 120 to send a lower tray full instruction command. As a result, the effect control board 120 executes the lower tray full error effect as shown in FIG. 126(B). In this way, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the effect control board 120 receives the prize ball instruction command and the lower tray full instruction command, and the effect related to the payout of the game balls (FIG. 126 (A ), and the lower tray full error effect shown in FIG. 126(B)) can be executed.

Further, in the twenty-fifth modification, when illegal magnetism is detected (when there is a specific abnormality), the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In this case, the effect control board 120 displays the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 on the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 124(B). However, when the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed, even if a winning ball instruction command is received from the game control board 100 (see FIG. 127 (1)), the big winning opening winning effect is executed. do not. Also, when the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed, even if a lower tray full instruction command is received from the game control board 100 (see FIG. 127 (2)), the lower tray full error effect is displayed. don't run In this way, when the game is disabled due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the display of the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 (specific abnormality notification) is changed to an effect related to the payout of game balls (large winning opening It is possible to execute it with priority over winning effect, lower tray full error effect).

Further, in the twenty-fifth modification, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function, and then the lower tray full switch detects that the lower tray 35 is full. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (2), the lower tray full instruction command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Thereby, the effect control board 120 can execute the lower plate full error effect as shown in FIG. 126(B) even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In addition, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize ball prevention function, and then the storage tank monitoring sensor detects that there are no game balls in the storage tank. 120 to send a no-ball instruction command. Thereby, the effect control board 120 can execute the no-ball notification effect (not shown) indicating that there is no game ball in the storage tank even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

By the way, in the twenty-fifth modification, as described above, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control board 120) is shown in FIG. 124(A). In this way, it was notified that the over-prize ball prevention function was activated. Also, when the game is disabled due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the effect control microcomputer 121 notifies that the illegal magnetism has been detected, as shown in FIG. 124(B). Here, if the operation of the over-prize prevention function and the detection of illegal magnetism are executed at the same timing, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable, and the effect control microcomputer 121 The notification shown in FIG. 124 (B) (notification that illegal magnetism has been detected) is executed, and the notification shown in FIG. It has become. This is because the detection of illegal magnetism is more important as a notification than the activation of the over-prize preventing function.

<26th Modification>
In the above embodiment and each of the modified examples, no illumination display device is arranged in front of the image display device 50 for allowing the player to visually recognize the display image displayed by light emission. On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth modification, as shown in FIG. 130A, an illumination display device 57 (specific light emitting means, specific production means) are arranged.

The illumination display device 57 (light guide means) mainly includes a light guide plate 57a (illumination panel), a lower frame 57b, and an upper edge frame 57c. The light guide plate 57 a is transparent to allow light to pass therethrough, and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape facing the display screen 50 a of the image display device 50 . The lower side and left and right sides of the light guide plate 57a are fitted in the lower frame 57b, and the upper edge frame 57c is attached to the upper side of the light guide plate 57a and the upper ends of the lower frame 57b.

A display LED 57d shown in FIG. 130B is provided on the upper edge frame 57c. When the display LED 57d emits light, the light emitted from the display LED 57d enters the end face of the light guide plate 57a. The light incident on the end face of the light guide plate 57a is reflected to the front side by the reflecting portion 57e formed on the rear side (back side) of the light guide plate 12a. In this way, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 57e of the light guide plate 57a is emitted from the front surface 57f of the light guide plate 57a, so that the player can visually recognize the display image displayed by the light guide plate 57a. there is As will be described later, in this embodiment, the reflection portion 57e is formed with unevenness so that the logo face image GR (see FIG. 131B) showing the face of the logo, which is a special character, is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 12a. ing.

In the twenty-sixth modification, a logo illumination appearance effect using the illumination display device 57 may be executed during execution of the SP reach. The logo illumination appearance effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 131(A), during execution of SP reach, the display screen 50a displays an SP reach background image G113 indicating that the main character and the enemy character are fighting. Then, while the SP reach background image G113 is being displayed, suddenly, as shown in FIG. be done. That is, the logo illumination appearance effect is suddenly interrupted and executed, and the player sees the luminous red logo face image GR in front of the display screen 50a. The logo facial image GR is interrupted for a predetermined short period of time (for example, 2 seconds) and displayed.

Execution of the logo illumination appearance effect in this way suggests that the expectation of winning in the SP reach is higher than when the logo illumination appearance effect is not performed. In addition, in the logo illumination appearance effect, there are cases where the logo face image GR is luminous display in green, cases in which the logo face image GR is luminous display in red, and cases in which the logo face image GR is luminous display in gold. be. It is suggested that the winning expectation is high in the order of green logo face image GR<red logo face image GR<gold logo face image GR.

When the logo illumination appearance effect shown in FIG. 131(B) ends, an appearance image GT showing that a special character (logo) appears on horseback is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 131(C). be done. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(D), the display screen 50a displays a visit image GS showing the upper body of the special character (logo) and the characters "visit". In this way, the light guide plate 57a displays the logo image GR, and then the display screen 50a displays the appearance image GT and the call-out image GS. It is possible to show the production of joining the. After that, as shown in FIG. 131(E), the display returns to the SP reach background image G113 showing that the main character and the enemy character are fighting.

By the way, as described above, when the logo illumination effect is executed during execution of the SP reach, the display of the appearance image GT shown in FIG. should be smoothly transitioned to That is, it is necessary to match the timing of ending the light emission display of the logo face image GR on the light guide plate 57a with the timing of starting the display of the appearance image GT on the display screen 50a. This is because if the above-described timing is off, the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect that the special character has newly joined as an ally.

Here, conventionally, the illumination display device (display LED) is often connected so as to be light emission controlled by the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121). The developer of the effect control board 120 and the developer of the image control board 140 are generally different. Therefore, these developers communicate with each other so that the timing of ending the luminous display of the logo face image GR on the light guide plate 57a and the timing of starting the display of the appearance image GT on the display screen 50a are matched. , lamp data for displaying the logo image GR and image data for displaying the appearance image GT are created.

However, in this case, the developers must keep in close contact with each other, resulting in an increase in man-hours and time required for creation. Furthermore, since developers cannot sufficiently share their intentions and information, the light guide plate 57a ends the luminous display of the logo face image GR and the display screen 50a starts displaying the appearance image GT. There was a risk that the

Therefore, in the twenty-sixth modification, as shown in FIG. 132, an illumination display device 57 is connected to the image control board 140, and light emission control of the illumination display device 57 (display LLED 57d) is executed by the image control board 140. It has become so. That is, the illumination display device 57 is not connected so as to be light emission controlled by the effect control board 120 . Thereby, the image control board 140 performs light emission control of the illumination display device 57 (display LED 57d) based on the lamp data (lamp data for light-emitting the logo face image GR) stored in the image ROM 142 . In other words, the image control board 140 provides information on the timing of emitting light from the display LED 57d, information on the color of light emitted from the display LED 57d, information on the luminance (brightness) of the display LED 57d, and information on the timing at which the display LED 57d is extinguished. It is not grasped by the command output from the production control board 120. - 特許庁

Thus, in the twenty-sixth modification, the image control board 140 (image CPU 141) not only controls the display of the SP reach background image G113, the appearance image GT, and the call-up image GS, but also controls the illumination display device 57 (display LED 57d ) is also controlled. Therefore, a developer who develops the image control board 140 creates both lamp data for displaying the logo image GR and image data for displaying the appearance image GT. As a result, it becomes easier to match the timing of ending the luminous display of the logo face image GR on the light guide plate 57a with the timing of starting the display of the appearance image GT on the display screen 50a, and it is possible to reduce the risk of deviation of these timings. is.

Here, when the illumination display device 57 is powered on, it performs illumination initial light emission (initial operation) indicating that the illumination display device 57 operates normally. The illumination initial light emission will be described below with reference to FIG. 133 . It should be noted that when the light guide plate 57a is divided into three parts in the vertical direction, it is assumed that there are an upper part, a central part, and a lower part. When the illumination initial light emission is executed, first, only the display LED 57d arranged in the upper portion of the light guide plate 57a emits light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 133(A), only the upper portion G1 of the logo image GR is illuminated.

Next, only the display LED 57d arranged in the central portion of the light guide plate 57a emits light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 133(B), only the central portion G2 of the logo image GR is illuminated. Finally, only the display LEDs 57d arranged in the lower portion of the light guide plate 57a emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 133(C), only the lower portion G3 of the logo image GR is illuminated.

Thus, in the initial light emission of the illumination, the upper portion of the light guide plate 57a→the center portion of the light guide plate 57a→the lower portion of the light guide plate 57a emit light in order, so that the employee of the amusement arcade can understand that the illumination display device 57 is normal. It is possible to grasp that it works. Note that the illumination initial light emission shown in FIGS. 133A, 133B, and 133C is an example, and the light emission mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the illumination initial light emission, all the display LEDs 57d arranged on the light guide plate 57a may simultaneously emit light.

In the twenty-sixth modification, as shown in FIG. 134, the game board YU comprises a game board 1 (first unit) having a game area 6 and a back unit 1U (second unit) arranged behind the game board 1. ) and are detachably combined. The back unit 1U is a unit that combines various control boards (game control board 100, effect control board 120, image control board 140, payout control board 170, etc.) and movable devices 55, 56, 58. is.

Here, the game board YU has a lineup of a plurality of types, and is constructed so that a plurality of types of back units 1U can be easily attached to one type of game board 1. - 特許庁Thus, an employee of the game hall can assemble a different game board YU by attaching a different back unit 1U to the game board 1 in the game hall. By adopting such a field replacement system, it is intended to standardize the members. However, when an employee of the game hall assembles the game board YU, the game board 1 of a different type and the back unit 1U may be assembled, resulting in an unintended operation of the pachinko machine PY1.

Therefore, in the twenty-sixth modification, a board collation switch YS is provided in the left lower part 1LD (see FIG. 134) of the game board 1 in order to deal with the above-described problem. FIG. 135 shows a state in which a left gutter unit (not shown) is removed from the lower left part 1LD of the game board 1 . As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the board collation switch YS is configured as a switch capable of switching between six pieces of bit information by operation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136, the 1st to 6th bits can be switched to either the ON side (right side in FIG. 136) or the OFF side (left side in FIG. 136). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 136, only the 1st bit is on the ON side, and the 2nd to 6th bits are on the OFF side.

Information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit in the board collation switch YS is input to the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) mounted in the back unit 1U. When the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the previously stored board collation information matches the information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit of the board collation switch YS. Then, if these pieces of information match, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct. On the other hand, if the above information does not match, it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect. It should be noted that the board verification switch YS shown in FIG. 135 cannot be operated unless the left gutter unit (not shown) is removed from the game board 1 . Therefore, basically, the employee of the game arcade cannot operate the board verification switch YS, and only the manufacturer can operate the board verification switch YS.

In the twenty-sixth modification, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the board collation information stored in advance does not match the information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit of the board collation switch YS when the power is turned on. That is, when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is wrong, the board incompatibility notification effect is executed. The board incompatibility notification effect is an effect indicating that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. is displayed. This board incompatibility notification effect continues until the power supply is cut off. In this way, when the board incompatibility notification effect is executed, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to grasp that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 132, when the illumination display device 57 (display LED 57d) is connected to the image control board 140 so as to be light emission controlled, there are the following problems. That is, as described above, the illumination display device 57 is not connected so as to be light emission controlled by the effect control board 120 . Therefore, when the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 are activated as the power is turned on, the image control board 140 controls the illumination display device 57 regardless of the control of the effect control board 120 . Therefore, after the power is turned on, the illumination display device 57 has the problem that the illumination initial light emission is always performed. That is, although the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect and the board incompatibility notification effect shown in FIG. There was a problem that

Therefore, in the twenty-sixth modification, in order to deal with the above problem, the production control microcomputer 121 (production control board 120), when the power is turned on, stores the pre-stored board collation information and the board collation switch YS. When it is determined that the information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit match, that is, when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct, an illumination permission command is transmitted to the image control board 140. - 特許庁The illumination permission command (driving permission command) is a command indicating that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct. If so, it is not sent to the image control board 140 .

In this way, the image control board 140 performs illumination initial light emission shown in FIG. 133 only when an illumination permission command is received from the effect control board 120 when the power is turned on. That is, if the image control board 140 does not receive the illumination permission command, the illumination initial light emission shown in FIG. 133 will not be executed. As a result, although the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is erroneous and the board incompatibility notification effect shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation. In this way, the nonconformance notification effect shown in FIG. 137 is executed without executing the illumination initial light emission. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to see. In addition, it is possible to prevent misrecognition that the pachinko game machine PY1 is operating normally due to execution of illumination initial light emission despite the wrong combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U. Is possible.

Further, in the twenty-sixth modification, the image control board 140 can perform light emission control of the illumination display device 57 (display LED 57d) after executing illumination initial light emission only when an illumination permission command is received. . As a result, only when the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct, the logo illumination effect shown in FIG. 131(B) can be executed.

Next, the sub-control main processing of the twenty-sixth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control main process shown in FIG. 138 is executed instead of the sub-control main process shown in FIG.

[Sub-control main processing] When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 121 reads the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 138 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in FIG. 138, in the sub-control main process, first, a sub power-on process is executed (S4020). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the effect control permission flag is ON (S4021). The performance control permission flag is a flag indicating that execution of various performances is permitted by the performance control microcomputer 121, and is turned ON when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct, as will be described later. It is what is done. If the effect permission flag is ON (YES in S4021), the process proceeds to steps S4002 to S4012. On the other hand, if the effect permission flag is not ON (NO in S4021), the process of step S4021 is repeated without executing the processes of steps S4002 to S4012. Thus, when the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is not determined to be correct, the performance permission flag is not turned on and various performances (customer waiting performance, variable performance, etc.) are not executed.

[Sub-power-on process] As shown in FIG. 139, in the sub-power-on process (S4020), the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect CPU 122 as an initial setting process (S4030), SIO, PIO, CTC ( circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the board collation information stored in the effect ROM 123 matches the information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit input from the board collation switch YS. (S4031).

If it is determined that they match (YES in S4031), the effect control permission flag is turned ON (S4032). As a result, after the sub-power-on processing (S4020) ends, the processing of steps S4002 to S4012 shown in FIG. 138 can be executed. Subsequently, effect initial operation processing is executed (S4033). In effect initial motion processing (S4033), after each movable device 55, 56, 58 (movable body) moves from the origin position to the operating position, the movable body initial motion is executed to return from the operating position to the origin position. By this movable body initial operation, it can be confirmed that each movable device 55, 56, 58 operates normally. Since the illumination display device 57 is not connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be light emission controlled, the illumination initial light emission is not executed by the effect initial operation process (S4033).

After the effect initial operation process (S4033), the effect control microcomputer 121 executes illumination permission command output process (S4034), and proceeds to step S4037. In the illumination permission command output process (S4034), the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits an illumination permission command to the image control board 140. FIG. Thus, the illumination permission command is output to the image control board 140 only when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct.

On the other hand, in step S4031, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the board collation information stored in the effect ROM 123 does not match the information from the 1st bit to the 6th bit input from the board collation switch YS. If (NO in S4031), the effect control permission flag is turned OFF. As a result, the processing of steps S4002 to S4012 shown in FIG. 138 is not executed after the sub power-on processing (S4020) is completed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes abnormality notification processing (S4036), and proceeds to step S4037. In the abnormality notification process (S4036), the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs to the image control board 140 a command for displaying the board incompatibility notification image YF (see FIG. 137) on the display screen 50a.

Thus, when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect, the board incompatibility notification effect shown in FIG. 137 is executed. In the board incompatibility notification effect, the board incompatibility notification image YF shown in FIG. 137 is displayed. can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, for example, a sound saying "the game board is not compatible" may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

When proceeding to step S4037, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes other power-on processing (S4037) and ends this processing. In other power-on processing (S4037), for example, when RAM clearing is executed, processing for notifying that RAM clearing has been executed is executed.

[Image Control Main Processing] When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the image CPU 141 reads out the image control main processing program shown in FIG. 140 from the image ROM 142 and executes it. As shown in FIG. 140, in the image control main process, first, image power-on processing is performed in response to power-on (S5000). Then, the image CPU 141 executes the image power-on process (S5000), and then executes the 4ms timer interrupt process (S5001).

[Image power-on process] As shown in FIG. 141, in the image power-on process (S5000), the initial setting process (S5010) includes setting of the image CPU 141, SIO, PIO, CTC (for interrupt time management). circuit), etc. Subsequently, the image CPU 141 determines whether or not an illumination permission command has been received from the effect control board 120 (S5011). If received (YES in S5011), illumination initial light emission processing is executed (S5012). In the illumination initial light emission process (S5012), the image CPU 141 controls the light emission of the display LED 57d of the illumination display device 57 so that the illumination initial light emission shown in FIGS. . Thus, only when the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct and when the illumination permission command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the illumination initialization shown in FIGS. Light emission is performed.

After the illumination initial light emission processing shown in step S5012, the image CPU 141 turns on the illumination light emission flag (S5013), and proceeds to step S5015. The illumination light emission flag is a flag indicating that light emission control of the illumination display device 57 is possible. On the other hand, if the illumination permission command has not been received in step S5011 (NO in S5011), the image CPU 141 turns off the illumination light emission flag (S5014), and proceeds to step S5015. In step S5015, other power-on processing is executed (S5015), and this processing ends.

[4 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 4 ms timer interrupt processing (S5001) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 4 msec is input to the image control board 140. FIG. In the 4 ms timer interrupt process (S5001), the image CPU 141 executes received command analysis process (S5020), as shown in FIG. In the received command analysis process (S5020), the command stored in the reception buffer of the image RAM 143 is analyzed, and the information included in the command is analyzed. Subsequently, the image CPU 141 executes image control processing for controlling the image displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 based on the analyzed information (S5021). By this image control processing (S5021), various effects (fluctuation effect, jackpot effect, customer waiting effect, etc.) are executed on the display screen 50a.

Then, in step S5022, the image CPU 141 determines whether or not the illumination light emission flag is ON. If the illumination light emission flag is ON (YES in S5022), the image CPU 141 executes illumination light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the display LED 57d of the illumination display device 57 (S5023), and ends this processing. With this illumination light emission control processing (S5023), the image CPU 141 can execute, for example, the logo illumination appearance effect shown in FIG. 131(B) during execution of the SP reach.

On the other hand, if the illumination light emission flag is OFF (NO in S5022), the image CPU 141 does not execute the illumination light emission control process (S5023). As described above, when it is determined that the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect, the image control board 140 does not receive the illumination permission command from the effect control board 120, thereby executing illumination initial light emission processing (S5012). is not executed, and the illumination light emission control process (S5023) is not executed. Therefore, in this case, in the illumination display device 57, the light guide plate 57a does not emit light at all.

As described in detail above, in the twenty-sixth modification, as shown in FIG. 132, the illumination display device 57 is connected to the image control board 140 so as to be controlled in light emission. When the image control board 140 receives an illumination permission command from the effect control board 120 when the power is turned on, the image control board 140 can execute the light emission control of the illumination display device 57, while the illumination permission is received from the effect control board 120. If no command is received, the light emission control of the illumination display device 57 is not executed. In this way, the illumination display device 57 becomes capable of emitting light on the condition that the image control board 140 receives an illumination permission command from the effect control board 120 when the power is turned on. It is possible to prevent luminescent display.

Further, in the twenty-sixth modification, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) does not cause an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U (the game board 1 and the back unit 1U) when the power is turned on. is correct), the illumination display device 57 can emit light by transmitting an illumination permission command to the image control board 140 . That is, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U (the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect) when the power is turned on, the image Since the illumination permission command is not transmitted to the control board 140, the illumination display device 57 cannot emit light. In this way, the illumination display device 57 can emit light depending on whether the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is normal.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth modification, when the power is turned on, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) detects that there is no abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U (the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct), the illumination display device 57 executes illumination initial light emission shown in FIGS. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) detects that there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U (the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is incorrect). 133A, 133B, and 133C, the illumination display device 57 does not perform the illumination initial light emission shown in FIGS. In this way, even though the performance control board 120 determines that there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U when the power is turned on, the illumination initial light emission of the illumination display device 57 is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

<27th Modification>
In the twenty-fifth modification described above, even if the performance control board 120 receives a prize ball instruction command from the game control board 100 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism (see FIG. 127 (1) ), the big winning opening effect was not executed on the display screen 50a. In addition, even if the effect control board 120 receives the lower tray full instruction command from the game control board 100 (see FIG. 127 (2)) after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to detection of illegal magnetism, the display screen 50a , the lower plate full error effect was not executed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh modification, when the production control board 120 receives the prize ball instruction command from the game control board 100 after the illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 127 (1)), the production control microcomputer 121, as shown in FIG. 143(A), executes the big winning mouth winning effect on the display screen 50a. That is, in a state in which the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality" are displayed on the display screen 50a, the winning number image G119 indicating "+15" and the jackpot game being executed are displayed. A winning ball number image G110 indicating the total number of winning balls paid out is displayed. In this way, even in the state where the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed after the illegal magnetism is detected, the player will not be able to It is possible to make the player grasp that the prize ball has been obtained. In other words, it is possible to let the player know that the awarding of prize balls is continued, without the fact that the big prize winning effect is not executed immediately after the illegal magnetism is detected.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh modification, when the production control board 120 receives the lower tray full instruction command from the game control board 100 after the illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 127 (2)), the production control microcomputer 121 , as shown in FIG. 143(B), the lower tray full error effect is executed on the display screen 50a. That is, in a state where the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1 indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality" are displayed on the display screen 50a, the bottom tray full error indicating "please remove the ball from the bottom tray" is displayed. Image G120 is displayed. In this way, even in the state where the red background image RE and the magnetism detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed after the illegal magnetism is detected, the player can understand that the lower tray 35 is full. is possible.

<28th Modification>
In the twenty-fifth modification described above, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170, the effect control board 120 (See FIG. 127 (1)). Further, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170, and the lower tray full instruction command is sent to the effect control board 120. was sent (see FIG. 127(2)).

On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 144 (1), the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) pays out after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism. Even if the prize ball start command is received from the control board 170, the prize ball instruction command is not transmitted to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加As a result, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) can surely not execute the big winning opening winning performance.

Further, in the twenty-eighth modification, as shown in FIG. 144 (2), after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) changes to the payout control board 170. Even if the lower tray full command is received from, the lower tray full instruction command is not transmitted to the performance control board 120. - 特許庁As a result, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) can surely not execute the lower tray full error performance.

By the way, in the FIG. 25 modification, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170 after the excessive prize ball prevention function is activated or after the illegal magnetism is detected. Then, a prize ball instruction command is sent to the effect control board 120, and when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170, the lower tray full instruction command is sent to the effect control board 120 ( 125 and 127).

On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth modification, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, if the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170, the effect control board 120 is instructed to the prize balls. When the command is transmitted and the game control microcomputer 101 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170, it transmits the lower tray full instruction command to the effect control board 120 (see FIG. 125). On the other hand, after the illegal magnetism is detected, even if the game control microcomputer 101 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170, it does not transmit the prize ball instruction command to the performance control board 120, and the game is played. Even if the control microcomputer 101 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170, it does not transmit the lower tray full instruction command to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加

Thus, in the twenty-eighth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the over-prize ball prevention function is activated or when illegal magnetism is detected, and commands the effect control board 120. It is decided whether or not to transmit (prize ball instruction command, lower tray full instruction command). However, the game control microcomputer 101 (game control board 100) is subject to inspection of the game machine, and is subject to a large restriction on processing capability. Therefore, as the processing of the game control microcomputer 101, it is preferable that there is no case division as much as possible in order to reduce the processing load. Therefore, in the twenty-fifth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 judges whether the over-prize prevention function is activated or the fraudulent magnetism is detected in the twenty-fifth modification than in the twenty-eighth modification. It is preferable in that a command (prize ball instruction command, lower tray full instruction command) is transmitted to the effect control board 120 without doing. That is, the twenty-fifth modification can reduce the processing load of the game control microcomputer 101 more than the twenty-eighth modification.

<29th Modification>
In the twenty-eighth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 144 (1), after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170. However, the prize ball instruction command was not transmitted to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125 (1), when the game control board 100 receives a prize ball start command from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, A prize ball instruction command was transmitted to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 145(1), the game control board 100 receives the prize from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize ball prevention function. When the ball start command is received, the prize ball instruction command is not transmitted to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加As a result, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) can reliably prevent the execution of the big winning opening winning performance after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function. .

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 127 (1), after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170. is received, a prize ball instruction command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁Then, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) that has received the prize ball instruction command displays a red background image RE and a magnetic detection abnormality indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality". In the state where the image FR1 is displayed, the grand prize opening prize effect is executed.

As described above, in the twenty-ninth modification, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, in the state where the over-prize-ball abnormal image FRX is displayed, the special winning opening winning effect is not executed, and the over-prize-ball abnormal The visibility of the image FRX is ensured. On the other hand, in the state where the red background image RE and the magnetism detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed after the illegal magnetism is detected, the grand prize opening prize effect is executed, and the number of prize balls image G110 is executed. and the visibility of the obtained number image G119.

Further, in the twenty-eighth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 144 (2), after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 issues the bottom tray full command from the payout control board 170. Even if received, the lower tray full instruction command was not transmitted to the performance control board 120.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125 (2), when the game control board 100 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function, A lower tray full instruction command was transmitted to the performance control board 120. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 145(2), the game control board 100 moves downward from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function. When the plate full command is received, the lower plate full instruction command is not transmitted to the effect control board 120.例文帳に追加As a result, the performance control board 120 (the performance control microcomputer 121) can reliably prevent the lower tray full error performance from being executed after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize prevention function. .

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth modification, as shown in FIG. 127 (2), after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism, the game control board 100 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170. is received, a lower tray full instruction command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁Then, as shown in FIG. 143(B), the effect control board 120 (the effect control microcomputer 121) that has received the lower tray full instruction command displays a red background image RE and magnetic detection indicating "error 1 magnetic detection abnormality". In the state where the abnormal image FR1 is displayed, the lower tray full error presentation is executed.

As described above, in the twenty-ninth modification, after the over-balls prevention function is activated, in the state where the over-balls abnormal image FRX is displayed, the lower tray full error effect is not executed, and the over-balls abnormality is performed. The visibility of the image FRX is ensured. On the other hand, in a state where the red background image RE and the magnetism detection abnormality image FR1 are displayed after the illegal magnetism is detected, the lower tray full error rendering is executed so that the lower tray full error image is displayed. It guarantees the visibility of G120.

<Thirtieth Modification>
In each of the modifications described above, the number of difference balls is not suggested in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed, or in the normal game state in which the number of difference balls basically decreases. On the other hand, in the thirtieth modified example, depending on the progress of the game, the difference ball number (specific count number) may be suggested in the customer waiting state or the normal game state. The thirtieth modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG.

In addition, in the thirtieth modification, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable by ending the jackpot game after the difference ball number reaches 95000 (reference number). Then, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the game is controlled to be unexecutable on the condition that the RAM is cleared (power-on + operation to press the RAM clear switch 191). is released. In other words, the condition for making the game executable after the over-prize prevention function is activated is that the RAM is cleared. Moreover, the condition for resetting (erasing) the difference number is that the power is turned on. That is, almost every day (every time the power is turned on), the value of the difference ball number is reset to "0".

The customer waiting effect in the customer waiting state in the thirtieth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The customer waiting state is a state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed, and the customer waiting effect is a effect executed in the customer waiting state. When the customer waiting effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. , production patterns KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146(A), the state in which the performance symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stop-displayed is maintained for 30 seconds without starting the variable display of the new special symbols.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146(B), an effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. The effect amount setting image TT1 is an image indicating that it is possible to change the set light amount and the set sound volume. Specifically, the effect amount setting image TT1 indicates that the amount of light can be adjusted by pressing the up button or the down button of the select button, and pressing the left button or the right button of the select button. indicates that the volume can be adjusted. Thus, when the upward button of the select button is pressed while the effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed, the set light amount is adjusted to increase, and when the downward button of the select button is pressed, the set light amount is increased. adjusted to be smaller. When the right button of the select button is pressed, the set volume is adjusted to increase, and when the left button of the select button is pressed, the set volume is adjusted to decrease. This effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146(C), the hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The hole code corresponding image TT2 is an image for introducing the game parlor. That is, in the initial setting of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a hall code corresponding to each of the game halls (halls) is input, the hall code corresponding image TT2 displays "Today (corresponding to the hall code Thank you for coming to our store name). Please enjoy yourself as much as your time allows." This hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed for 30 seconds.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 146(D), a demonstration image TT3 is displayed on the display screen 50a. The demo image TT3 shows that the main character and the enemy character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 fight. This demo image TT3 is displayed for 30 seconds. In this way, after the post-demonstration image TT4 is displayed for 30 seconds, the effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds → the hall code corresponding image TT2 is displayed for 30 seconds → 30 seconds unless the variable display of a new special symbol is started. display of the demo image TT3 is repeated. As described above, in the customer waiting effect of the thirtieth modified example, the display of the effect amount setting image TT1 for 30 seconds→the display of the hall code corresponding image TT2 for 30 seconds→the display of the demonstration image TT3 for 30 seconds is repeated. The cycle consists of 1 minute and 30 seconds.

By the way, there is a situation in which a player who is thinking about which pachinko gaming machine to start playing in a game hall wants to know the number of difference balls. For example, when the number of difference balls at the present time is large, the player is made to recognize that this pachinko machine can win many prize balls (outgoing balls), which motivates him to play this pachinko game. . In addition, when the number of difference balls at the present time is large, the number of difference balls is approaching 95000 in this pachinko game machine, and it is possible to let the player know in advance that the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function is near. . On the other hand, for example, when the number of difference balls at the present time is small, this pachinko game machine is made to recognize that there is a sufficient margin until the number of difference balls reaches 95000 and that the game can be played for a long time, and this pachinko game is played. It will also motivate you to want to As described above, in order to select the pachinko gaming machine to be played, the player may want to grasp the current number of difference balls in advance.

Therefore, in the thirtieth modified example, in order to deal with the above-described problem, it is possible to grasp the guideline of the difference number of balls at the present time in the customer waiting state before starting the game. Specifically, during execution of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting short meter effect shown in FIG. 147(D) may be executed. There is a case where the customer waiting long meter effect shown is executed.

Based on FIG. 147, the case where the customer waiting short meter effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 147(A), after the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a for 30 seconds, the display screen 50a is displayed as shown in FIG. 147(B). , an effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 147(C), the hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed on the display screen 50a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(D), the meter image COM is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a as the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started.

As shown in FIG. 147(D), in the meter image COM, the number 39400, which is the guideline for the number of difference balls at the present time, and the characters "Complete meter" are displayed, and "95000" is displayed.
The ratio of the number of difference balls to the current number of balls is shown in the meter. Here, the numbers shown in the meter image COM are numbers in units of 100 balls, not in units of 1 ball. This makes it possible to obtain an accurate base value in the present pachinko game machine PY1 if the difference ball number is displayed in units of one ball. In that case, the player will be forced to grasp the base, which is the performance of the pachinko game machine PY1, and the player will be excessively conscious of the increase or decrease of the base. Therefore, in the thirtieth modification, in the meter image COM, the number of difference balls at the present time (
The number of difference balls per 100 pitches) is shown, making it difficult for the player to grasp the correct base value and not making the player overly conscious of the increase or decrease of the base. In this way, the meter image COM is displayed in a comprehensible form in which the approximate number of difference balls (specific count number) can be comprehended. In short, the manner in which the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) can be grasped does not mean only the display manner in which the number of difference balls at the present time can be accurately grasped on a ball-by-ball basis. It also means that a display mode in which an approximate (standard) number of balls can be grasped is included.

The meter image COM shown in FIG. 147(D) is displayed for five seconds after the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started. That is, since the demonstration image TT3 is displayed for 30 seconds, both the demonstration image TT3 and the meter image COM are displayed for 5 seconds after the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started, and the demonstration image TT3 is displayed for the next 25 seconds. is displayed (see FIG. 146(D)). In this way, the meter image COM is displayed as an auxiliary to the demo image TT3, and basically only the player who cares about the number of difference balls is made aware of the display of the meter image COM. ing.

As described above, the effect in which the meter image COM is displayed for five seconds after the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started is the "customer waiting short meter effect". Therefore, when the customer waiting short meter effect is executed, the effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds⇒the hall code corresponding image TT2 is displayed for 30 seconds⇒the demonstration image TT3 and the meter image COM are displayed for 5 seconds⇒25 The display of the demo image TT3 for a second is repeated.

Next, based on FIG. 148, the case where the customer waiting long meter effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 148(A), after the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a for 30 seconds, the display screen 50a is displayed as shown in FIG. 148(B). , an effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(C), the meter image COM is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a along with the display of the hole code corresponding image TT2. This meter image COM is the same as the meter image COM shown in FIG. 147(D). The percentage of the number of difference balls in is shown as a meter.

The meter image COM shown in FIG. 148(C) is displayed for five seconds after the display of the hole code corresponding image TT2 is started. That is, since the hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed for 30 seconds, both the hole code corresponding image TT2 and the meter image COM are displayed for 5 seconds after the display of the hole code corresponding image TT2 is started, and then for 25 seconds. For seconds, only the hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed (see FIG. 146(C)). In this way, the meter image COM is displayed as an auxiliary to the hole code corresponding image TT2, so that only the player who basically cares about the number of difference balls will be aware of the display of the meter image COM. It has become.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148(D), the meter image COM is displayed as the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started. The meter image COM shown in FIG. 148(D) is displayed for 5 seconds as in the customer waiting short meter effect. That is, both the demonstration image TT3 and the meter image COM are displayed for 5 seconds after the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started, and only the demonstration image TT3 is displayed for the next 25 seconds ( See FIG. 146(D)).

As described above, an effect in which the meter image COM is displayed for five seconds after the display of the hole code corresponding image TT2 is started, and an effect in which the meter image COM is displayed for five seconds after the display of the demonstration image TT3 is started. , "Customer waiting long meter production". Therefore, when the customer waiting long meter effect is executed, the effect amount setting image TT1 is displayed for 30 seconds → the hole code corresponding image TT2 and the meter image COM are displayed for 5 seconds → the hole code corresponding image TT2 is displayed for 25 seconds. ⇒Display of the demonstration image TT3 for 5 seconds and the meter image COM⇒Display of the demonstration image TT3 for 25 seconds is repeated.

Next, the conditions for executing the customer waiting short meter effect will be described. The customer waiting short meter effect is executed when the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more and less than 24,000. That is, when the number of game balls shot by the player after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 was turned on is 12000 or more and less than 24000, in the customer waiting state, the customer shown in FIG. A waiting short meter effect is executed. Next, the conditions for executing the customer waiting long meter effect will be described. The customer waiting long meter effect is executed when the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more. That is, when the number of game balls shot by the player after the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on is 24000 or more, the customer waiting long meter effect shown in FIG. 148 is displayed in the customer waiting state. executed.

Thus, in the thirtieth modification, when the total number of shot balls is 12,000 (specific number of balls) or more, the meter image COM is displayed in the customer waiting state, while when the total number of shot balls is less than 12,000, , the meter image COM is not displayed in the customer waiting state. This is based on the following reasons. When the player continues playing the game for one hour, the total number of shot balls reaches about 6000. Therefore, the total number of shot balls reaches 12000 or more when the game is played for a total of 2 hours or more in one day. If the pachinko machine PY1 is played for less than two hours in total in one day, it is difficult for the player to judge whether the pachinko machine PY1 has produced many prize balls, and the number of difference balls is 950,000. is very unlikely to approach Therefore, in order to prevent the player from being excessively aware of the difference in the number of balls, the meter image COM is displayed in the customer waiting state only when the total number of balls fired in one day is 12,000 or more. there is

Next, the difference between the condition for executing the customer waiting short meter effect and the condition for executing the customer waiting long meter effect will be described. As the total number of shot balls increases, the player has been playing the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to determine whether the pachinko machine PY1 has produced a large number of prize balls. Furthermore, the greater the total number of shot balls, the higher the possibility that the number of difference balls is approaching 950,000, and the player would like to know how close the over-prize preventing function is to working. In this way, it is preferable to make it easier for the player to grasp the difference number of balls in the customer waiting state as the total number of shot balls increases.

As described above, when the total number of shot balls is still relatively small (12000 or more and less than 24000), in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting short meter effect in which the display time of the meter image COM is relatively short is executed. (See FIG. 147). That is, the meter image COM is displayed for only 5 seconds in the customer waiting effect that is repeated in one cycle of 1 minute and 30 seconds. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is still relatively small, the indication of the number of difference balls is modestly indicated to the player by the customer waiting short meter effect with a small display time ratio.

On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is relatively large (24000 or more), a customer waiting long meter presentation in which the display time of the meter image COM is relatively long is executed in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 148). That is, the meter image COM is displayed for only 10 seconds in the customer waiting effect that is repeated in one cycle of 1 minute and 30 seconds. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is relatively large, the customer waiting long meter effect with a large display time ratio is displayed so that the player can easily recognize the approximate number of difference balls. In short, the customer waiting long meter effect makes it easier for the player to grasp the guideline of the difference number of balls than the customer waiting short meter effect.

Next, the fluctuating meter effect that may be executed in the thirtieth modification will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuating meter effect is an effect for allowing the player to grasp the guideline of the number of difference balls at the present time during the fluctuating effect in the normal game state. However, in the thirtieth modification, the fluctuating meter effect includes the fluctuating short meter effect and the fluctuating long meter effect. The display time and display frequency of the meter image COM are different between the during-fluctuation short meter effect and the during-fluctuation long meter effect.

By the way, if the player continues to play the game for a long time without being able to win a big win in the normal game state, the player's desire to play will decrease. Therefore, in a pachinko gaming machine that has been played for a long time in the normal game state, it is conceivable to execute some kind of effect (provide a privilege) to the player so as not to reduce the player's desire to play. Therefore, in the thirtieth modified example, in order to suppress the decrease in the desire to play in the normal game state, the fluctuating short meter effect or the fluctuating long meter effect may be executed.

Based on FIG. 149, the case where the during-fluctuation short meter effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 149(A), after the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are variably displayed on the display screen 50a, subsequently, the variable performance (variation display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3) is started. It is assumed that At this time (when the variable display of the new special symbol is started), if the variable short meter effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 149B, the image display device 50 (display means) Along with the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 on the display screen 50a, the meter image COM is displayed on the upper right portion of the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 149(B), the meter image COM shows the number of 58300, which is the guideline for the number of difference balls at the present time, and the characters "Complete meter", and "95000".
The ratio of the number of difference balls to the current number of balls is shown in the meter. Since the meter image COM shown in FIG. 149(B) is the same as the meter image COM shown in FIGS. 147(D), 148(C) and (D), detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this way, the meter image COM shown in FIG. 149(B) also does not indicate the difference number of balls per ball, but it is displayed in a comprehensible manner in which the difference number (specific count number) can be grasped. I can say.

When the variable short meter effect is executed, the meter image COM shown in FIG. 149(D) is displayed for only 3 seconds after the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(B), the meter image COM is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a until three seconds have passed since the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 started. However, when three seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the meter image COM disappears from the upper right portion of the display screen 50a, as shown in FIG. 149(C). In this way, an effect in which the meter image COM is displayed for only 3 seconds after the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started is the variable short meter effect.

Next, the variable long meter effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the fluctuating long meter effect is executed, as shown in FIG. A meter image COM is displayed in the upper right part. After the meter image COM is displayed for 6 seconds, the meter image COM disappears from the upper right portion of the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 149(C). Thus, an effect in which the meter image COM is displayed for 6 seconds after the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started is the variable long meter effect.

Next, the conditions for executing the short meter effect during fluctuation will be described. The fluctuating short meter effect is a normal game state, and the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000 (the specified number of balls, the first specified number of balls) when the variable effect is executed, and It is executed when the execution of the during-fluctuation short meter effect is determined by lottery according to the during-fluctuation short meter effect execution lottery table (see FIG. 154(A)), which will be described later. That is, in a game state different from the normal game state, the fluctuating short meter effect is not executed, and if the number of game balls shot by the player after the power is turned on is less than 12000, the fluctuating short meter effect is displayed. Meter effects are never executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(A), in the during-fluctuation short meter effect execution lottery table, execution of the during-fluctuation short meter effect is determined at a distribution rate of 15%. Therefore, in the normal game state, when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000 when the variable effect is executed, the variable short meter effect is executed with a probability of 15%. It's becoming

Next, the conditions for executing the variable long meter effect will be described. The fluctuating long meter effect is the normal game state, the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more when the fluctuating effect is executed, and the fluctuating long meter effect execution lottery table (see FIG. 154 (B)) which will be described later. ), it is executed when execution of the variable short meter effect is determined by lottery. That is, in a game state different from the normal game state, the fluctuating long meter effect is not executed, and if the number of game balls shot by the player after the power is turned on is less than 24000, the fluctuating long meter effect is displayed. Meter effects are never executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(B), in the during-fluctuation long meter effect execution lottery table, execution of the during-fluctuation long meter effect is determined at a distribution rate of 30%. Therefore, in the normal game state, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more when the variable effect is executed, the variable long meter effect is executed with a probability of 30%.

Thus, in the thirtieth modification, when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more, the meter image COM may be displayed at the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the normal game state. When the total number of shot balls is less than 12000 (fixed number of balls), the meter image COM may be displayed even at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 in the normal game state. do not have. This is based on the following reasons.

When the player continues playing the game for one hour, the total number of shot balls reaches about 6000. Therefore, the total number of shot balls reaches 12000 or more when the game is played for a total of 2 hours or more in one day. As a result, for the pachinko game machine PY1 that has been played for a total of 2 hours or more in one day, at the start of the fluctuation in the normal game state (when the fluctuation display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started) , the meter image COM is rarely displayed. Therefore, in order to suppress the decrease in the desire to play in the normal game state, it is possible to let the player know the approximate number of difference balls as a privilege for the pachinko machine PY1 that has been played for a total of two hours or more in one day. be. In other words, there is a high possibility that the value of the number of difference balls is not sufficiently large in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which the game has not been played for a total of two hours or more in one day. Therefore, in this case, by not displaying the meter image COM, it is possible to prevent the player during the game from being excessively conscious of the value of the number of difference balls.

Next, the difference between the execution condition for the during-fluctuation short meter effect and the execution condition for the during-fluctuation long meter effect will be described. As the total number of shot balls increases, the player has been playing the game for a longer period of time. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to determine whether the pachinko machine PY1 has produced a large number of prize balls. Furthermore, the greater the total number of shot balls, the higher the possibility that the number of difference balls is approaching 950,000, and the player would like to know how close the over-prize preventing function is to working. In this way, it is preferable to make it easier for the player who is playing in the normal game state to grasp the number of difference balls as the total number of shot balls increases.

As described above, when the total number of shot balls is still relatively small (12000 or more and less than 24000), the display time of the meter image COM is relatively short at the start of fluctuation in the normal game state. A short meter effect is executed relatively infrequently (see FIG. 154(A)). That is, in the normal game state, the meter image COM is displayed for only 3 seconds at the start of variation every time the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is executed about 6.7 times. In this way, the guideline for the difference number of balls is shown to the player conservatively.

On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is relatively large (24000 or more), at the start of variation in the normal game state, the display time of the meter image COM is relatively long. It is executed at high frequency (see FIG. 154(B)). That is, in the normal game state, the meter image COM is displayed for only 6 seconds at the start of variation every time the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is executed about 3.3 times. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is relatively large, the display time is long and the execution frequency is high, so that the player can easily recognize the guideline of the difference number of balls. In short, the variable-long meter effect makes it easier for the player to grasp the guideline of the number of difference balls than the variable-short meter effect.

[Received Command Analysis Processing] Next, the received command analysis processing (S4201) in the thirtieth modification will be described. The received command analysis process (S4201) is executed by the effect control microcomputer 121 each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120 in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (see the process of step S4012 shown in FIG. 50). It is a process to

As shown in FIG. 150, in the received command analysis process (S4201), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state designation command is received from the game control board 100 (S4401), mode status setting processing is performed (S4402). In the mode status setting process (S4402), the received game state designation command is analyzed, and the value of the mode status is set based on the game state information included in the game state designation command. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the current game state based on the value of the mode status.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command) is received from the game control board 100 (S4403), and if received Variation production start processing, which will be described later, is performed (S4404).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command (special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or special figure 2 fluctuation stop command) is received from the game control board 100 (S4405), and if received Fluctuation production end processing is performed (S4406). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4406), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the output buffer of the production RAM124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the game control board 100 (S4407), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4408). In the opening effect selection process (S4408), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance in the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the game control board 100 (S4409), and if received, performs a round effect selection process (S4410). In the round effect selection process (S4410), the round designation command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect in the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the game control board 100 (S4411), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4412). In the ending effect selection process (S4412), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect in the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a differential ball number command is received from the game control board 100 (S4413), and if received, performs differential ball number storage processing (S4414). The differential ball number command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a command including information on the differential ball number calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 in the differential ball number calculation process (S303) shown in FIG. In the differential ball number storage process (S4414), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the received differential ball number command and stores the differential ball number information in the effect RAM124. Since the information on the number of difference balls is stored in the erasing storage area of RAM 124 for effect, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the erasing storage area of RAM 124 for effect is erased when the power supply is cut off. will be erased.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the command for the total number of shot balls is received from the game control board 100 (S4415), and if it is received, the total number of shot balls is stored (S4416). The total shot ball number command is sent to the effect control board 120 as a command including information on the total number of shot balls counted by the game control microcomputer 101 in the shot ball number counting process (S302) shown in FIG. Here, in the shot ball number counting process (S302) shown in FIG. The total number of shot balls in the game) is counted, and a total number of shot balls command including information on the total number of shot balls can be transmitted to the effect control board 120. - 特許庁That is, the information on the total number of shot balls counted in the number of shot balls counting process (S302) is reset to "0" when the power is turned off. In the total shot ball number storage process (S4416), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the received total shot ball number command and stores information on the total shot ball number in the effect RAM124. Since the information on the total number of shot balls is stored in the erased storage area of RAM 124 for effect, the total number of shot balls stored in the erased storage area of RAM 124 for effect will be changed when the power supply is cut off. Information will be erased.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100 (S4417), and if received, performs a customer waiting command setting process to be described later (S4418). The customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 101 does not start the variable display of the special symbol (that the customer is in a customer waiting state) by the processing of step S1417 shown in FIG. is.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 performs other processing (S4419) based on the received command other than the above commands (for example, processing for performing normal pattern fluctuation production based on the reception of the normal pattern fluctuation start command). to end the received command analysis process (S4201).

[Variation Production Start Processing] As shown in FIG. 151, in the variation production start processing (S4404), the production control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (S4501). In the variation start command, the information of the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process and the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process and the special figure 2 variation pattern It contains information on the variation pattern set in the selection process (see FIGS. 13 and 14), information specifying the current game state, and the like. In addition, the information which the microcomputer 121 for production|presentation control acquired here can be suitably utilized also in the process performed after this.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the mode status value currently set (S4502). Subsequently, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the variable performance are selected (S4503). Specifically, a random number for determining the performance symbol is acquired, and one table is selected from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. Then, a performance symbol is selected by determining the acquired performance symbol determination random number using the selected table. As a result, a combination (for example, "777", etc.) of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are finally stopped and displayed is determined.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a variable effect pattern selection process for selecting a variable effect pattern, which is the contents of the variable effect, based on the information on the variable pattern, the value of the mode status, the information on the probability variable counter or the time saving counter. Execute (S4504). In this way, once the variable production pattern is determined, the variable production time, the variable display mode of the production pattern, the presence or absence of the reach production, the contents of the reach production, the presence or absence of the production button production (SW production), the contents of the production button production, and the production development configuration. , the details of the contents of the variable production including the type of background of the production pattern and the like are determined.

And the notice effect selection process is executed (S4505). In the notice effect selection process (S4505), a random number for deciding the notice effect is obtained, and one table is selected from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. do. Then, the selected table is used to determine the obtained random number for determining the announcement effect, thereby selecting the announcement effect. As a result, the content of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect is determined.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a variable effect start command for starting the selected effect pattern, the variable effect pattern and the advance notice effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4506). As a result, when the variable performance start command set in step S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission processing (S4004) shown in FIG. The performance begins.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state based on the value of the mode status (S4507). If the game is not in the normal game state (NO in S4507), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is in the normal game state (YES in S4507), then it is determined whether or not the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more based on the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the effect RAM 124. (S4508). If the total number of shot balls is less than 12,000 (NO at S4508), this process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more (YES in S4508), then, based on the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the effect RAM 124, it is determined whether or not the total number of shot balls is 24,000 or more. (S4509).

Thus, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more (YES in S4509), it executes the high probability meter effect lottery process (S4510). Specifically, in the high-probability meter effect lottery process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires a meter effect random number, and obtains it using the fluctuating long meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 154(B). By judging the meter effect random number, it is determined whether or not to execute the fluctuating long meter effect. As can be seen from the variable long meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 154(B), the variable long meter effect execution is determined by lottery with a probability of 30% (distribution rate).

After the high probability meter effect lottery process of step S4510, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not execution of the variable long meter effect is determined (S4511). When it is determined not to execute the long meter effect during fluctuation (NO in S4511), this process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the variable long meter effect (YES in S4511), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the variable long meter effect command for executing the variable long meter effect in the effect RAM 124. It is set in the output buffer and this process ends. As a result, when the fluctuating long meter effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the fluctuating long meter effect is started on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. A meter image COM showing the current ball difference number (the difference ball number in units of 100 balls) is displayed for 6 seconds.

On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the total number of shot balls is not 24,000 or more (NO in S4509), the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more and less than 24,000, and the low probability meter effect Lottery processing is executed (S4513). Specifically, in the low-probability meter effect lottery process (S4513), the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires a meter effect random number, and obtains it using the fluctuating short meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 154(A). By judging the meter effect random number, it is determined whether or not to execute the fluctuating short meter effect. As can be seen from the changing short meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 154(A), the execution of the changing short meter effect is determined by lottery with a probability of 15% (distribution rate).

After the low probability meter effect lottery in step S4513, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not execution of the short meter effect during fluctuation is determined (S4514). When it is determined not to execute the short meter effect during fluctuation (NO in S4514), this process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the fluctuating short meter effect (YES in S4514), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the fluctuating short meter effect command for executing the fluctuating short meter effect in the effect RAM 124. It is set in the output buffer and this process ends. As a result, when the fluctuating short meter effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the fluctuating short meter effect is started on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. A meter image COM showing the current ball difference number (the difference ball number in units of 100 balls) is displayed for only 3 seconds.

[Customer Waiting Effect Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 153, in the customer waiting effect setting process (S4418), the effect control microcomputer 121 first sends a customer waiting command for executing the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. It is set in RAM 124 (S4601). As a result, when the customer waiting command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the display screen 50a displays the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, After the EZ3 continues to display the stop display (confirmed stop display) for 30 seconds, as a customer waiting effect, the display of the effect amount setting image TT1 for 30 seconds → the display of the hall code corresponding image TT2 for 30 seconds → the demo image for 30 seconds The display of TT3 is repeated.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more based on the information of the total number of shot balls stored in the RAM 124 for effect (S4602). If the total number of shot balls is less than 12,000 (NO at S4602), this process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more (YES in S4602), then based on the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the effect RAM 124, it is determined whether or not the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more. (S4603).

If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more (YES in S4603), it stores the customer waiting long meter effect command for executing the customer waiting long meter effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set to finish this processing. As a result, when the customer waiting long meter effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 continue to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 50a for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. , Display of effect amount setting image TT1 for 30 seconds⇒Display of hall code corresponding image TT2 and meter image COM for 5 seconds⇒Display of hall code corresponding image TT2 for 25 seconds⇒Demonstration image TT3 and meter image COM for 5 seconds display ⇒ The display of the demo image TT3 for 25 seconds is repeated.

On the other hand, if the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the total number of shot balls is not 24,000 or more (NO in S4603), the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more and less than 24,000. A customer waiting short meter effect command for executing the effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and this processing is finished. As a result, when the customer waiting short meter effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the display screen 50a continues to display the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in a stopped state for 30 seconds as shown in FIG. , display of effect amount setting image TT1 for 30 seconds→display of hall code corresponding image TT2 for 30 seconds→display of demo image TT3 and meter image COM for 5 seconds→display of demo image TT3 for 25 seconds is repeated. Become.

As described above in detail, in the thirtieth modified example, the difference number of balls is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as shown in FIG. 147 or FIG. A meter image COM that allows a user to grasp the standard may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine which pachinko gaming machine should be used to start the game before starting the game.

Further, in the thirtieth modification, when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more in the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 147 or FIG. is displayed, when the total number of shot balls is less than 12,000, the meter image COM that enables a user to grasp the approximate number of difference balls is not displayed. As a result, when the total number of shot balls is not sufficiently large, the meter image COM is not displayed while the player is waiting for a customer.

Further, in the thirtieth modification, when the number of difference balls is 24000 or more while waiting for a customer, the standard of the number of difference balls is higher than when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000. The ratio of the display time for displaying the meter image COM capable of grasping the is increased. Specifically, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more, as shown in FIGS. display of effect amount setting image TT1 ⇒ display of hall code corresponding image TT2 for 30 seconds ⇒ customer waiting effect in which display of demonstration image TT3 for 30 seconds is repeatedly performed), the meter image COM is displayed for only 10 seconds. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000, one cycle consists of 1 minute and 30 seconds as shown in FIGS. In the customer waiting effect, the meter image COM is displayed for only 5 seconds. In this way, the greater the total number of shot balls, the longer the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has been played, so that the player can easily grasp the number of difference balls at the present time.

In addition, in the thirtieth modification, as shown in FIG. 149, in the normal game state, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays a meter image COM that enables a user to grasp the approximate number of difference balls. There is However, when the total number of shot balls is 24,000 or more, the ratio of the display time for displaying the meter image COM, which allows an indication of the number of difference balls, is greater than when the total number of shot balls is less than 24,000. Specifically, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more, there is a 30% probability that the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) will be displayed as the variable effect is started in the normal game state. May only be displayed for 6 seconds. On the other hand, when the total number of shot balls is less than 24000, there is a 15% probability that the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) will be displayed for 3 seconds as the variable effect is started in the normal game state. may be displayed only. In this way, as the total number of shot balls increases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the current number of difference balls in the normal game state as a privilege for playing the game for a long time.

In addition, in the thirtieth modification, when the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more in the normal game state, a meter image COM that allows an indication of the number of difference balls may be displayed (Fig. 149(B)), when the total number of shot balls is less than 12,000, the meter image COM that enables the user to grasp the approximate number of difference balls is not displayed. As a result, when the total number of shot balls is not sufficiently large, the meter image COM is not displayed in the normal game state, so that the player does not have to worry about the number of difference balls more than necessary.

<Other Modifications>
In the above-described form, it is configured as a so-called V certain machine (a gaming machine controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)). It may be configured as a gaming machine in which the transition to the probability state is determined. In addition, in the above-mentioned form and each of the above modifications (except for the second modification), it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends according to the number of times the special symbol changes), but once controlled to the high probability state Then, it can be configured as a gaming machine (so-called probability variable loop type machine) in which control to a high probability state continues until the start of the next jackpot game, or a falling machine (a gaming machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). good.

In the above form and each modification, the upper limit number of the special figure 1 reservation is four, and the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reservation is four. However, the upper limit number of special figure 1 reservation and the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservation are not limited to 4, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above form, the timing at which the over-prize preventing function operates is when the high-probability-high base state ends or when the low-probability-high base state ends. However, the over-prizing preventing function may be activated only when the high-probability/high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends. Also, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state continues for a certain period of time, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, the number of extra balls may be 80000 or more, and the over-prize preventing function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is finished. Also, for example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a small winning game, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and the overpayment is performed at the timing when the small winning game state (state in which the small winning game is executed, advantageous game state) ends A ball protection function may be activated. In this case, for example, the so-called small hit rush state (small hit game is executed more frequently than the normal game state, high probability low base state etc. in which game balls are likely to enter the big winning opening due to the execution of the small hit game) , When the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more and the small winning game state ends or the high-probability-low base state ends, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 80000 or more, the over-prized ball prevention function may be activated.

In the above embodiment, the first reset condition (see FIG. 26A) is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed down, or the second condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the reset condition (see FIG. 26(B)) is met, the number of difference balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, at the timing when the jackpot game state ends or when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. When shifting from the guaranteed high base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, the number of difference balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends, so only when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 (reference number) during the rush state in one time , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, when shifting from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high-probability-low base state to a normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. . Further, the difference number may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 155(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, 1 hour), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, if the specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the number of difference balls, it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from reaching 80000 or more for a while. Note that the specific time described above is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. Further, for example, the difference ball number may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference number of balls without forcing the staff of the game hall to perform any operation. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 am, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of difference balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference ball number can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or may be arranged on a dedicated board.

In the above-described mode, the measured difference ball number was not displayed by the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed by the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference ball number on the display device 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display device 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of difference balls is 0 to 50000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display device 8 or 7 segment display 300, and the number of difference balls is 50001 to 70000. If it is (second range), display the second mode on the display device 8 or 7-segment display 300, and if the number of difference balls is 70001 to 80000 (third range), display The third mode may be displayed on the device 8 or 7 segment display 300 . Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the information on the total number of prize balls and the information on the total number of shot balls to the production control board 120, and the production control microcomputer 121 transmits the information on the total number of prize balls and the information on the total number of shot balls. By calculating the number of difference balls based on the number information, the number of difference balls may be displayed on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of paid out prize balls (or the number of prize balls to be paid out) and information on detection of the outlet sensor to the effect control board 120 . Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 may calculate the number of difference balls based on these pieces of information, and display the number of difference balls on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 does not directly indicate the number of difference balls by a numerical value, but the number of difference balls (the number of difference balls) is determined by the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting means (board lamp 54, frame lamp 53). range) may be indicated.

Also, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference ball number on the 7-segment display 300 as in the modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, information on the number of difference balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four storage areas of the number of difference number storage section 107c of the non-erased storage section 107, respectively. . In the first storage area, the number of difference balls up to the present time since the power was turned on this time is stored. In the second storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) to when the power was cut off last time is stored. In the third storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times before) to when the power was cut off two times before is stored. In the 4th (N) storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two last times (3 times before) to when the power was cut off two times before last is stored. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the fourth storage area is erased. It should be noted that the information on the difference number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if the RAM clear is executed.

Then, in this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The number of difference balls stored in the th storage area is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300 by switching in order in units of 1,000 balls. be. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 156(A). This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base one time ago was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base 3 times ago is 38%.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "cL20" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 156(E). As a result, it is indicated that the difference number of balls from the time when the power is turned on to the present time is 20000. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the last time (one time before) when the power was turned on until the last time when the power was cut off is "0". When the number of difference balls is smaller than "0" because the total number of shot balls is larger than the total number of prize balls, "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time the power was turned on the second time (two times before) until the power was cut off the time before last is 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time when the power was turned on two times before last (three times before) to when the power was turned off two times before last is 48,000. After that, FIGS. 156A to 156H are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the modified example described above, each time the power is turned off and on (returned on), the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N) storage area. is erased. However, each time the RAM is cleared, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the 4th (N) storage area may be erased. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined specified time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured difference ball number is shifted and stored, and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference number of balls that has been set may be deleted. It should be noted that N described above can be appropriately changed as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more. Also, the number of difference balls is displayed in units of 1,000 balls, but may be displayed in units of 10 balls, 100 balls, or 10,000 balls.

In the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 156, the 7-segment display 300 automatically switches the display of the number of difference balls every five seconds. However, the display of the difference number may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 . Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the number of difference balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means.

In the above embodiment, when the difference ball number becomes 70000 (preliminary reference number, specific number) or more, the performance mode shown in FIG. However, the effect mode indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching the operation is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 70000") or a special light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 are approaching the operation of the over-prize prevention function. may be shown. Further, as the number of difference balls increases, it may be indicated that the over-prize prevention function is approaching the operation by means of an effect mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the above embodiment, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number), the game can be stopped by the effect mode shown in FIG. 28(B). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 28(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 80,000") or a special light emitting mode of the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, or the like may be used to indicate a situation in which the game may be stopped. good.

In the above embodiment, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game is rendered unexecutable by the presentation mode shown in FIG. 27(A). However, the effect mode indicating the state in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 27(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display screen 50a may display an image indicating "game cannot be executed", or a special voice (for example, "game cannot be executed") may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

In the above embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. However, even if the information on the number of difference balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erasing storage section) of the game RAM 104 and the information on the number of difference balls is cleared when the RAM is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the difference number of balls include the execution of RAM clearing, or the reset condition for resetting the difference number of balls is limited to the execution of RAM clearing. , you can just turn the power off and on again.

In the above embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 32) but also shoots the game ball. The firing control process (process of step 109, see FIG. 32) was also stopped. However, when the over-prize prevention function operates, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the shooting control process. However, in this case, as described in the fifth modified example, even if the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, the game balls flow down the game area 6 when the player rotates the handle 72k. Therefore, if the game control microcomputer 101 stops both the game control process and the shooting control process, it is possible for the player to immediately grasp the situation where the game cannot be executed. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the launch control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, the game ball may still flow down the game area 6 at the timing when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game ball may enter various prize-winning holes and give the player a prize. There is the problem that spheres can be given. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible to ensure that no prize balls are awarded to the player after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

In the above mode, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of shot balls based on the detection of the outlet sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detect winning to various winning holes , the total number of shot balls may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B (see FIG. 2), and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, the detection of this sensor Based on, the total number of shot balls may be counted.

In the above mode, when the number of difference balls reached 70000, the over-prize notice image KY was displayed as shown in FIG. 28(A). However, regardless of the number of difference balls, the game cannot be executed on the condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the customer waiting effect, the effect during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect), the notice effect accompanying the variable effect, etc. A presentation explaining what will happen may be executed. This is because such an effect makes it possible to inform the players and employees of the game arcade in advance that the pachinko game machine PY1 has the function of preventing over-prized balls.

In the above embodiment, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104, even if the RAM is cleared, Information on the number of balls, information on the total number of shot balls, and information on the number of difference balls are not deleted. However, non-volatile storage means provided separately from the game RAM 104 (for example, FRAM provided on the main control board (game control board) 100) stores information on the total number of balls awarded, information on the total number of shot balls, and information on the difference. By storing the information on the number of balls, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of awarded balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls may not be erased.

In the above embodiment, the difference ball number is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the timing to start counting the number of difference balls may be from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal game state). In this case, the minus amount of the number of difference balls (that is, the total number of shot balls) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls separately, and subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls to calculate the number of difference balls. However, the difference ball number may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the difference ball number. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Also, each time a game ball is shot (every time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference ball counter is decremented. In this way, the number of difference balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the differential ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more so as not to become negative. Then, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the above mode, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, the game stop notice image KH shown in FIG. was predicted to be impracticable. However, the effect mode of the unplayable notice effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 28(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game impossibility notice effect does not indicate at what timing the game is controlled to be impracticable (at what timing the over-prized ball prevention function is activated), but simply controls the game to be impracticable later. It may be a production showing that. In addition, the game impossibility forewarning effect is an effect of outputting a game impossibility forewarning sound (for example, a sound saying "The game will soon become unexecutable") from the speaker 52, or the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are in a game impossibility forewarning light emission mode ( For example, an effect of emitting light in a light emission mode that repeats full lighting and full extinguishing may be performed. The unplayable notice effect may be executed at any timing as long as the number of difference balls is 80000 (reference number) or more, and may continue to be executed until the over-prize prevention function is activated, or may be executed at random timing. may be executed multiple times.

In the above mode, when the difference ball number is 70000 (specified number) or more, the pre-game impossibility notice effect shown in FIG. Then, the next big hit arrival notice effect shown in FIG. 66(B) and the run-up effect shown in FIGS. Then, the next big hit arrival suggesting effect shown in FIG. 72(C) and the mini next big win reach suggesting effect shown in FIG. 72(D) were executed. However, the effect mode of each effect (advance notice effect) described above is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the advance notice effect is a game impossibility notice sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of difference balls has reached is rendered unexecutable"), or all the frame lamps 53 and board lamps 54 may be illuminated in a red light emission mode (special light emission mode). Further, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is not limited to direct notice that the game becomes unexecutable as shown in FIGS. 28(A) and 66(B). A special dedicated image indirectly suggestive may be displayed, or a special dedicated sound may be output. For example, only when the number of difference balls is 78500 (specific number) or more, a special dedicated character image or a special dedicated item image is displayed, indirectly suggesting that the game becomes unexecutable You can do it. It should be noted that the effect mode of the over-prize ball prevention notice effect (advance notice effect) in the above-described twentieth and twenty-first modifications may also be changed as described above. Further, the specific number that triggers the start of advance notice effect is not limited to 70000, 78500, and 79550, but may be 60000, for example, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, the specific number that triggers the start of advance notice effect is set to be granted in jackpot games X, Y, and Z based on the winning of three jackpot symbols X, Y, and Z from the reference number (80000). A value (79050) obtained by subtracting the average number of prize balls (950) may be used. Also, the execution timing of the pre-announcement effect can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be executed only during the win suggestion effect (during the display of the SP reach background image G113 indicating that the main character is happy to have won the battle). Alternatively, it may be executed each time the production mode is switched, each time a predetermined number of fluctuations are executed, or at random timing by lottery.

In the above embodiment, if the player rotates the handle 72k (shooting operation means) after the game is disabled, the operation alerting effect (shown in FIG. 51(B) or FIG. 52(B) Attention calling effect) was executed. Further, in the fifth modified example, if the player touches the handle 72k after the game is disabled to be executed, a touch attention call effect (attention call effect) shown in FIG. 61(B) or FIG. 62(B) is displayed. was executed. However, the effect mode of the attention calling effect is not limited to the above-described one, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, if the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41 (effect operation means) after the game is disabled, the attention calling effect may be executed.

In the above-described first modification, as shown in FIG. 53, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 4 after shifting to the normal game state (as a special figure 2 remaining hold) When the game is executed once, the function of preventing over-prized balls is activated, and the remaining reservation special performance (special performance) shown in FIG. 54 is ended. However, if the difference ball number is 80000 or more, and the total number of times of the second special symbol variation and the first special symbol variation is executed four times after shifting to the normal game state, the over-prize ball. As the prevention function is activated, the remaining pending special effect (special effect) shown in FIG. 54 may be ended. Note that the number of times described above is not limited to four times, and may be, for example, one time, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-described second modification, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more, instead of the round effect shown in FIG. 55(A), the round substitute effect (alternative effect) shown in FIG. 55(B) is executed. However, the production mode of the round substitute production is not limited to that shown in FIG. 55(B), and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the over-prized ball prevention function is activated. Also, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, instead of the jackpot opening effect shown in FIG. good. Also, when the number of difference balls becomes 80000 or more, instead of the big winning ending production shown in FIG. good.

In the second modification described above, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, instead of the time saving mode production shown in FIG. 18 (B-5), the time saving mode alternative production (alternative production) shown in FIG. was done. However, the production mode of the time saving mode alternative production is not limited to that shown in FIG. Further, in the sixth modification described above, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, instead of the probability variable mode production shown in FIG. 18 (B-4), the probability variable mode alternative production (alternative production) shown in FIG. It has been executed. However, the effect mode of the variable probability mode alternative effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 63(C), and can be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the over-prized ball prevention function operates.

In the above-described third modification, as shown in FIG. 57, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and the number of variations of the special symbols after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state is executed 30 times (prescribed number of times). When it is done (when a predetermined condition is established), the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. However, the specified number of times described above is not limited to 30 times, and may be, for example, 1 time or 100 times, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, after the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the game is shifted to the normal game state, the over-prize prevention function may be activated under a condition irrelevant to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. For example, after shifting to the normal game state, it shifts to the customer waiting state, or when a certain predetermined time elapses after shifting to the normal game state, the over-prize prevention function may be activated.

In the third modification described above, as shown in FIG. 57, when the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the number of variations of the special symbol is executed 30 times (prescribed number of times) after shifting to the normal game state, Along with the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the exclusive performance (special performance) after the normal transition shown in FIG. 58 is terminated. Here, the specified number of times (30) mentioned above means the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, but it may be only the number of variations of the first special symbol. , may mean only the number of variations of the second special symbol. Also, the effect mode of the special effect is not limited to the effect mode of the dedicated effect after the normal shift shown in FIG. It can be changed as appropriate as long as it is the production mode of the production that is available.

In the above-described form, the fifth modification, the 12th modification, the 17th modification, the 18th modification, the 19th modification, the 25th modification, the 27th modification, the 28th modification, and the 29th modification, the game When the control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an illegal magnetism (a specific abnormality) as a result of the establishment of a predetermined stop condition, it controls the game to be unexecutable. However, the specific abnormality is not limited to illegal magnetism, and may be illegal radio waves, illegal vibrations, clogged balls, control errors (bugs), etc., and can be changed as appropriate.

In the eighth modified example described above, when the difference ball number becomes 78500 (a specific number) or more, the run-up effect is executed after the next big hit arrival notice effect is executed. However, when the difference ball number becomes 78500 (specific number) or more, only the run-up effect may be executed without executing the next big hit arrival notice effect. Also, the production mode of the run-up production is not limited to the production modes shown in FIGS. If known, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, the process from 78500 (specific number) to 80000 (standard number) in the process of increasing the number of difference balls from 78500 (specific number) to 80000 (reference number) by meter effect in which the meter accumulates as the number of difference balls increases, or by accumulation effect in which predetermined objects are stored as the number of difference balls increases may be shown.

In the eighth modified example described above, when the difference ball number is 78500 (specific number) or more, the reference number reaching indication effect (next jackpot arrival announcement effect and run-up effect) is executed until the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more. , and when the number of difference balls reached 80000 or more, the blessing effect shown in FIG. 68(C) was executed. However, when the number of difference balls reaches a specific number or more, an effect that can be recognized as a series is asynchronously executed (for example, a series of video). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the process from when the number of difference balls reaches a certain number or more until the game is stopped is a series of flows, making the process of becoming unable to play more natural. is.

In the eighth modified example described above, after the number of difference balls reaches 78500 (specific number) or more, the main character is happy to win the battle as shown in FIG. A background image g113 for mini SP reach indicating that there is a target is displayed. However, the effect mode of the reduction-hit suggestion effect is not limited to the one described above (background image for mini SP reach g113), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "V" may be displayed in the lower right display area 51b. In addition, when "V" is displayed in the lower right display area 51b, it is preferable that it is a so-called 1 type 2 type game machine or a 2 type game machine.

In the eighth modification described above, there are three types of jackpots: jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Y, and jackpot pattern Z (see FIG. 12(B)). The specific number used as the start opportunity was a value obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (1500) set to be awarded in the jackpot game Z from the reference number (80000). However, the specific number that triggers the start of the advance notice effect (standard number reaching notice effect) is set to be granted in the jackpot game X when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 from the reference number (80000). The value (79250) obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls (750), or the number of prize balls (600) set to be granted in the jackpot game Y when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery is subtracted. A value (79400) may be used. Also, the types of jackpots are not limited to three types (see FIG. 12B) as in the eighth modification, or four types (see FIG. 69) as in the ninth and tenth modifications. , 1 type, 2 types, 5 types or more, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the eleventh modification and the thirteenth modification described above, presence or absence of execution of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, difference ball number that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, and presence or absence of execution of the residual ball number notification effect , whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is executed at the opening of the jackpot game, whether or not the residual ball number notification effect is executed at the round game of the jackpot game, and whether the residual ball number notification effect is executed at the ending of the jackpot game Whether to execute or not, whether to execute the residual ball number notification effect each time the variable effect is executed, or not to execute the residual ball number notification effect each time the variable effect is executed five times , It was possible to set whether or not to prevent the residual ball number notification effect from being executed during the variable effect. However, the effects that can be set are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above mode, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 (reference number) or more, a game impossibility notice effect (display of a game stop notice image shown in FIG. 28(B)) for notifying that the game becomes impracticable is executed. Therefore, it may be possible to set whether or not to execute this game-impossible notice effect. Alternatively, set the residual ball number notification effect to be executed regardless of the difference ball number, or set the residual ball number notification effect (advance notice effect) to be executed during the customer waiting effect. Also good. Alternatively, it may be possible to arbitrarily set how many fluctuations the residual number-of-balls notification effect is executed.

In the eleventh modification and the thirteenth modification described above, by operating the normal button 40 and the select button (operating means), the performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and the performance related to the residual number of balls notification performance items could be set. However, the operation means for setting the effect item is not limited to the normal button 40 and the select button (operation means), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is not related to the performance at all, and a dedicated operation means is provided for setting performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. can be

In the eleventh modified example described above, it was possible to set the performance items related to the over-balls abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance on the condition that the RAM clear was executed. However, just by turning on the power, it may be possible to set the performance items related to the over-prize abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance. Alternatively, on the condition that the gaming machine frame 2 is opened, it may be possible to set the performance items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance.

In the thirteenth modified example described above, it was possible to set the performance items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance when the customer was waiting. However, even during execution of the variable performance, it may be possible to set the performance items related to the extra ball abnormal notice performance and the performance items related to the residual number of balls notification performance.

In the twelfth modification described above, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the balance display unit 61 (display means) displays a number corresponding to the number of game balls that could be rented (Fig. 78(A) ) and a state in which "E" indicating that the ball lending is impracticable (see FIG. 78(B)) are alternately repeated every 3 seconds. However, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the balance display section 61 may simply display "E" indicating that the ball lending is unexecutable. It should be noted that the display mode indicating that ball lending is impracticable is not limited to "E" and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the balance display unit 61 may display "888" (full lighting mode) to indicate that ball lending is not possible. The display means for indicating that the ball rental is executable and that the ball rental is not executable is not limited to the balance display section 61, but may be the image display device 50 or a sub-liquid crystal display. It may be a device or the like.

In the twelfth modification described above, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, a ball rental impossibility notification effect (see FIGS. 79A and 79B) indicating that ball rental is not executable is executed. bottom. However, the effect mode of the ball rental impossibility notification effect is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as an effect mode of notifying that the ball cannot be rented, the speaker 52 may output a voice saying that the ball cannot be rented, or the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 may emit light in a specific light emission mode.

In the twelfth modified example described above, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the card return suggesting effect (see FIGS. 79A and 79B) prompting the player to take out the card is executed. However, the presentation mode of the card return suggestion presentation is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as an effect mode for suggesting card return, the speaker 52 outputs a voice saying "Press the return button and take out the card", or the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light in a specific light emission mode. Also good.

In the above-described fourteenth modified example, it is possible to execute a current ball number suggesting effect (specified count number effect) that suggests the current ball difference number to the player (see FIG. 83(C)), and the actual ball difference It was possible to execute the current difference ball number adjustment effect for correctly showing the number (see FIG. 84 (B)). On the other hand, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 157, a residual ball number suggestion effect (specific count number At the same time, a residual ball number adjustment effect may be executed to correctly indicate the value obtained by subtracting the actual difference ball number from 80000 (reference number).

For example, as shown in FIG. 157(A), in the high probability/high base state, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed, and the residual ball number suggestion effect is executed on the lower side of the display screen 50a. The residual ball number suggesting effect is an effect suggesting whether the game will be controlled to be unexecutable (excessive ball prevention function will be activated) when the number of remaining balls increases, for example, in FIG. 157(A). , and an image ZU indicating the number of residual balls indicating "abnormal over-prize due to an increase of 129 remaining balls" is displayed. The number shown in the residual ball number suggestion image ZU is subtracted each time the actual difference ball number increases (a prize ball is awarded). However, the number indicated by the residual ball number suggestion image ZU is maintained without being increased even if the actual difference ball number is subtracted (even if the game ball is shot). Therefore, like the current ball number adjustment effect of the 14th modification, by executing the residual ball number adjustment effect, it is possible to correctly indicate the remaining difference ball number until the over-prize prevention function is activated. It's becoming

Concretely, it is assumed that the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the main character is happy to win the battle, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. At this time, as the residual ball number suggestion effect, a residual ball number suggestion image ZU showing "abnormal number of extra prizes with an increase of 110 remaining balls" is displayed.

Subsequently, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a residual ball number adjustment effect is executed. Specifically, a difference ball number adjustment image ST is displayed, and a residual ball number indication image ZU indicating "an over-prize error with an increase of 788 remaining balls" is displayed. In this way, due to the residual ball number adjustment effect, the number indicated by the residual ball number suggestion image ZU is switched from "110" to "788", and the number of game balls fired by the player in the high probability/high base state is increased. subtracted. As a result, when the jackpot game is started, it is possible for the player to correctly grasp the number of difference balls remaining until the over-prized ball prevention function is activated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a bonus acquisition image BK indicating "BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 50a as an opening effect.

In the fourteenth modification described above, when the jackpot game is started or when the jackpot game ends, the current difference ball number adjustment effect is executed (see FIG. 83 (B), FIG. 84 (B) reference). However, the timing at which the current ball number adjustment effect is executed is not limited to the timing described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, during the execution of the opening of the big win game, when the opening ends, during the round of the big win game or when the ending of the big win game starts, the current difference ball number adjustment performance may be executed. In addition, the current difference ball number adjustment effect may be executed at the timing of shifting to the customer waiting state or during the execution of the variable effect. Also, when a certain period of time has passed, or when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches a certain number, the current ball number adjustment performance may be executed. It should be noted that the execution timing of the above-described residual ball number adjustment effect can be changed as appropriate, and may be executed at the timing exemplified above.

In the fourteenth modification described above, the current ball number suggesting effect is continued to be executed in any game state after it is started, as long as the actual ball number does not become less than 78500 (lower limit number of effects). . However, the current ball number suggesting effect may be executed only in the jackpot game state (advantageous game state). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about the value of the difference in the number of balls when the actual number of balls in the difference is greatly reduced as in the case of the normal game state. . Alternatively, the effect of suggesting the current number of balls is executed only in the jackpot game state and the high-probability-high base state (advantageous game state), or executed only in the jackpot game state and the high-probability-low base state (advantageous game state). You can let it be. Alternatively, it may be executed only in the jackpot game state and the small hit rush state (advantageous game state), or may be executed only in the jackpot game state and the time saving state (advantageous game state). It should be noted that the game state to be executed can be appropriately changed in the above-described residual ball number indication effect, and the game state may be executed in the game state exemplified above.

In the fourteenth modification described above, the current ball number suggestion effect is started when the actual ball number becomes 78500 or more. However, the value of the actual ball number difference that triggers the start of the current ball number suggestion effect is not limited to 78500, and can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, for example, it may be started when the actual number of balls becomes 75000 or more. However, the current ball number suggesting effect should be started when the number is at least half of the reference number of 80000 (40000 or more in this case). In this way, when the actual number of balls is not sufficiently close to the reference number (80000), the player does not become overly conscious of the value of the number of different balls by not starting the effect of suggesting the number of current balls. It is possible to It should be noted that, even in the above-described residual ball number suggestion effect, the value of the actual ball number difference that serves as a start trigger can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourteenth modification described above, in the current ball number suggestion effect, when the actual ball number increases, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT is increased, and when the actual ball number decreases, the current ball number suggestion The numbers shown in image ZT were not changed. However, in the current ball number suggestion effect, when the actual ball number increases, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT may or may not increase. Further, in the current ball number suggestion effect, when the actual ball number decreases, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT may or may not decrease. It should be noted that, in the above-described residual ball number suggestion effect as well, when the actual ball number increases, the number indicated by the residual ball number suggestion image ZU may or may not decrease. Further, in the residual ball number suggestion effect, when the actual ball number decreases, the number indicated by the current ball number suggestion image ZT may or may not increase.

In the above-described fourteenth modified example, the display of the current number of balls suggesting image ZT indicates the number of the number of difference balls. You may make it show the figure which concerns on a number. Further, in the modified example, the display of the residual ball number indication image ZU shows the number related to the number of difference balls. You may make it show a number. As in the eleventh modified example, the game hall employee may set whether or not to execute the current ball number suggesting effect or the residual ball number suggesting effect.

In the fourteenth modification described above, the current ball number adjustment effect is executed after the current ball number suggestion effect is executed, but the current ball number adjustment effect may not be executed. In addition, although the residual ball number adjustment effect is executed after the residual ball number suggestion effect is executed, the residual ball number adjustment effect may not be executed. In short, although the current ball number suggesting effect or the residual ball number suggesting effect (specified count number effect) showing the number related to the difference ball number is executed, the current ball number suggesting effect or the residual ball number suggesting effect is executed. The current ball number adjustment effect or the residual ball number adjustment effect for correcting the existing ball number difference value may not be executed.

In the fifteenth modified example described above, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, by operating the select button and the normal button 40 (predetermined operation means), the input reflection image NP is displayed as a special operation effect (special operation effect is executed) (see FIG. 87(D)). However, the special operation effect executed after the over-prize preventing function is activated is not limited to the display of the input reflected image NP, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as in the modification shown in FIG. 158, a special operation effect may be executed.

That is, it is assumed that the difference ball number is 80000 or more, and the game stop notice effect (display of the game stop notice image YT) is executed at the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 158(A). After that, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the over-prize prevention function is activated, and the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, as shown in FIG. 158(B), a character image OG showing a sad character is displayed as a character appearance effect. Also, at this time, an over-price abnormality notification image KF showing characters of "over-price abnormality" is displayed as an over-price abnormality notification effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 158(B), when the character image OG is being displayed, an operation prompting effect for prompting the user to press the normal button 40 is executed in the lower right portion of the display screen 50a. Specifically, in the operation promotion presentation, a press promotion image BS showing the shape of the normal button 40 and the characters "Press!" is displayed. In this way, when the player presses the normal button 40 while the pressing promotion image BS is being displayed, as shown in FIG. That is, the achievement image OF showing the characters "Congratulations on achieving 80,000 shots" and the happy character is displayed. In this way, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the player presses the normal button 40 to execute the achievement performance. As a result, even after the game becomes unexecutable, it is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the production.

In the fifteenth modified example described above, the special operation effect executed after the over-prize prevention function is activated is to display the input reflection image NP on the display screen 50a. However, the effect mode of the special operation effect is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the player presses the normal button 40 after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the sound "Congratulations on achieving 80,000 shots" is repeatedly output from the speaker 52 as a special operation effect, or the game can be moved on the board. The body 55k and the underboard movable body 56k (see FIG. 5) may move from the initial position shown in FIG. 5A to the operating position shown in FIG. 5B. Alternatively, as a special operation effect, the frame movable body (for example, the frame movable device 58) provided in the game machine frame 2 is moved from the initial position to the operating position, or the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 emit special light. You may make it light-emit in a form. In this way, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the above-described special operation effects are continued to be executed, so that it is possible to appeal to other players that the over-prize prevention function has been activated. be. Here, the predetermined operation means that triggers the execution of the special operation effect is not limited to the normal button 40 or the select button, but can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the special button 41 (see FIG. 1). It should be noted that after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the above-described effect may continue to be executed even if the player does not operate the predetermined operation means.

In the fifteenth modified example described above, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. An achievement image OF (achievement image) was displayed. However, the display mode of the achievement image is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as the display mode of the achievement image, a special rare character, a special rare item, and a special rare line that are not displayed before the over-prize preventing function is activated may be displayed.

In the fifteenth modified example described above, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the character input effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87(C). However, the execution timing of the character input effect may be before the over-prize preventing function is activated, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the character input effect may be executed during the ending of the jackpot game that triggered the actuation of the over-prize preventing function. Alternatively, the character input effect may be executed during execution of the customer waiting effect or during the variable effect.

In the fifteenth modified example described above, after the power is turned on after the over-prizing prevention function is activated, the input reflection image NP is displayed as a special operation effect during execution of the customer waiting effect (FIG. 88). (B)). However, the timing at which the input reflection image NP is displayed after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated is not limited to the execution of the customer waiting effect, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be during the ending of . As in the eleventh modified example, the employee of the game hall determines whether or not the special operation effect (the display of the input reflection image NP shown in FIG. 87(D)) is executed immediately after the over-prized ball prevention function is activated. It is possible to set the presence or absence of whether or not the special operation effect (display of the input reflection image NP shown in FIG. 88 (B)) is executed after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated. You can do it.

In the above-described 16th modification, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, a special SP reach (see FIG. 89 (B)) and a special A cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2)), a special opening effect (see FIGS. 91 (B-2) and (C-2)), and a special guest waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2). ) and there was. However, the special effects are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate.

For example, the special effects include a special reach development effect when developing into a reach effect, and a special all-rotation reach effect in which the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lined up in a row and displayed at the same speed. can be In addition, the special effects include a special step-up notice effect in which the degree of expectation for winning increases in stages (at each step), a special story notice effect in which a special story develops as a video, and an icon TA. A special hold change notice effect that changes to a special mode, a special movable body drive notice that the board movable body (board top movable body 55k, board bottom movable body 56k), frame movable body (for example, frame movable device 58), etc. move in a special mode Effect, a special vibrator notice effect in which the normal button 40 vibrates in a special mode, a special change start time notice effect executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the like may be used. The special effect may be a special round effect executed during the round game of the jackpot game, or a special ending effect executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Further, the special effect may be a special symbol waiting effect in which the stop-displayed effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a special display mode as a special customer waiting effect.

In the 16th modification described above, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function has been activated, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores actuation information indicating that the over-prize preventing function has been activated in the effect RAM 124. In the case of being, it was made possible to execute a special effect (effect after the abnormal operation of the prize ball). However, the performance control microcomputer 121 cancels the control that makes the game unexecutable after the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the performance RAM 124 stores actuation information indicating that the over-prizing prevention function has been activated. On this condition, a special effect (effect after abnormal actuation of prize balls) may be made executable.

In the 16th modified example described above, the special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B)) executed as the special reach effect is an effect indicating that winning the jackpot is confirmed. However, the special ready-to-win performance may be a performance suggesting that the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed and the expectation of winning the jackpot is somewhat high (for example, the expectation of winning is 50%). .

In the sixteenth modification described above, the special cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2)) executed as the special notice effect is an effect indicating that winning the jackpot is confirmed. However, the special notice effect may be a effect suggesting that the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed and the expectation of winning the jackpot is somewhat high (for example, the expectation of winning is 50%). . Incidentally, the special notice effect may simply be a notice effect suggesting that the over-prized balls prevention function has been activated before.

In the 16th modification described above, the special opening effect (see FIGS. 91 (B-2) and (C-2)) executed as the special winning effect wins the V long jackpot (jackpot pattern X, jackpot pattern Z1). That is, the effect indicates that the transition to the high-probability state is substantially confirmed as long as the game is played correctly. However, the special hit effect may be an effect indicating that a privilege other than the transition to the high probability state (for example, execution of 10 rounds of the jackpot game) is given. Incidentally, the special hit effect does not indicate that a privilege is given, and may be an effect that simply suggests that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated before.

In the sixteenth modification described above, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, the operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function is activated is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124 . On the other hand, each time the over-prize prevention function is activated, operation frequency information (operation information) indicating the number of times the over-prize prevention function is activated is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124.例文帳に追加Also good. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores, in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124, actuation number information indicating that the number of times the over-prize prevention function has been activated is one. To enable execution of a first special performance which is not executed before a prize ball prevention function is activated. Then, if the performance control microcomputer 121 stores, in the non-erase storage area of the performance RAM 124, actuation number information indicating that the number of times the over-prize prevention function has been operated is two times, the first special performance Instead, a second special effect that is not executed before the over-prize preventing function is activated is made executable. Furthermore, if the performance control microcomputer 121 stores, in the non-erase storage area of the performance RAM 124, actuation number information indicating that the number of times the over-prize prevention function has been operated is three times, the first special performance And, instead of the second special performance, the third special performance that is not executed before the function for preventing over-prized balls is activated can be executed. In this way, a special effect (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) is executed according to the number of times the over-prize preventing function has been activated, so that the player can receive an over-prize effect by the type of special effect. It is possible to provide a novel game amusement that allows the player to grasp the number of times the prize ball prevention function has been activated. It should be noted that, as in the eleventh modified example, after the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the employee of the game hall has a special effect (special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B)) and a special cut-in notice effect (FIG. 90). (B-2)), a special opening effect (see FIGS. 91 (B-2) and (C-2)), and a special guest waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2)) are executed or not. You may enable it to set the presence or absence of this.

In addition, when the number of times of operation information (operation information) indicating the number of times the over-prize prevention function is operated is stored in the non-erasable storage area of the performance RAM 124 every time the over-prize prevention function is operated, the following will be performed. You can also run it like That is, there are a first effect mode, a second effect mode, a third effect mode, and a fourth effect mode as the effect modes of a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect, advance notice effect, jackpot effect, etc.). do. For example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the over-prize ball prevention function has not been activated, the distribution rate of the first effect mode is 25%, and the distribution rate of the second effect mode is 25%. is 25%, the distribution rate of the third presentation mode is 25%, and the distribution rate of the fourth presentation mode is 25%. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124 the operation number information indicating that the number of times the over-prize prevention function has been operated is one, the first effect mode. The distribution rate is 10%, the distribution rate of the second presentation mode is 20%, the distribution rate of the third presentation mode is 30%, and the distribution rate of the fourth presentation mode is 40%. As shown, a predetermined effect is executed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores in the non-erasable storage area of the effect RAM 124 the operation number information indicating that the over-prize preventing function has been activated twice, the first effect mode. The distribution rate is 40%, the distribution rate of the second presentation mode is 30%, the distribution rate of the third presentation mode is 20%, and the distribution rate of the fourth presentation mode is 10%. As shown, a predetermined effect is executed. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, if it is felt that the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode appear to the same degree, it means that the over-prize prevention function has been activated. I would assume no. Further, when the predetermined effect is executed, if it is felt that the first effect mode<second effect mode<third effect mode<fourth effect mode appears frequently, the over-prize prevention function is activated only once. It will be assumed that there is Further, when the predetermined performance is executed, if it is felt that the fourth performance mode < the third performance mode < the second performance mode < the first performance mode appears frequently, the over-prize preventing function has been activated only twice. It will be assumed that there is According to the modified example described above, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game interest in which the player can guess the number of times the over-prize preventing function has been activated.

In the above-described seventeenth modification, after the game is disabled by the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function, if the game is disabled after the power is turned on, the image display device 50 ( On the display screen 50a of the notification means), a red background image RE and an over-the-balls abnormality maintaining image KRX are displayed, and a speaker 52 (notification means) says, "The over-the-balls abnormality has not been canceled. Please clear the RAM." A voice was output, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 (informing means) all blinked in red. However, the informing means indicating that the control that disables the execution of the game is continuing after the power is turned on is the image display device 50, the speaker 52 (sound output means), the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 (light emitting means). It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the upper decorative body 31 of the game machine frame 2 is provided with a movable frame movable body (informing means). The frame movable body can move from the initial position to an operating position where it can move above the upper edge of the game machine frame 2 . In this case, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prize preventing function, when the control that disables the game is continued after the power is turned on, the frame movable body moves from the initial position to the operating position. The state in which the frame movable body is in the operating position may be maintained by moving. In this way, before the start of business hours, an employee of the game machine sees the frame movable body moving above the upper edge of the game machine frame 2, thereby making the game unexecutable. It is possible to easily grasp that the control has not been released. Also, for example, the normal button 40 (informing means) is configured to vibrate in a special mode. In this case, the normal button 40 continues to vibrate in a special mode when the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function and the control to disable the game is continued after the power is turned on. You can do it. In this way, before the business hours start, the employee of the game parlor can see that the normal button 40 continues to vibrate in a special manner, thereby confirming that the control that made the game unexecutable has not been released. can be easily grasped.

In the above-described seventeenth modification, after the game is disabled due to the detection of illegal magnetism (determined that there is a specific abnormality), the control that disables the game is continued after the power is turned on. , the blue background image BL and the magnetic anomaly maintenance image KR1 are displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (notification means), and the speaker 52 (notification means) reads, "Magnetic detection abnormality has not been canceled. Please clear the RAM." was output, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 (informing means) all blinked in blue. However, the informing means indicating that the control that disables the execution of the game is continuing after the power is turned on is the image display device 50, the speaker 52 (sound output means), the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 (light emitting means). It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the upper decorative body 31 of the game machine frame 2 is provided with a movable frame movable body (informing means). The frame movable body can move from the initial position to an operating position where it can move above the upper edge of the game machine frame 2 . In this case, after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable due to the determination that there is a specific abnormality (for example, the detection of illegal magnetism), if the control that makes the game unexecutable continues after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the movable frame body may be moved from the initial position to the operating position, and the state in which the movable frame body is at the operating position may be maintained. In this way, before the start of business hours, an employee of the game machine sees the frame movable body moving above the upper edge of the game machine frame 2, thereby making the game unexecutable. It is possible to easily grasp that the control has not been released. Also, for example, the normal button 40 (informing means) is configured to vibrate in a special manner. In this case, after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable due to the determination that there is a specific abnormality (for example, the detection of illegal magnetism), if the control that makes the game unexecutable continues after the power is turned on. , the normal button 40 may continue to vibrate in a special mode. In this way, before the business hours start, the employee of the game parlor can see that the normal button 40 continues to vibrate in a special mode, so that the control that makes the game unexecutable has not been released. can be easily grasped.

In the above-described 17th modification, as a special abnormal mode indicating that the control that made the game unexecutable is continued, the over-prize abnormality maintenance image KRX is displayed, and "the over-prize abnormality is not canceled. Please clear the RAM", the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 blink in red, the magnetic abnormality maintenance image KR1 is displayed, and the voice "The magnetic detection abnormality has not been cleared. Please clear the RAM". There was flashing of blue by output, frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 . However, the special abnormal mode is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as a special abnormal mode, the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable device 56 may continue to move between the initial position shown in FIG. 5(A) and the operating position shown in FIG. 5(B). good.

In the eighteenth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 95, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the ball bite prevention mode is set on the condition that the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on (game moved the movable member). However, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on, the ball biting prevention mode may be set. That is, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game movable member may be moved only by turning ON the power switch 193 without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 .

In the eighteenth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 95, the condition for ending the ball biting prevention mode is that the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. However, the termination condition of the ball biting prevention mode is not limited to pressing the RAM clear switch 191, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the termination condition of the ball jamming prevention mode may be the operation of operation means other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, the setting key cylinder 180 and the special reset switch 181). In addition, the condition for ending the ball bite prevention mode is that a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the ball bite prevention mode was started, or that the game movable members (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing The member 12k, the sorting member 16k) performs opening and closing operations for the ball-entering portion (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, second starting hole 12, specific area 16) a specified number of times (for example, 5 times). It is good to be. The ball biting prevention mode is executed after the power is turned on until the big hit determination process (S1402, S1408) is started for the first time (after the power is turned on until the variable display of the special symbols is started for the first time). Good luck.

In the eighteenth modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 95, the ball engagement prevention mode is set after the RAM is cleared. However, the ball biting prevention mode may be set before the RAM clear is started or during the execution of the RAM clear (the game movable member may be moved).

In the nineteenth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 99, the ball bite prevention mode is set as soon as the game is controlled to be unexecutable. However, when a certain prescribed time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the ball bite prevention mode may be set. In this case, it is possible to move the game movable member after securing the time until all the game balls are completely discharged from the game area 6 by the specified time.

In the nineteenth modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 99, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the anti-ball bite prevention mode is automatically set without requiring the operation of the staff of the game arcade. However, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, an employee of the game hall operates the operation means (for example, the RAM clear switch 191, the setting key cylinder 180, the special reset switch 181, etc.) or opens the game machine frame 2. On this condition, the ball engagement prevention mode may be set. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the game movable member is moving by setting the ball biting prevention mode as much as possible.

In the nineteenth modification described above, as shown in FIG. 95, the condition for ending the ball biting prevention mode is that a specified time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the ball biting prevention mode was started. However, the conditions for ending the ball biting prevention mode are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the termination condition of the ball biting prevention mode may be the operation of the operation means (for example, the RAM clear switch 191, the setting key cylinder 180, the special reset switch 181, etc.) by an employee of the game arcade. In addition, the end condition of the ball bite prevention mode is that the game movable member (normal AT opening and closing member 14k, VAT opening and closing member 15k, electric chew opening and closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) enters the ball portion (first big winning port 14, second The opening/closing operation for the big winning opening 15, the second starting opening 12, and the specific area 16) may be performed a specified number of times (for example, five times).

In the 19th modification described above, the ball biting prevention mode is always set when the game is controlled to be unexecutable. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may set the ball bite prevention mode only when it determines that the ball bite occurs after the game is disabled. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine whether or not the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls ejected from the game area 6 match. After the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable, when the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 match, the game control microcomputer 101 It is determined that the ball does not occur, and the ball biting prevention mode is not set. On the other hand, after the game control microcomputer 101 has controlled the game to be unexecutable, if the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 do not match, the game control microcomputer 101 is occurring, and the ball biting prevention mode is set. In this way, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, only in a situation where there is a high possibility that the ball is stuck, the ball sticking prevention mode is set. It is possible to hide it. As a method of counting the number of game balls entering the game area 6, for example, a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B, and a game ball can be detected by the return ball prevention portion. Assume that a sensor is provided. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 may count the number of game balls entering the game area 6 based on the detection by the sensor. As a method of counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6, for example, the game control microcomputer counts the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 based on the detection of the discharge port sensor. Good luck.

Here, as described above, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 do not match, the ball bite prevention mode is set. In this case, the conditions for ending the ball biting prevention mode may be as follows. That is, the condition for ending the ball biting prevention mode may be determined by the game control microcomputer 101 determining that the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 match. Alternatively, the end condition of the ball biting prevention mode is the ball entering portion (first big prize opening 14, first The opening and closing operations for the second prize winning opening 15, the second start opening 12, and the specific area 16) may be performed a specified number of times (for example, five times). In this case, the number of game balls entering the game area 6 and the number of game balls ejected from the game area 6 do not match even if the opening and closing operation of the ball entry portion of the game movable member is performed a specified number of times. In this case, it is preferable that the effect control microcomputer 121 executes an effect indicating that the ball biting has not been resolved.

In the eighteenth and nineteenth modified examples described above, in the ball jamming prevention mode, the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the opening/closing operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the opening/closing operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k, and the distribution member 16k The opening and closing operations were performed in parallel (simultaneously). However, the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k, the opening/closing operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k, the opening/closing operation of the electric tune opening/closing member 12k, and the opening/closing operation of the distribution member 16k may be executed at different timings. For example, when the ball engagement prevention mode is set, first, the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is started, and after the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is completed, the opening/closing operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k is started, After the opening and closing operation of the VAT opening and closing member 15k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the electric tube opening and closing member 12k is started, and after the opening and closing operation of the electric tube opening and closing member 12k is completed, the opening and closing operation of the distribution member 16k is started and distributed. After the opening/closing operation of the member 16k is completed, the opening/closing operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k may be started, and the opening/closing operation described above may be repeated thereafter.

In the eighteenth and nineteenth modified examples described above, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, it is configured to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game (second type jackpot game) may be executed. In this case, the detection by the specific area sensor 16a is disabled when the ball biting prevention mode is set. Therefore, when the ball biting prevention mode is set, the distribution member 16k opens and closes the specific area 16, so that even if the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the big win game is not executed. Is possible.

In the twentieth and twenty-first modifications described above, the FRAM 125 is the power failure holding storage means capable of holding the stored information (threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1) even in the power failure state. However, the power interruption holding storage means is not limited to the FRAM 125, and may be an EEPROM, for example, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, as shown in FIG. 102, the FRAM 125 was provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 121, but the FRAM 125 (electrical disconnection holding storage means) is incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 121 (specific control means). It's okay to be there.

In the above-described 20th and 21st modifications, as the over prize ball abnormal notice effect (preliminary notice effect) (see FIG. 74 (B)), for example, on the display screen 50a, "With an increase of 20,000 remaining balls, over prize balls A prize ball abnormality notice image ZI indicating "abnormality" is displayed. However, the effect mode of the over-prized ball abnormal notice effect (advance notice effect) can be changed as appropriate. For example, the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect is an effect in which an abnormal notice sound is output from the speaker 52 (for example, a sound saying "an over-prize ball is abnormal with an increase of 20000 shots remaining"), or the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are abnormal notice. Alternatively, the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 may be operated in an anomaly warning operation mode, such as an effect of emitting light in a light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode in which full lighting and complete extinguishing are repeated). It should be noted that even in the over-the-ball abnormal notice effect (advance notice effect) described in the 22nd modification, the effect mode can be changed as appropriate, and as described above, the abnormal notice sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "5000 remaining shots , Over-the-ball abnormal" sound), and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light in an abnormality notice light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that repeats all lighting and all extinction), and a movable device. 55, 56, and 58 may operate in an abnormality warning operation mode.

In the twentieth and twenty-first modifications described above, the specific storage information that can be stored in the FRAM 125 is the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (see FIG. 103). However, the specific storage information that can be stored in the FRAM 127 is not limited to the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the FRAM 125 stores setting information (threshold setting information pattern) for setting the number of difference balls to be 79000 or more, which triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect, and the difference ball value that triggers the start of the over-price abnormal notice effect. Setting information (threshold setting information pattern) for increasing the number to 79,500 or more may be stored.

In the above-described 20th and 21st modifications, based on the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (specific storage information) stored in the FRAM 125, the over-price abnormal notice effect (specific effect) is executed. made it However, the specific effect executed based on the specific storage information stored in the FRAM 125 is not limited to the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect (advance notice effect), but the specific game ball number related to the number of game balls. If it is an effect executed based on, it can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the specific effect is the total number of prize balls effect indicating that the total number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls, the number of specific game balls) has reached, for example, 10000 (specific value) or more, the base in the normal game state (normal game state Base effect indicating that the ratio of the total number of prize balls in the normal game state to the number of shot balls in the state has reached, for example, 40 (specific value), and the number of shot balls (specific number of game balls) is, for example, 100,000 (specific value) It may also be a presentation of the number of shot balls indicating that the number of shots has been reached. In addition, the number of specific game balls related to the number of game balls was the number of difference balls in the above-described 20th and 21st modifications. It may be a number and can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the specific number of game balls is, for example, the total number of prize balls in a certain game state (jackpot game state), the total number of prize balls in a continuous game state (RUSH state), or the total number of prize balls in a certain game state (jackpot game state). It may be the number of shot balls, the number of shot balls in a continuous state (RUSH state), or the like.

In the twentieth modification described above, when the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (stored information) stored in the FRAM 125 (power failure holding storage means) are rewritten, the image display device 50 (rewrite notification means) It was possible to display the confirmation code KC indicating that the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 were rewritten on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 105(A)). However, it may be possible to indicate that the stored information stored in the power failure holding storage means has been rewritten by means of a display mode (character display of rewrite success) other than the confirmation code KC. Further, the rewrite notification means for indicating that the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means has been rewritten is not limited to the image display device 50, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the memory information stored in the power interruption holding storage means is changed depending on the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54, the sound output from the speaker 52, and the operation mode of the movable bodies such as the movable devices 55, 56, and 58. You may make it show that it was rewritten.

In the twentieth modification described above, the effect control microcomputer 121, in the shipping process at the time of inspection, based on receiving an inspection command (specific command) from the inspection board 400 outside the pachinko game machine PY1, FRAM125 ( It was possible to rewrite the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (stored information) stored in the power failure holding storage means (see FIG. 104). However, the test board 400 is connected to the main control board 100, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the test command from the test board 400 via the main control board 100. The stored information stored in the means may be rewritten. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a specific command from outside the pachinko game machine PY1 (for example, a dedicated external unit or a hall computer arranged on the left side of the pachinko game machine PY1) other than the shipping process at the time of inspection. , the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means may be rewritten.

In the 20th modification and the 21st modification described above, the effect control board 120 is provided with the FRAM 125 (electrical interruption holding storage means), and the effect control microcomputer 121 (specific control means) is stored in the FRAM 125. It was possible to rewrite the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (stored information). However, a control board other than the performance control board 120 is provided with power interruption holding storage means, and the specific control means provided in the control board can rewrite the storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage means. can be For example, the main control board 100 may be provided with power interruption holding storage means, and the game control microcomputer 101 may be able to rewrite the memory information stored in the power interruption holding storage means. Specifically, at the time of inspection (at the time of application), the power failure holding storage means provided on the main control board 100 indicates that the number of difference balls that triggers control to disable the game is 80000 or more. It is assumed that the information (predetermined storage information) is stored. In this case, in the shipping process at the time of inspection, the game control microcomputer 101 receives the inspection command from the inspection board outside the pachinko game machine PY1, and updates the information stored in the power interruption holding storage means. Alternatively, it may be rewritten to information (specific storage information) indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the game to be disabled is, for example, 90000 or more. It should be noted that in the modified example described above, the process of making the game unexecutable corresponds to the "specific control process".

Further, for example, the payout control board 170 may be provided with power interruption holding storage means, and the payout control microcomputer 171 may be able to rewrite the storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage means. Specifically, at the time of inspection (at the time of application), the electric interruption holding storage means provided on the payout control board 170 receives an award that serves as a trigger for outputting an outer end signal (a signal to be output to the external terminal board 160). It is assumed that information (predetermined storage information) indicating that the number of balls is 10 or more is stored. In this case, in the shipping process at the time of inspection, the payout control microcomputer 171 updates the information stored in the power interruption holding storage means on the basis of receiving an inspection command from the inspection board outside the pachinko game machine PY1. Alternatively, it may be rewritten to information (specific storage information) indicating that the number of prize balls that triggers the output of the external output signal is 15 or more. Note that in the modified example described above, the process of outputting the outer end signal corresponds to the "specific control process".

In the twenty-first modification described above, the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (stored information) stored in the FRAM 125 (electrical interruption holding storage means) are rewritten by performing a special operation on the select button (operation means). It was possible. However, the operating means for rewriting the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means is not limited to the select button, and can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, by depressing the normal button 40, depressing the RAM clear switch 191, and rotating the setting key cylinder 180, the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means can be rewritten. Also good. In the modified example described above, the signal indicating the depression of the normal button 40, the signal indicating the depression of the RAM clear switch 191, and the signal indicating the rotation of the setting key cylinder 180 correspond to the "specific information". .

In the twenty-first modification described above, the threshold setting information patterns A1 to F1 (stored information) stored in the FRAM 125 (power failure holding storage means) can be rewritten only during the initial setting after the power is turned on. rice field. However, it may be possible to rewrite the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means even during the execution of the variable performance or the execution of the customer waiting performance. That is, not only employees of the amusement arcade, but also players can change the stored information stored in the power interruption holding storage means based on the operation of the operation means (select button, normal button 40, etc.). It may be rewritable.

In the 22nd modification and the 23rd modification described above, the number of difference balls (the number of difference balls that triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function) is 20000 (first reference number), 40000, 60000, and 80000. (second reference number). However, the number of trigger balls (first reference number, second reference number) can be changed as appropriate. You can do it.

In the 22nd modification described above, the condition for resetting the number of difference balls is that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more and the RAM is cleared. However, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as in the above embodiment, the special reset switch 181 may be pushed down, or the setting key cylinder 180 may be rotated. Further, for example, the number of differential balls may be set so that the number of differential balls is not reset by setting every 20000 such as 20000, 40000, 60000, 80000, 100000, and so on.

In the 22nd modification and the 23rd modification described above, when the number of difference balls becomes equal to or greater than the number of operation trigger difference balls and the jackpot game state ends, the over-prize preventing function is activated. However, the timing at which the over-prized ball prevention function is activated can be changed as appropriate, and may be explained in each of the above embodiments and modified examples.

In the twenty-second modification described above, the condition for returning to a state in which the game can be executed after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable is that the RAM is cleared. Further, in the twenty-third modification described above, the condition for returning to the state in which the game can be executed after the game has been controlled to be unexecutable is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed down. However, the conditions for returning to a state in which the game can be played are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be only that the power is cut off and the power is turned on (the power is turned on again). 2 opening (opening of the front door 23, opening of the front frame 23m) may be used. The special reset switch 181 may be provided on a board other than the main control board 100, and may be provided on the payout control board 170, for example.

In the twenty-fourth modification described above, it is possible to set the number of balls to be triggered by activation among 20,000, 40,000, 60,000, 80,000, 100,000, and 120,000 in the setting mode. However, in the setting mode, it may be possible to set the number of balls to trigger the activation other than the above. can be Further, even when the setting mode is not set, the operation trigger difference number of balls may be set.

In the twenty-fourth modification described above, when the activation trigger difference ball number is set in the setting mode, the value of the activation trigger difference ball number is not notified. However, when the activation trigger difference ball number is set, the value of the activation trigger difference ball number may be notified using the image display device 50 or the like, for example.

In the twenty-fifth modification described above, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) receives a prize ball start command from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism. Based on this, a prize ball instruction command was transmitted to the effect control board 120 (see FIG. 127 (1)). And, even if the production control board 120 (the production control microcomputer 121) receives the prize ball instruction command, it does not execute the big winning opening winning production. On the other hand, when the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) receives the prize ball instruction command, as shown in FIG. And in this modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable by the operation of the excessive prize ball prevention function, the game control board 100 receives the prize ball start command from the payout control board 170, Based on the effect control board Even if a winning ball instruction command is transmitted to 120 (see FIG. 125 (1)), the effect control board 120 (the effect control microcomputer 121) may not execute the big winning opening winning effect.

In the twenty-fifth modification described above, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170 after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the detection of illegal magnetism. Based on this, the lower tray full instruction command was transmitted to the effect control board 120 (see FIG. 127 (2)). And even if the production|presentation control board 120 (microcomputer 121 for production|presentation control) received the lower plate full instruction|indication command, the lower plate full error production|presentation was not performed. On the other hand, when the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) receives the lower plate full command, the bottom plate full error effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 143(B). And in this modification, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function, the game control board 100 receives the lower tray full command from the payout control board 170, and the effect control board Even if the lower plate full instruction command is transmitted to 120 (see FIG. 125 (2)), the effect control board 120 (the effect control microcomputer 121) may not execute the lower plate full error effect.

In the twenty-fifth modification described above, the pachinko game machine PY1 is monitored to see if there is a predetermined abnormality. The predetermined abnormality (abnormality of the gaming machine) is that the lower tray 35 is full and that the storage tank provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 2 has no game balls. However, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to the above, and may be jammed game balls, opening of the gaming machine frame 2 (opening of the front door 23, opening of the front frame 23m), or the like. In this case, for example, a ball clogging detection sensor (abnormality detection means) capable of detecting clogging of game balls is provided. Then, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable, and then transmits a ball clogging abnormality command (abnormal command) to the effect control board 120 based on the detection by the ball clogging detection sensor. As a result, the effect control board 120 may notify the ball clogging (abnormality of the gaming machine) based on the reception of the ball clogging abnormality command after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

Further, for example, a frame opening sensor capable of detecting opening of the game machine frame 2 (opening of the front door 23, opening of the front frame 23m) is provided. Then, the game control board 100 controls the game to be unexecutable, and then transmits a frame opening abnormal command (abnormal command) to the effect control board 120 based on the detection by the frame opening sensor. Thereby, the effect control board 120 may notify the opening of the game machine frame 2 (abnormality of the game machine) based on the reception of the frame opening abnormality command after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

In the twenty-fifth modification described above, in the unlikely event that the operation of the over-prized ball prevention function and the detection of illegal magnetism are executed at the same timing, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable, As shown in FIG. 124(B), the control microcomputer 121 notifies that illegal magnetism has been detected. However, the effect control microcomputer 121 assumes that the actuation of the over-prize ball prevention function is more important as notification than the detection of illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 124(A). Thus, it may be notified that the over-prize ball prevention function has been activated.

In the twenty-sixth modification described above, when the image control board 140 does not receive the illumination permission command (driving permission command) from the effect control board 120, the illumination initial light emission (initial operation) is not performed, and the illumination display device 57 (specified The light emission control in the production means) was not executed at all. However, when the image control board 140 does not receive the illumination permission command (driving permission command) from the effect control board 120, although the illumination initial light emission (initial operation) is not performed, the illumination display device 57 emits light other than the illumination initial light emission. Control (for example, logo illumination effect) may be executed. Alternatively, when the image control board 140 does not receive the illumination permission command (driving permission command) from the effect control board 120, the illumination initial light emission (initial operation) is executed, but the illumination display device 57 other than the illumination initial light emission is emitted. Control (for example, logo illumination effect) may not be executed.

In the twenty-sixth modification described above, when there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 (first unit) and the back unit 1U (second unit), the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing are performed. (S4012) was not executed, and various effects were not executed. However, even if there is an abnormality in the combination of the first unit and the second unit, the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) are executed, and various effects are executed. good. In this case, the process of step S4021 shown in FIG. 138 (the process of determining whether or not the effect control permission flag is ON) should be omitted.

In the twenty-sixth modification described above, the effect control board 120 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 (first unit) and the back unit 1U (second unit). However, the first unit and the second unit are not limited to the game board 1 and the back unit 1U, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the first unit may be the game board 1 and the second unit may be the big winning devices 14D and 15D (the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D). In this case, when the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121) determines that there is no abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the big winning devices 14D and 15D when the power is turned on, image control is performed. While transmitting an illumination permission command (driving permission command) to the board 140, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the combination of the game board 1 and the big winning devices 14D and 15D, an illumination permission command is sent to the image control board 140. are not sent.

Also, for example, the first unit may be the front door 23 and the second unit may be the frame movable device 58 . In this case, the production control board 120 (production control microcomputer 121), when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the combination of the front door 23 and the frame movable device 58 when the power is turned on, the image control board 140 When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the combination of the front door 23 and the frame movable device 58, the illumination permission command (drive permission command) is not transmitted to the image control board 140. It has become. As described above, the relationship between the first unit and the second unit can be changed as appropriate. The movable devices 55 and 56 (on-board movable device 55 and under-board movable device 56) may be used.

In the twenty-sixth modification described above, when the power is turned on, the effect control board 120 causes an abnormality in the pachinko game machine PY1 due to the combination of the game board 1 (first unit) and the back unit 1U (second unit). It was determined whether or not However, the target for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not limited to the combination of the first unit and the second unit, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the effect control board 120 determines that the lower tray 35 is full based on the detection of the lower tray full switch, it determines that the pachinko game machine PY1 is abnormal. In this case, the effect control board 120 may not transmit the illumination permission command (driving permission command) to the image control board 140 . In this modified example, the effect control board 120 will transmit an illumination permission command (drive permission command) to the image control board 140 if it determines that the lower tray 35 is not full. Further, for example, when the effect control board 120 determines that the game machine frame 2 is open (the front door 23 is open, the front frame 23m is open) based on the detection of the frame opening sensor, the pachinko It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine PY1. In this case, the effect control board 120 may not transmit the illumination permission command (driving permission command) to the image control board 140 . In addition, in this modification, if the effect control board 120 judges that the game machine frame 2 is closed (the front door 23 is closed, the front frame 23m is closed), the image control board 140 , an illumination permission command (drive permission command) is transmitted to.

In the twenty-sixth modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 132, the illumination display device 57 (specific rendering means) is connected to the image control board 140 so as to be light emission controlled (drive controlled). Then, unless the image control board 140 receives an illumination permission command (driving permission command) from the effect control board 120, the illumination display device 57 (specific effect means) does not perform light emission control. However, the specific effect means connected to the image control board 140 so as to be driven and controlled is not limited to the illumination display device 57, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as the specific effect means, the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 is connected to the image control board 140 so as to be light emission controlled. Then, the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 may not be controlled to emit light unless the image control board 140 receives a drive permission command from the effect control board 120 . Further, for example, the movable devices 55 , 56 , 58 (board movable devices 55 , 56 , frame movable device 58 ) are connected to the image control board 140 so as to be driven and controlled as specific rendering means. The movable devices 55 , 56 , 58 may not be driven and controlled unless the image control board 140 receives a drive permission command from the effect control board 120 .

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the total number of fired balls is 24000 (the specified number of balls) or more in the normal game state, the variable long meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. Used, with the start of the variable effect, there is a 30% chance that the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) will be displayed for only 6 seconds, and the total number of shot balls will be 12000 or more. and is less than 24000, the variable short meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 149(B)) is displayed for only 3 seconds. However, in the normal game state, as the total number of shot balls increases, the display ratio of the meter image COM may increase stepwise.

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121, when in the normal game state, when the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000 (first specified number of balls), FIG. 149B), the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) may be displayed for only 3 seconds with a probability of 15% when the variable effect starts. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, when in the normal game state, if the total number of shot balls is 24000 (first specified number of balls) or more and less than 36000 (second specified number of balls), Displaying the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) for only 6 seconds with a probability of 30% with the start of the variable effect using the fluctuating long meter effect execution lottery table shown in 159(B). There is In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the changing super long meter effect shown in FIG. Using the lottery table, the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) may be displayed for 9 seconds with a probability of 50% along with the start of the variable effect. According to this modification, as the total number of shot balls increases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to gradually grasp the current number of difference balls in the normal game state.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the total number of shot balls is less than 12000 (fixed number of balls) in the normal game state, a meter image COM indicating the approximate number of difference balls may be displayed. I didn't. However, in the normal game state, regardless of the value of the total number of shot balls, the meter image COM may be displayed to indicate the approximate number of difference balls. Also, in the normal game state, every time a variable effect is started, a meter image COM showing a rough estimate of the number of difference balls may be displayed.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 (predetermined number of balls) or more in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting effect (30 148 (B), (C), and (D) in the customer waiting effect in which display of effect amount setting image TT1 for 30 seconds→display of hall code corresponding image TT2 for 30 seconds→display of demo image TT3 for 30 seconds is repeated. As shown in , a meter image COM showing an estimate of the number of difference balls is displayed for 10 seconds, and when the customer is waiting, the total number of shot balls is 12000 (specified number of balls) or more and 24000 (predetermined number of balls). If it is less than 1 minute and 30 seconds per cycle, the meter image COM showing the standard of the number of difference balls is displayed as shown in FIGS. Displayed for 5 seconds. However, in the customer waiting state, the display ratio of the meter image COM may increase stepwise as the total number of shot balls increases.

Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121, in the customer waiting state, if the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000 (first predetermined number of balls), one cycle 1 minute 30 The meter image COM is displayed for only 5 seconds in the customer waiting effect consisting of seconds (see FIG. 147(D)). In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, when in the customer waiting state, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 (first predetermined number of balls) or more and less than 36000 (second predetermined number of balls), 1 The meter image COM is displayed for only 10 seconds in the customer waiting effect composed of a cycle of 1 minute and 30 seconds (see FIGS. 148(C) and 148(D)). In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, in the customer waiting state, if the total number of shot balls is 36000 (second predetermined number of balls) or more, the customer waiting effect composed of 1 minute and 30 seconds per cycle. , the meter image COM is displayed for 15 seconds. According to this modification, as the total number of shot balls increases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the current number of difference balls step by step while waiting for customers.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, if the total number of fired balls is less than 12000 (specific number) while waiting for customers, the meter image COM indicating the approximate number of difference balls is not displayed. rice field. However, when the customer is waiting, regardless of the value of the total number of shot balls, the meter image COM may be displayed to indicate the approximate number of difference balls. In addition, the meter image COM showing the guideline of the difference number of balls may be always displayed during the customer waiting state or the customer waiting effect.

In the thirtieth modification described above, when the total number of shot balls is 12,000 (fixed number of balls) or more and less than 24,000 (specified number of balls) in the normal game state, the variable effects By lottery (using the during-fluctuation short meter effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 154(A)), it is determined whether or not to execute the during-fluctuation short meter effect. However, when the total number of shot balls is 12,000 or more and less than 24,000 in the normal game state, the variable short meter effect may always be executed along with the variable effect.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 (the specified number of balls) or more in the normal game state, a lottery (variation shown in FIG. (Using a medium long meter effect execution lottery table), it is determined whether or not to execute the fluctuating long meter effect. However, when the total number of shot balls is 24000 or more in the normal game state, the variable long meter effect may be always executed along with the variable effect.

In the thirtieth modification described above, when the customer is waiting, if the total number of shot balls is 12,000 (specified number of balls) or more and less than 24,000 (predetermined number of balls), the customer waiting short meter display is always performed. was executed (see FIG. 147). However, in the customer waiting state, if the total number of shot balls is 12000 or more and less than 24000, a lottery (using a customer waiting short meter effect execution lottery table) will perform a customer waiting short meter effect. You may make it executable.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the total number of fired balls is 24000 (predetermined number of balls) or more in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting long meter effect is always executed (see FIG. 148). However, if the total number of shot balls is 24000 in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting long meter effect can be executed by lottery (using the customer waiting long meter effect execution lottery table). good.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, during the normal game state, at the start of the variable effect (at the start of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable meter effect (fluctuation short meter effect, variable long meter effect) is displayed. made it run. However, in the normal game state, the execution timing of the fluctuating meter effect is not limited to the start of the fluctuating effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the fluctuating meter effect may be executed at the time when the ready-to-win state is established, or at the timing when the winning notification effect or the losing notification effect is executed after the winning/losing branch point.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, in the normal game state, when the fluctuating meter effect (fluctuation short meter effect, fluctuating long meter effect) is executed, when the fluctuating meter effect is not executed, was there. However, in the normal game state, the meter image COM indicating the approximate number of difference balls may be continuously displayed. Also, for example, when in the normal game state, in the production before reaching the reach (pre-reach production), the fluctuating meter production may be executed, and the production after reaching the reach (post-reach production) ), the meter effect during fluctuation may not be executed.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, only in the normal game state, there are times when the fluctuating meter effect (fluctuation short meter effect, fluctuating long meter effect) is executed. However, in a game state other than the normal game state, the during-fluctuation meter effect may be executed. For example, in the low probability-high base state or the high probability-high base state, there may be times when the fluctuating meter effect is executed.

In the thirtieth modified example described above, when the customer is waiting (during execution of the customer waiting effect), the meter image COM (Fig. 147 (D), Fig. 148 (C) ), see FIG. 148(D)). However, when the player is waiting for a customer, the manner in which the number of difference balls can be grasped is not limited to the meter image COM, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 160(A), a gauge image GAG showing the difference in the number of balls (a guideline for the number of difference in the number of balls) may be displayed with a 10-level scale as a comprehension mode for grasping the difference in the number of balls. good. Specifically, in the gauge image GAG, characters of "Complete meter" are displayed, and each time the number of difference balls at present increases by 10000, the scale increases by one. Therefore, in the gauge image GAG shown in FIG. 160(A), four scales are shown increasing, indicating that the difference ball number is 40,000 or more and less than 50,000. It should be noted that the manner in which the number of difference balls can be grasped is not limited to the one that indicates the rough number of difference balls, such as the meter image COM or the gauge image GAG, but the number of difference balls is indicated in units of one ball. can be

In the thirtieth modified example described above, the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) is displayed as a comprehension mode in which the number of difference balls can be comprehended in the normal game state. However, when the game is in the normal game state, the manner in which the number of difference balls can be grasped is not limited to the meter image COM, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 160(B), a gauge image GAG showing the difference in the number of balls (a guideline for the number of difference in the number of balls) may be displayed with a 10-level scale as a comprehension mode in which the difference in the number of balls can be comprehended. good. Specifically, in the gauge image GAG, characters of "Complete meter" are displayed, and each time the number of difference balls at present increases by 10000, the scale increases by one. Therefore, in the gauge image GAG shown in FIG. 160(B), six scales are shown increasing, indicating that the number of difference balls is 60000 or more and less than 70000. It should be noted that the manner in which the number of difference balls can be grasped is not limited to the one that indicates the rough number of difference balls, such as the meter image COM or the gauge image GAG, but the number of difference balls is indicated in units of one ball. can be

In the thirtieth modified example described above, the meter image COM (Fig. 147 (D), Fig. 148 ( C), see FIG. 148(D)) and the meter image COM (see FIG. 149(B)) shown as a comprehension mode in which the number of difference balls can be comprehended in the normal gaming state are displayed in the same mode. there were. However, the comprehension mode in which the difference number of balls can be comprehended in the customer waiting state and the comprehension mode in which the difference number of balls can be comprehended in the normal game state may be different.

In the thirtieth modified example and its modified example described above, the reference number is 95,000, the specific number of balls is 12,000, the predetermined number of balls is 24,000, the prescribed number of balls and the first prescribed number of balls are 24,000, and the The number of 2 prescribed balls was 36,000 and the fixed number of balls was 12,000. However, the reference number, the specific number of balls, the predetermined number of balls, the prescribed number of balls, the first prescribed number of balls, the second prescribed number of balls, and the fixed number of balls are only examples, and can be changed as appropriate. .

In the above form and each modification, except for the 22nd to 24th modifications and the 30th modification, the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) is 80000 (reference number) or more. I got the protection to work. However, the number of difference balls (reference number), which is the reference for activating the over-prize prevention function, is not limited to 80000, and may be 50000, 100000, or 120000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above-mentioned form and each of the above modifications, the specific measurement number that triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function is the difference number of balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. However, the specific count number can be changed as appropriate if it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player from the viewpoint of not giving excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measurement number may be a game state such as a jackpot game state, or a difference ball count limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. Also, for example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive period. It can be.

In the above embodiment and each modification, the pachinko machine PY1 is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko machine in which the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged outside the pachinko machine PY1. It had been. However, the pachinko gaming machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine that can circulate and enter the game area again after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area. In this case, a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170 is provided with a 7-segment display. Therefore, the 7-segment display may display the number of difference balls (specific count number). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 161, a 6-digit 7-segment display 200 that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door, and the number of difference balls (specific measurement number) is displayed on this 7-segment display 200. may be displayed. Also, in enclosed pachinko, a 7-segment display may be provided on the game control board 100 and the display control on this 7-segment display may be executed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

In the above-mentioned form and each of the modifications, the over-prize preventing function is the total number of balls after the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is cleared (that is, non-erasing clear processing). It was explained that it operates based on the number of difference balls, which is the difference between the number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls, being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated when the value measured as the maximum number of difference balls (also referred to as the maximum number of balls held, MY, etc.) reaches a predetermined reference number. That is, the specific count number may be the maximum difference number of balls. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the maximum difference number of balls will be described. FIGS. 162A to 162C respectively show an example of transition of the number of difference balls and an example of the maximum number of difference balls calculated according to the transition of each number of difference balls.

FIG. 162(A) is an example in which the number of difference balls changes without updating the number of difference balls after the first minimum number of difference balls is recorded. The minimum difference number of balls is the minimum value of the measured difference number of balls. Specifically, in FIG. 162(A), after the previous non-erase clear process is performed, the number of difference balls changes in a downward trend, and at time tA1, the lowest number of difference balls "-10000" is recorded. there is After that, although the number of difference balls increases and decreases, it does not decrease below the minimum number of difference balls at time tA1. Then, at time tA2 after time tA1, a peak of difference number "70000" is recorded. The peak of the number of difference balls is the highest value of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. Then, the maximum difference number MYA in the example of FIG. 162(A) is "80000" which is the difference between the lowest difference number "-10000" at time tA1 and the peak difference number "70000" at time tA2. .

In the example of FIG. 162(A), the minimum ball difference number is updated several times according to the decrease in the difference ball number until time tA1, since the difference ball number tends to decrease. However, after that, since the number of difference balls does not fall below the minimum number of difference balls at time tA1, the minimum number of difference balls is not updated after time tA1.

FIG. 162(B) is an example in which the number of difference balls changes while the minimum number of difference balls is updated multiple times. In this example, after the previous non-erase clear process is performed, the first minimum difference number of balls "-10000" is recorded at time tB1. Also, at time tB4, the lowest difference ball number "-20000" which is smaller than the difference ball number "-10000" at time tB1 is recorded. Furthermore, at time tB7, the lowest difference ball number “−30000”, which is less than the difference ball number at time tB4, is recorded. Then, during the period from time tB1 to time tB4 in FIG. 162(B), the difference ball number peak "20000" is recorded at time tB2. Further, during the period from time tB4 to time tB7, a peak "0" of the difference ball number is recorded at time tB5. Further, at time tB8 after time tB7, a peak of difference number "50000" is recorded. Then, the maximum ball difference number MYB in the example of FIG. 162(B) is "80000" which is the difference between the lowest ball difference number "-30000" at time tB7 and the peak difference ball number "50000" at time tB8. .

Also in the example of FIG. 162(B), the minimum ball difference number is updated several times according to the decrease in the difference ball number until the time tB1, because the difference ball number tends to decrease. In addition, since the minimum ball difference number is smaller than the difference ball number at time tB1, which is the previous minimum ball difference number, from time tB3 to time tB4, and tends to decrease, It has been updated multiple times according to the decrease in the number of difference balls. Furthermore, the minimum ball difference number is less than the difference ball number at time tB4, which is the previous minimum ball difference number, from time tB6 to time tB7, and tends to decrease. It has been updated multiple times according to the decrease in the number of difference balls.

FIG. 162(C) is an example in which the difference number of balls changes in the negative direction. In this example, after the previous non-erase clear process is performed, the first minimum difference number of balls "-30000" is recorded at time tC1. Also, at time tC4, the lowest difference ball number "-50000" which is less than the lowest difference ball number "-30000" at time tC1 is recorded. Then, during the period from time tC1 to time tC4 in FIG. 162(C), the difference ball number peak “−10000” is recorded at time tC2. Also, at time tC5 after time tC4, a peak "-10000" of the difference ball number is recorded. Then, the maximum ball difference number MYC in the example of FIG. 162(C) is "40000" which is the difference between the lowest ball difference number "-50000" at time tC4 and the peak difference ball number "-10000" at time tC5. be.

Also in the example of FIG. 162(C), the minimum ball difference number is updated several times according to the decrease in the difference ball number until time tC1, since the difference ball number tends to decrease. In addition, since the minimum ball difference number is smaller than the difference ball number at time tC1, which is the previous minimum ball difference number, from time tC3 to time tC4, and tends to decrease, It has been updated multiple times according to the decrease in the number of difference balls.

As mentioned above, the maximum number of difference balls is the difference between the lowest number of difference balls, which is the lowest value of the difference number of balls measured, and the peak (highest value) of the number of difference balls after the minimum number of difference balls is measured. Calculated. The over-prizing prevention function can be activated when the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the number of difference balls measured after the minimum number of difference balls is recorded reaches a predetermined reference number. can. In other words, the over-prized ball prevention function can be activated in response to the increase in the number of difference balls from the minimum number of difference balls to a predetermined reference number. Also, the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the maximum difference number of balls reaches a predetermined reference number.

Specifically, for example, the over-prize preventing function calculates the difference between the stored minimum number of difference balls and the current (latest) number of difference balls while storing the minimum number of difference balls in a predetermined storage area. In addition, it is conceivable to actuate when the calculated value reaches a predetermined reference number. The information on the minimum number of difference balls and the information on the calculated value of the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the current number of difference balls are stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erase storage unit 107) of the game RAM 104. good. These values may be cleared (that is, set to initial values) when the difference number is cleared by a predetermined non-erasing clear process.

In addition, when the over-prizing prevention function is activated when the difference between the minimum number of difference balls and the number of difference balls measured after the minimum number of difference balls is recorded becomes a predetermined reference number, That is, when the increase in the number of difference balls from the lowest number of difference balls is set as the specific count number, a counter for counting the specific count number may be provided. Such a counter may, for example, always increment based on the number of balls won, regardless of value, and decrement based on the number of balls fired when greater than zero. If the number of difference balls is "0" or less, the subtraction based on the number of shot balls is not performed. The value of such a counter changes as an integer equal to or greater than "0". This counter may be hereinafter referred to as a difference ball natural number counter. Information on the difference ball natural number counter may also be stored in a predetermined storage area (non-erasing storage unit 107) of the game RAM 104. FIG. Then, the value of the differential ball natural number counter is cleared (that is, set to the initial value) by a process corresponding to a predetermined non-erasing clear process (the process for clearing the differential ball number in the above embodiment). Just do it.

An example of transition of the value of the difference natural number counter will be described with reference to FIG. 163(A) to (C) respectively show the transition of the value of the difference ball natural number counter. 163(A) to (C) show the transition of the difference ball natural number counter value corresponding to the transition of the difference ball number shown in FIGS. 163(A) to (C).

As shown in FIGS. 163(A) to (C), the value of the differential ball natural number counter becomes "0" while the minimum differential ball number is being updated. The difference ball natural number counter can count the number of increases in the difference ball number from the minimum difference ball number using natural numbers. Therefore, by using the difference ball natural number counter, it is possible to appropriately function the over-prize prevention function. Furthermore, the difference ball natural number counter, which always changes at "0" or more, can calculate the minimum value required for the operation of the over-prize prevention function in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, when using a value less than "0", the amount of information related to the calculation by the game control microcomputer 101 may increase. In such a case, it is possible to reduce the load on the game control microcomputer 101 by using the difference ball natural number counter which always changes at "0" or more.

In the above mode and each of the above modified examples, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to be unexecutable based on the difference ball number becoming 80000 (reference number) or more. However, although the game control microcomputer 101 measures (counts) the number of difference balls, the game may not be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of difference balls. In this specification, the term "measurement" has the same meaning as counting.

12. Inventions Shown in the Above-described Embodiments The above-described embodiments show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000) and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 25), the game is disabled (stops game control processing and launch control processing).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state, and it is not a particularly large disadvantage. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The game control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) shifts to a normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The game control means is
When it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
The specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process that has been suspended by a predetermined number (for example, four) when the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 53) when the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the hit determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number. In this case, it is regarded as a substantially advantageous game state until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number is completed in the normal game state, and the game is stopped when the substantially advantageous game state ends. Is possible.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
Equipped with an entrance (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling a ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering opening than in a normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball entry state (high base state).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-enter state in which the game ball enters the ball-entering opening more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the easy-ball-entering state ends and before the number of balls in his possession decreases.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means A1 to A4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player in the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. 2, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000), the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) (see FIG. 25),
Based on the establishment of the reset conditions not triggered by power-on (the first reset condition that the special reset switch 181 is pressed and the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specific measurement number measured This gaming machine is characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 26A and 26B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing the game before the specific count reaches the reference number, and the player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific count becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the measured specific number of measurements is erased based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by power-on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

The invention according to means B2 is
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 26(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a certain player has finished playing, the employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, and the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The game control means can be controlled to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 26(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, assuming that the player has changed, the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means B4 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is to shift from an advantageous game state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal game state (see FIG. 81(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player shifts to the normal game state, the measured specific counting number is erased. In this way, once the situation in which the advantageous game state continues is over, it is possible to prevent the specific count number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means B5 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state (see FIG. 65(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific time continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player does not last for a while. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific number of measurements from exceeding the reference number for a while by deleting the specific number of measurements.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means B1 to B5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, wherein the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of specific measurements exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement measured based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. The difference is that the number is erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measurement number that has been measured. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when the employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, although the game information related to the game is erased, the measured specific measurement number is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the game state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible not to erase the measured specific measurement number.

The invention according to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the measured specific count can be erased (see FIG. 26(A)) based on the operation of the special operation means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the measured specific measurement number is erased by the employee of the gaming facility operating the special operation means. As a result, even if the game state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the game hall can erase the measured specific measurement number at an arbitrary timing.

The invention according to means C3 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured specific count can be erased.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the measured specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the measured specific number of measurements without having the employee of the game arcade perform any operation.

The invention according to means C4 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1 to means C4,
The game control means is
The specific number of measurements is stored in order by being classified for each predetermined period (period from power-on to power-off) from 1st to N (4)th,
Along with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is erased, and the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined period is erased. , and the measurement of the specific number of times in the first predetermined period is started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to store the specific counts for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth. On top of that, as the number of specific measurements in the N-th predetermined period is erased, the number of specific measurements in the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is the number of specific measurements in the second to N-th predetermined periods Shifted as counts. Then, the measurement of the specific number of measurements for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the number of specific measurements for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth without having the staff of the game arcade operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means C1 to C4 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, wherein the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been made is not erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means D>
The invention according to means D1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
When the specific count number is less than the reference number in an advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state and high-probability base state) advantageous to the player, advantageous effects (round effects shown in FIG. 18 (C-2) and FIG. 18 While it is possible to execute the probability variable mode production shown in (B-4),
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number in the advantageous gaming state, instead of the advantageous production alternative production (round alternative production shown in FIG. 63 (B) and probability variable mode alternative production shown in FIG. 63 (C)) is a gaming machine characterized by being able to execute

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if the advantageous effect is being executed when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number in the advantageous game state, the player may be given the impression that the game can still be continued. Therefore, at this time, by executing the alternative effect instead of the advantageous effect, it is possible to make the player easily aware of the situation in which the game cannot be executed.

The invention according to means D2 is
In the gaming machine described in means D1,
The game control means is
A game characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (jackpot game state and high probability high base state) ends (see FIG. 25) machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific count number is greater than or equal to the reference number, the game will not become unexecutable as long as it is in an advantageous game state. Therefore, in the advantageous game state, if the advantageous effect continues to be executed, the player may misunderstand that the specific count number is not equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, in an advantageous game state, if the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, an alternative effect is executed instead of the advantageous effect, so that the player is allowed to play the game while the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number. It is possible to make sure that the

The invention according to means D3 is
In the gaming machine according to means D2,
The game control means can execute a winning game when it is determined to be a winning by the winning determination process,
The advantageous game state (game state in the advantageous period shown in FIG. 53 (jackpot game state, high base state, normal game state in the lottery of special figure 2)) is the specific count number is the reference number or more , the hit determination process, which has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4) at the time of transition to the normal game state, ends when the process is completed in the normal game state;
The advantageous effect is an effect (remaining shown in FIG. 56) that is executed when the hit determination process, which has been suspended for a predetermined number (for example, 4) when shifting to the normal game state, is completed in the normal game state. It is a gaming machine characterized by including a pending alternative special effect).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the game cannot be executed until the hit determination process that has been suspended for the predetermined number when the normal game state is entered is completed. do not become. Here, if the game state is shifted to the normal game state and the advantageous effect continues to be executed, the player may misunderstand that the specific counted number is not equal to or greater than the reference number. Therefore, by executing an alternative effect in place of the advantageous effect after shifting to the normal game state, it is possible for the player to reliably grasp that the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number. be.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means D1 to D3 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, wherein the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means controls when the specific count number is less than the reference number in an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. When , an advantageous performance can be executed, while when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number in an advantageous game state, an alternative performance can be executed instead of the advantageous performance. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means E>
The invention according to means E1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific count number is a predetermined reference number (80000) or more, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the normal game state (for example, after shifting to the normal game state, the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30 Then, see FIG. 57), the game machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping the game control process and the launch control process).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not a particularly large disadvantage. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means E2 is
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means can variably display an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
A gaming machine characterized in that the end condition is that the variable display of the identification symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after shifting to the normal game state (see FIG. 57). be.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the variable display of the identification symbols is performed a specified number of times after shifting to the normal game state, the game cannot be executed. become. In this way, the player can continue playing the game for a while until the variable display of the identification symbols is executed a specified number of times even after the normal game state is entered.

The invention according to means E3 is
In the gaming machine described in means E2,
Equipped with production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
When the specific count number is less than the reference number, a special effect (Fig. 58 (B) (C ) It is possible to execute the special production after the normal transition shown in ),
Even when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the special effect can be executed from the transition to the normal game state until the variation display of the identification pattern is performed the specified number of times (30 times). It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is less than the reference number, the user can enjoy the special performance from the transition to the normal game state to the execution of the variable display of the identification symbols for the specified number of times. It is possible to On the other hand, even when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to enjoy the special performance from the transition to the normal game state to the execution of the variable display of the identification symbols for the specified number of times. . In this way, even if the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the normal game state is entered, the special performance before the game becomes unexecutable is executed as it is, and the timing of the game becoming unexecutable and the special performance are determined. can be synchronized with the end timing of

The invention according to means E4 is
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means can execute a winning game (jackpot game) when it is determined to be a winning by a winning determination process,
The end condition is characterized in that the hit determination process, which has been reserved for a predetermined number (for example, 4) when shifting to the normal game state, is completed in the normal game state (see FIG. 53). It is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process, which has been suspended for a predetermined number when shifting to the normal game state, is performed in the normal game state. Once consumed, the game becomes unexecutable. In this way, the player can continue playing the game for a while until the hit determination process, which has been suspended for a predetermined number of times, is completed even after shifting to the normal game state.

The invention according to means E5 is
In the gaming machine described in means E4,
Equipped with production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
When the specific count number is less than the reference number, an advantageous effect (see FIG. 54 Remaining pending special effect shown) can be executed,
Even when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the advantageous effect (Fig. The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute a remaining reservation special effect shown in 54).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is less than the reference number, the hit determination process, which was suspended for a predetermined number when the normal game state was entered, is performed in the normal game state. It is possible to enjoy the advantageous performance until it is consumed. On the other hand, even when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number, the hit determination process, which has been suspended for a predetermined number when the normal game state is entered, is canceled in the normal game state. It is possible to enjoy the performance. In this way, even if the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the game is shifted to the normal game state, the advantageous performance before the game becomes unexecutable is executed as it is, and the timing of the game becoming unexecutable and the advantageous performance are executed. can be synchronized with the end timing of

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means E1 to E5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. 2, when the specific count is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means F>
The invention according to means F1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
A game impossibility notice effect (display of a game stop notice image shown in FIG. 28(B)) for notifying that the game will become impracticable when the specific count number exceeds the reference number can be executed. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. In addition, when the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a game impossibility forewarning effect for notifying that the game will become impracticable is executed. Therefore, the player can know in advance that the game will become unexecutable, and can be prevented from being embarrassed by the sudden inability to execute the game.

The invention according to means F2 is
In the gaming machine described in means F1,
The production control means is
When the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the preliminary reference number (70000), which is less than the reference number, a pre-game impossibility notice effect (shown in FIG. 28A) for notifying that the specific count number is approaching the reference number The game machine is characterized by being able to execute the display of the over-prized ball foretelling image KY).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the pre-reference number, the pre-game impossibility forewarning effect for notifying that the specific count number is approaching the reference number is executed. After that, when the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a game impossibility forewarning performance for notifying that the game will become impracticable is executed. In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable step by step in advance, thereby making it easier for the player to grasp the situation.

The invention according to means F3 is
In the gaming machine according to means F1 or means F2,
The game control means controls the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 25) when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and an advantageous game state (high base state) advantageous to the player ends. It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state, and it is not a particularly large disadvantage. In this way, it is possible for the player to stop the game at a convenient timing.

The invention according to means F4 is
In the gaming machine described in means F3,
The game impossibility notice effect is a effect that foretells that the game will become unexecutable when the advantageous game state ends (effect indicating "game ends when high base state ends", see FIG. 28(B)). It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the game impossibility notice effect notifies that the game will become unexecutable when the advantageous game state ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp when the game cannot be executed.

The invention according to means F5 is
In the gaming machine according to means F1 or means F2,
The game control means can variably display an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The game impossibility notice effect is characterized in that it is a effect (display of the remaining game stop count image LN1 shown in FIG. 56(B)) indicating the number of times the identification symbols are changed until the game becomes impracticable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls reaches or exceeds the reference number, the game impossibility notice effect allows the player to limit the number of times the identification symbols are displayed until the game becomes impracticable. grasp. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that each time the variable display of the identification symbols is executed, the game becomes impossible to execute.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means F1 to F4 is that the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means may disable the game execution when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number. It is different in that it is possible to execute a game-impossible forewarning effect that forewarns that it will become. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means G>
The invention according to means G1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising a shooting operation means (handle 72k) capable of shooting game balls based on the operation,
The game control means controls the game to be unexecutable when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied (for example, when the difference ball number becomes 80000 or more),
The effect control means, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, based on the contact to the firing operation means, the attention calling effect (operation shown in FIG. 51 (B) or FIG. 52 (B) This game machine is characterized by being capable of executing attention calling effects, contact attention calling effects shown in FIG. 61(B) or FIG. 62(B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the predetermined stop condition is satisfied. At this time, the player may operate the shooting operation means without fully grasping the situation in which the game cannot be executed. In this case, an attention calling effect for calling attention is executed. In this way, it is possible for the player who touches the shooting operation means to surely understand that the game cannot be played.

The invention according to means G2 is
In the gaming machine described in means G1,
The shooting operation means is a gaming machine characterized by being able to shoot a game ball even when the game is controlled to be unexecutable (the shooting control process (S109) is not stopped).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game ball is shot when the player operates the shooting operation means. Therefore, the player may misunderstand that the game can be executed. Therefore, by executing the attention-calling effect, it is possible for the player to surely grasp that the game cannot be executed.

The invention according to means G3 is
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means can measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the stop condition includes that the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Furthermore, even if the player operates the shooting operation means when the game cannot be executed, the attention-calling effect enables the player to surely grasp that the game cannot be executed.

The invention according to means G4 is
In the gaming machine according to means G1 or means G2,
The game control means can determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism) (can execute error processing (S111)),
The game machine is characterized in that the stop condition includes that the game control means determines that there is the specific abnormality.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the game control means determines that there is a specific abnormality, the game becomes unexecutable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in a situation where there is a specific abnormality. Furthermore, even if the player operates the shooting operation means when the game cannot be executed, the attention-calling effect enables the player to surely grasp that the game cannot be executed.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-070611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is established), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables the game execution. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue playing the game. However, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player may operate the shooting operation means without fully grasping the situation in which the game is unexecutable. Therefore, in the invention according to means G1 to G4, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-070611, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the effect control means The difference is that it is possible to execute an attention-calling effect to call attention based on this. Thus, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that allows the player who touches the shooting operation means to reliably understand that the game cannot be executed (there is an effect). It is possible.

<Means H>
The invention according to means H1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number,
The production control means is
When the specific measurement number is less than the specific number (78500) smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect (standard number reach notice effect (next jackpot arrival notice effect and run-up effect)) is not executed,
A game characterized in that it is possible to execute the advance notice effect (standard number reach notice effect (next jackpot arrival notice effect and run-up effect)) based on the specific measurement number becoming the specific number or more. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, if the player suddenly becomes unable to play the game due to the specific count exceeding the reference number, the player may feel a great deal of discomfort. Therefore, when the specific measurement number is less than the specific number smaller than the reference number, the advance notice performance is executed based on the fact that the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than the specific number without executing the advance notice performance. This allows the player to grasp in advance the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable before the specific measurement number reaches the reference number or more, so as not to give a great sense of discomfort when the game becomes unexecutable. It is possible to

The invention according to means H2 is
In the gaming machine described in means H1,
The production control means is
Executes the advance notice effect (standard number reaching notice effect (next jackpot reaching notice effect and run-up effect)) asynchronously with the effect being executed,
The game machine is characterized in that the advance notice effect is continued (see FIG. 65) until at least the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the advance notice effect is executed asynchronously with the effect being executed based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the specific number. Then, the pre-announcement effect is continued until the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. In this way, during the period from when the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number to when it reaches the reference number, the advance notice effect executed asynchronously makes it appear to the player that the game will naturally become unexecutable. is possible.

The invention according to means H3 is
In the gaming machine according to means H1 or means H2,
The production control means is
A production pattern (EZ) indicating whether or not it is a hit can be displayed stopped after a variable display,
During the execution of the advance notice effect, the reduced effect pattern (mini effect pattern ez) in which the effect pattern is reduced is displayed in a stopped state through a variable display (see FIGS. 67(B) and 67(D)). It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, during the execution of the advance notice effect, the reduced effect pattern in which the effect pattern is reduced is displayed in a stationary manner through the variable display. In this way, it is possible to prevent the prior notice effect from becoming difficult to grasp while showing whether or not the game is a win by the reduced effect pattern instead of the effect pattern.

The invention according to means H4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to means H3,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
The production control means is
capable of executing a winning suggestion effect suggesting that the winning game will be executed;
When suggesting that the winning game will be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect, the reduced winning suggesting effect (indicating that the main character is happy to win the battle) is reduced. This game machine is characterized by being able to display the background image g113 for mini SP reach (see FIG. 67(D)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the execution of the winning game is suggested during the execution of the prior notice performance, the reduced winning suggestion performance in which the winning suggestion performance is reduced is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming difficult to grasp while suggesting that the winning game will be executed by the reduced win suggesting effect replacing the win suggesting effect.

The invention according to means H5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H2 to means H4,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
In one winning game, a prescribed number (1500) of prize balls are set to be given,
The specific number is a number (78500) obtained by subtracting the specified number (1500) from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the pre-announcement effect is executed when the number of prize balls given in one winning game becomes equal to or less than the prescribed number before the specific count number reaches the reference number. In this way, by executing the advance notice performance only in a situation where the next winning game is likely to become unexecutable, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the frequent execution of the advance notice performance.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means H1 to H5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means determines that the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number smaller than the reference number. Based on this, the difference is that it is possible to execute an advance notice effect for notifying that the game will become unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means I>
The invention according to means I1 is
When it is determined to be a hit (jackpot) in the hit determination process (jackpot determination process), a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game),
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
Based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a specific number (78500, 79550) smaller than the reference number, advance notice effect (the next big hit arrival shown in FIG. 72(C) It is possible to execute a suggestive effect, an over-the-ball abnormal notice effect shown in FIG. 74 (B),
In one winning game, a prescribed number (1500, 450) of prize balls are set to be given,
The specific number (78500, 79550) is a gaming machine characterized in that the specified number (1500, 450) is subtracted from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, it is conceivable to execute a prior notice effect for notifying that the game will become unexecutable before the specific count number reaches the reference number. It may cause discomfort. Therefore, if the number of prize balls awarded in one winning game becomes equal to or less than the prescribed number before the specific count number reaches the reference number, the pre-announcement effect is executed. In this way, when the game is likely to become unexecutable in the next winning game, the advance notice performance is executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable due to the frequent execution of the advance notice performance.

The invention according to means I2 is
In the gaming machine described in means I1,
The types of wins include a first win (jackpot pattern Z2) and a second win (jackpot pattern Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on determination of the first winning, a first prescribed number (450) of prize balls are set to be given (see FIG. 70),
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500), which is larger than the first specified number, is set to be awarded ( See Figure 70),
The specific number (78500) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second specified number (1500) is subtracted from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the number of prize balls provided in one winning game when the second winning is determined becomes less than or equal to the number of prize balls (second specified number) before the specific count number reaches the reference number. Based on this, the advance notice effect is executed. In this way, even if there are a plurality of types of wins, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect on the assumption that the player wins the second win which is advantageous to the player in the next win.

The invention according to means I3 is
In the gaming machine described in means I2,
The production control means is
During the ending of the winning game, the advance notice effect (the next jackpot arrival shown in FIG. 72(C) This game machine is characterized in that it is possible to start a suggestive effect (see FIG. 71).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number during execution of the winning game, the advance notice effect is started during the ending of the winning game. As a result, it is possible to let the player know that the next winning game is incapable of execution due to the advance notice performance just before the winning game ends. In other words, in the winning game, even if the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, the advance notice effect is not started until the ending is started. As a result, the player can enjoy the winning game without being overly conscious of being unable to play the game.

The invention according to means I4 is
In the gaming machine described in means I1,
The types of wins include a first win (jackpot pattern Z2) and a second win (jackpot pattern Z1) (see FIG. 69).
In one winning game executed based on determination of the first winning, a first prescribed number (450) of prize balls are set to be given (see FIG. 70),
In one winning game executed based on the determination of the second winning, a second specified number (1500), which is larger than the first specified number, is set to be awarded ( See Figure 70),
In the gaming machine, the specific number (79550) is a number obtained by subtracting the first prescribed number (450) from the reference number (80000).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the specific count number reaches the reference number, the number of prize balls given in one winning game when it is determined to be the first win becomes less than or equal to the first specified number. , advance notice production is executed. In this way, assuming that the player wins the first win which is disadvantageous to the player in the next win, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect when there is a high possibility that the game will become impossible to execute at least until the next win game. It is possible.

The invention according to means I5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means I2 to means I4,
The production control means is
At the timing when the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, the advance notice effect (over-prize ball abnormality notice effect shown in FIG. 74(B)) can be executed (see FIG. 73). It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the pre-announcement effect is executed at the timing when the number of prize balls given in one winning game becomes equal to or less than the specified number before the specific count number reaches the reference number. . In this way, when the game becomes unexecutable in the next winning game, by executing the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the discomfort caused by the frequent execution of the advance notice effect. is.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means I1 to I5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means determines that the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number smaller than the reference number. Based on this, it is possible to execute a pre-announcement performance for notifying that the game will become unexecutable, and in one winning game, it is set to be able to award a specified number of prize balls, and the specific number is a reference number. It is different in that it is a number obtained by subtracting the specified number from As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means J>
The invention according to means J1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising operable operation means (normal button 40, select button),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
Before the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, it is possible to execute a prior notice effect (excess ball abnormal notice effect, residual ball number notification effect) for notifying that the game will become unexecutable,
Based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to set the effect items related to the advance notice effect (the effect items related to the over-prize ball abnormality notice effect, the effect items related to the residual ball number notification effect) (Fig. 75). (C) (see (D))).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, before the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a pre-announcement performance for notifying that the game will become unexecutable is executed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to grasp in advance the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable, so as not to give a great sense of discomfort when the game becomes unexecutable. Furthermore, by setting the effect items related to the advance notice effect based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to optimally adjust the effect matters related to the advance notice effect.

The invention according to means J2 is
In the gaming machine according to means J1,
The production control means is
Based on the fact that the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than a specific number (75000) which is smaller than the reference number, the advance notice effect (over-the-ball abnormal notice effect shown in FIG. 76(B)) can be executed,
The game machine is characterized in that the specific number (75000) can be set as the effect matter related to the advance notice effect based on the operation to the operation means (see FIG. 75(C)).

If the pre-announcement effect is executed even though the specific count number is much smaller than the reference number, the player will be overly anxious. On the other hand, if the pre-announcement effect is executed immediately before the specific count number reaches the reference number, the player will immediately feel impatience that the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by setting the specific number that triggers the execution of the advance notice effect based on the operation to the operation means, it is possible to appropriately adjust the execution timing of the advance notice effect.

The invention according to means J3 is
In the gaming machine according to means J2,
The production control means is
At the time of initial setting after the power is turned on (during the display of the over prize ball abnormality notice effect setting image SX shown in FIG. 75 (C) or the residual ball number notification effect setting image SY shown in FIG. 75 (D)) , the game machine is characterized in that the specific number can be set based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, at the time of initial setting after the power is turned on, the employee of the gaming parlor sets the specific number that triggers the execution of the advance notice effect based on the operation of the operating means. In this way, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade to appropriately and optimally adjust the execution timing of the pre-announcement effect according to the situation.

The invention according to means J4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means J1 to means J3,
Based on the operation to the operation means, the effect control means determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed (whether or not the over-prize abnormal notice effect is executed, the residual 75(C) and 75(D)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when it is desired that the advance notice effect is not executed, non-execution of the advance notice effect is set based on the operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the advance notice effect, who wishes that the advance notice effect is not executed.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, in the invention according to means J1 to J4, the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means disables the game execution before the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It is different in that it is possible to execute an advance notice effect that foretells that it will be, and it is possible to set the effect items related to the advance notice effect based on the operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means K>
The invention according to means K1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
Operable operation means (ball rental button 62),
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising a ball lending control unit (payout control microcomputer 171) capable of lending game balls based on the operation of the operating means,
The game control means is
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition (the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the illegal magnetism is detected) is),
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable, even if the operation means is operated, the ball lending control unit disables the ball lending control unit (executes the ball lending control stop processing shown in step S115). It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue the game. At this time, if the player operates the operation means and the game ball is rented, the player who cannot play in the game machine suffers a loss. Therefore, after the game becomes unexecutable, even if the operation means is operated, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player loses by preventing the game ball from being rented. be.

The invention according to means K2 is
In the gaming machine according to means K1,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (stop the game control process and the launch control process) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more possible).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Then, even if the player operates the operation means after the game becomes unexecutable due to the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the reference number, ball lending is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player loses money due to execution of ball lending.

The invention according to means K3 is
In the gaming machine according to means K1 or means K2,
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism),
It is characterized in that the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on determining that the specific abnormality exists as the establishment of the predetermined stop condition. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when a specific abnormality occurs. After that, even if the player operates the operation means, ball lending is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player loses money due to execution of ball lending.

The invention according to means K4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to means K3,
Provided with notification means (balance display unit 61) indicating that ball lending is executable,
The notification means is
When the game is controlled to be impracticable based on the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to indicate that the ball lending is impracticable ("E" indicating that the ball lending is impracticable can be displayed. ) (see FIG. 78(B)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, there is provided an informing means for indicating that the ball lending can be executed. Then, when the game is controlled to be impracticable, the notification means indicates that ball lending is impracticable. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation in which the ball lending is not executed.

The invention according to means K5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means K1 to means K4,
Equipped with production control means capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
When the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, the ball lending impossibility notification effect (the ball lending impossibility notification shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B) indicating that the ball lending is impracticable It is a game machine characterized by being able to execute a performance).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the ball lending impossibility notification effect indicating that the ball lending is not executable is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the situation in which the ball lending is not executed.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-070611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is established), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables the game execution. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue playing the game. By the way, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, there is a possibility that the player operates the operation means (ball lending button) in order to lend the game ball. However, if a game ball is rented even though the game cannot be played, the player suffers a loss. Therefore, the invention according to the means K1 to K5 is a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-070611, in which the game control means controls the game to be unexecutable, even if the operation means is operated. It is different in that the ball lending by the lending control unit is made unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a situation in which the player loses money (to produce an effect).

<Means L>
The invention according to means L1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific count number effect (presentation indicating the current number of balls shown in FIG. 82(C)) indicating the number related to the specific count number.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. In addition, by executing the specific count number effect indicating the number related to the specific count number, it is possible for the player to grasp how close the game is to becoming unexecutable.

The invention according to means L2 is
In the gaming machine described in means L1,
The production control means is
By changing (increasing) the specific counting number during the execution of the specific counting number effect, it is possible to change (increase) the numbers related to the specific counting number (Fig. 82 (C) ( D) see),
Even if the specific count number changes (decreases) during execution of the specific count number effect, it is possible to show the numbers related to the specific count number without changing (decrease) (Fig. 83(D) and FIG. 84(A)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the numbers related to the specific count number are changed and displayed by changing the specific count number during execution of the specific count number effect. On the other hand, even if the specific count number changes during execution of the specific count number production, the number related to the specific count number may be displayed without changing. As a result, when the specific count number changes frequently, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the numbers related to the specific count number.

The invention according to means L3 is
In the gaming machine described in means L2,
The production control means is
By increasing the specific count number during execution of the specific count number effect, it is possible to increase the numbers related to the specific count number (see FIGS. 82(C) and 82(D)),
Even if the specific count number decreases during execution of the specific count number effect, it is possible to show the numbers related to the specific count number without decreasing (Fig. 83 (D) and Fig. 84 (A) See) is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number increases during execution of the specific count number effect, the number related to the specific count number is increased, and when the specific count number decreases. is shown in a state in which the number related to the specific number of measurements is maintained without decreasing. Thereby, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the numbers related to the specific count only when the specific count increases.

The invention according to means L4 is
In the gaming machine described in means L3,
The game control means is controllable to an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, jackpot game state and high-probability-high base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means is capable of executing the specific count number effect only when the game is controlled to the advantageous game state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numbers related to the specific count number only when the game is controlled to the advantageous game state and the specific count number increases. In other words, when the game is controlled to the normal game state or when the specific count number decreases, it is possible to make the player not care about the specific count number.

The invention according to means L5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means L2 to means L4,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit (jackpot) by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When the winning game is started, based on the specific count number measured by the game control means, it is possible to correct and indicate the number related to the specific count number (see FIG. 84(B) ) is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific count number changes during the execution of the specific count number performance, the number related to the specific count number may be displayed without changing. However, when the winning game is started, the number is corrected to the correct specific count number. In this way, by starting a winning game, it is possible for the player to grasp the number related to the correct specific count number.

The invention according to means L6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means L2 to means L5,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit (jackpot) by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When the winning game is completed, it is possible to correct and display the number related to the specific count number based on the specific count number measured by the game control means (see FIG. 83(B)). It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even if the specific count number changes during the execution of the specific count number performance, the number related to the specific count number may be displayed without changing. However, when the winning game is over, the number is corrected to the correct specific count number. In this way, by completing the winning game, it is possible for the player to grasp the number related to the correct specific count number.

The invention according to means L7 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means L1 to means L6,
The production control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than half (40000) of the reference number, the specific count number performance can be started,
The game machine is characterized in that when the specific count number is less than half (40000) of the reference number, the specific count number presentation is not started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is less than half of the reference number, the specific count number presentation indicating the specific count number is not started. Thus, in a situation where the specific count number is not sufficiently close to the reference number, it is possible to make the player unaware of the numbers related to the specific count number.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means L1 to L7 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable on the basis that the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means can execute a specific count number effect indicating a number related to the specific count number. They differ in some respects. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means M>
The invention according to means M1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) provided with operable predetermined operation means (normal button 40 and select button),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
A game characterized in that a special operation effect (display of an input reflection image NP shown in FIG. 87(D)) can be executed based on an operation to the predetermined operation means after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, when the player operates the predetermined operation means after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the special operation effect is executed. As a result, the player can be entertained even after the game becomes unexecutable.

The invention according to means M2 is
In the gaming machine according to means M1,
The production control means is
After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, it is possible to accept characters based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (see FIG. 87(C)),
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to display the accepted character ("clear BY taro") as the special operation presentation (see FIG. 87(D)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the game is disabled, the player inputs any character based on the operation of the predetermined operating means. As a result, characters input by the player are displayed as a special operation effect. In this way, it is possible to display an arbitrary character to the player as a commemoration that the specific count number has reached or exceeded the reference number, thereby giving the player a special sense of accomplishment.

The invention according to means M3 is
In the gaming machine according to means M2,
The production control means is
After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the acceptance is accompanied by an achievement image (achievement image OF shown in FIG. 87B) suggesting that the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to display characters ("Clear BY Taro") (see FIG. 87(C)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the characters input by the player are displayed along with the achievement image suggesting that the specific count number has reached or exceeded the reference number. . As a result, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction by showing the achievement image and the characters that the player has input.

The invention according to means M4 is
In the gaming machine according to means M2 or means M3,
Equipped with operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
Based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, while erasing the game information related to the game, without erasing the character information of the accepted characters (character information of "Clear BY Taro"),
The production control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that after the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the character being accepted can be displayed based on the character information (see FIG. 88(B)). be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the power is cut off after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. After that, the game information related to the game is erased based on the fact that the specific operation means is operated when the power is turned on. However, at this time, the character information of the accepted character is not erased. As a result, even after the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, it is possible to display the characters input by the player whose specific count number is greater than or equal to the reference number as a memorial.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means M1 to M4 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game can be controlled to be unexecutable on the basis that the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the effect control means can control the game to be unexecutable, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the operation to the predetermined operation means The difference is that special operation effects can be executed based on. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means N>
The invention according to means N1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific number of counts equals or exceeds a predetermined reference number (80000), it is possible to operate an over-prize preventing function that controls the game to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) is),
The production control means is
After the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, a special effect (effect after over-prize abnormal operation (special SP reach (Fig. 89 (B)), special cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2)), special opening effect (see FIGS. 91 (B-2) and (C-2)), special customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 ( The game machine is characterized by being able to execute (see B-2))).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, the over-prize ball prevention function that makes the game unexecutable is activated. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, a special effect that is not executed before the over-prize prevention function is activated may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who grasped the special effect recognize that the game machine has been provided with an excessive number of prize balls, and to give a sense of exhilaration.

The invention according to means N2 is
In the gaming machine according to means N1,
Equipped with operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
Based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, while erasing the game information related to the game, without erasing the operation information indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function has been operated,
The production control means is
Even if the game information is erased, the special effect (effect after over-prize ball abnormal operation (special SP reach (see FIG. 89B)), special cut-in notice effect ( 90 (B-2)), a special opening effect (see FIGS. 91 (B-2) and (C-2)), and a special guest waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2))) can be executed. It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated when the power is turned on and the game information relating to the game is erased, the operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function has been operated is not erased. Therefore, even if the information related to the game is erased after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the player is made aware of the special performance that is not executed before the over-prizing preventing function is activated. Is possible.

The invention according to means N3 is
In the gaming machine according to means N1 or means N2,
The production control means can execute a ready-to-win production after the production patterns (EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) become ready-to-win,
The ready-to-win effect includes, as the special effect, a special ready-to-win effect (special SP reach (see FIG. 89(B))) that is not executed before the over-prized ball prevention function is activated. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the special ready-to-win effect that is not executed before the over-prize preventing function is activated may be executed. . Therefore, it is possible for the player who understands the special ready-to-win effect to enjoy the novel ready-to-reach effect and to recognize that the game machine has been provided with excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means N4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to means N3,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the winning game will be executed,
The notice effect includes, as the special effect, a special notice effect (special cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 90 (B-2))) that is not executed before the function for preventing over-prize balls is activated. It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, a special notice performance that is not executed before the over-prize prevention function is activated may be executed. . Therefore, it is possible for the player who grasps the special notice effect to enjoy the novel notice effect and to recognize that the game machine has been provided with excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means N5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to means N4,
The game control means is capable of executing a winning game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
The production control means can execute a winning production (jackpot production (opening production, round production, ending production)) during execution of the winning game,
The winning effect includes, as the special effect, a special winning effect that is not executed before the over-prizing prevention function is activated (special opening effect (see FIG. 91 (B-2) (C-2)). ) is a game machine characterized by having

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, after the power is turned on after the over-prize preventing function is activated, a special winning effect that is not executed before the over-prize preventing function is activated may be executed. . Therefore, it is possible for a player who has grasped the special winning effect to enjoy the novel winning effect and to recognize that the game machine has been provided with an excessive number of prize balls.

The invention according to means N6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means N1 to means N5,
The effect control means can execute a customer waiting effect indicating that the variable effect is not being executed,
In the customer waiting effect, as the special effect, there is a special customer waiting effect (special customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 92 (B-2))) which is not executed before the over-prizing prevention function is activated. It is a game machine characterized by having

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the special customer waiting effect that is not executed before the over-prize prevention function is activated can be executed. be. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play by making the player who has grasped the special customer waiting effect recognize that the game machine has been provided with an excessive number of prize balls.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means N1 to N6 is that the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , based on the fact that the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, it is possible to operate an over-prize prevention function for controlling the game to be unexecutable, and based on the operation of the specific operation means, the game can be played. While erasing the game information related to the above, without erasing the operation information indicating that the over-prize prevention function has been activated, after the power is turned on after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the over-prize prevention function is activated. The difference is that it is possible to execute a special effect that has never been executed before. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means O>
The invention according to means O1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) provided with predetermined notification means (image display device 50 (display screen 50a), speaker 52, frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54),
The game control means can control the game to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped),
When the control for disabling the game is continued after the power is turned on, the notification means provides a special abnormal mode (displayed on the display screen 50a) indicating that the control for disabling the game is continued. Over-the-ball abnormality maintenance image KRX, the voice output from the speaker 52, ``The over-the-ball abnormality has not been canceled. Please clear the RAM.'' 93(A) and 93(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined stop condition is established, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. After that, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the control that disables the execution of the game may continue. In this case, the notification means will be in a special abnormal mode indicating that the control that made the game unexecutable is being continued. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade to surely understand that the control that made the game unexecutable is still continuing after the power is turned on.

The invention according to means O2 is
In the gaming machine according to means O1,
Equipped with operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the specific operation means is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to cancel the control that makes the game unexecutable (when the RAM is cleared, the control that makes the game unexecutable can be cancelled). can be),
Based on the fact that the specific operation means is not operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to continue the control that makes the game unexecutable (the control that makes the game unexecutable cannot be canceled unless the RAM is cleared) ) is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on, the employee of the gaming parlor may not be operating the specific operation means. be. In this case, even though the control that disables the execution of games continues, there is a possibility that the employees of the gaming arcade may misunderstand that the gaming machine is capable of executing games. However, even in such a case, since the notification means will be in a special abnormal mode, it is possible to make the staff of the amusement arcade reliably grasp that the control that disables the execution of the game is continuing. be.

The invention according to means O3 is
In the gaming machine according to means O1 or means O2,
A game characterized in that the special abnormal mode is a mode that is shown only when the control that disables the game after the power is turned on continues (see FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B)). machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the special abnormal mode indicated by the notification means is a mode that is indicated only when the control that disables the execution of the game continues after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the employee of the game arcade who has grasped the special abnormal mode to recognize that the abnormality has occurred after the power is turned on.

The invention according to means O4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to means O3,
When the special abnormal mode occurs after the power is turned on, the notification means continues the special abnormal mode until the power is cut off (see FIGS. 93A and 93B). be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the notification means enters the special abnormal mode after the power is turned on, the special abnormal mode continues until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor to easily notice that the notification means is in the special abnormal mode after the power is turned on.

The invention according to means O5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to means O4,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (stop the game control process and the launch control process) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more possible).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. After the game becomes unexecutable, the power is cut off and then turned on again, and the control that disables the game may continue. In this case, since the notification means is set to the special abnormal mode, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade to surely understand that the control that made the game unexecutable is still continuing.

The invention according to means O6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means O1 to means O5,
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism),
It is characterized in that the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on determining that the specific abnormality exists as the establishment of the predetermined stop condition. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when a specific abnormality occurs. After the game becomes unexecutable, the power is cut off and then turned on again, and the control that disables the game may continue. In this case, since the notification means is set to the special abnormal mode, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade to surely understand that the control that made the game unexecutable is still continuing.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-70611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables execution of the game. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue playing the game. Here, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the power is cut off and then turned on by an employee of the game arcade. In this case, an employee of the amusement arcade who turns on the power before the start of business hours can cancel the control that disables the execution of the game, even though the control that disables the execution of the game continues. There is a risk of misunderstanding. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the employee of the game arcade whose power is turned on before the start of business hours is not sufficiently aware of the fact that the game machine was controlled so that the game could not be executed the previous day. In these cases, if business hours are started while the control that disables the game continues, the player may not be able to play. Therefore, the invention according to the means O1 to O6 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-70611, in which the notifying means, when the control that disables the game after power-on is continued, is a special abnormal mode indicating that the disabled control continues. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of reliably recognizing that the control that made the game unexecutable is still continuing after the power is turned on (producing an action and effect). is.

<Means P>
The invention according to means P1 is
a ball-entering portion (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, second starting hole 12, specific area 16);
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
If it is determined to be a hit in the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
When a predetermined stop condition (the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more and the illegal magnetism is detected) is established, the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped and ),
A game movable member (normal AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are movable (see FIG. 95).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, there is a risk that the game movable member will jam the ball. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game is movable so that the ease with which the game ball enters the ball entering portion changes from when the power is turned on until the hit determination process is started. The member moves. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

The invention according to means P2 is
In the gaming machine described in means P1,
Equipped with detection means (first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a, second starting hole sensor, specific area sensor 16a) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entering part,
The game control means is
When the game movable member is moved after the power is turned on and before the hit determination process is started, even if the game ball enters the ball entry part, the detection of the detection means is invalidated. is possible (the sensor detection invalidation process of step S035 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to eliminate ball jamming by moving the game movable member after the power is turned on. However, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the ball entry portion due to the cancellation of the ball bite. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the ball entry portion, it is possible to prevent an unintended award from being given after the power is turned on by invalidating the detection of the detection means.

The invention according to means P3 is
In the gaming machine according to means P1 or means P2,
The game control means is
If the game is not controlled to be unexecutable before the power is turned on, the game movable member is not moved (the ball biting prevention mode is not set) from when the power is turned on until the hit determination process is started.
If the control that makes the game unexecutable is canceled after the power is turned on, the game movable member can be moved (set to the ball biting prevention mode) from when the power is turned on until the hit determination process is started. A game machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the control that made the game unexecutable is canceled after the power is turned on, the movable game member moves after the power is turned on until the hit determination process is started. On the other hand, if the game is not controlled to be unexecutable before the power is turned on, the game movable member does not move. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game movable member from moving every time after the power is turned on.

The invention according to means P4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means P1 to means P3,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (stop the game control process and the launch control process) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more possible).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, when the game becomes unexecutable, the game movable member stops moving, and there is a risk that the ball will get stuck. Therefore, by moving the game movable member after the power is turned on, it is possible to eliminate the ball biting.

The invention according to means P5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means P1 to means P4,
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism),
It is characterized in that the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on determining that the specific abnormality exists as the establishment of the predetermined stop condition. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when a specific abnormality occurs. At this time, since the game movable member stops moving, there is a possibility that the ball will be bitten. Therefore, by moving the game movable member after the power is turned on, it is possible to eliminate the ball biting.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-70611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables execution of the game. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue playing the game. Here, when the game control means controls the game to be unexecutable, it stops executing the movement of the game movable member with respect to the ball-entering portion. However, for the game control means, by stopping the game movable member at an unexpected timing, there is a possibility that the game movable member may cause ball biting. Therefore, in the invention according to means P1 to P5, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-70611, the game control means controls the game to be unexecutable until the power is shut off. The difference is that the game movable member can be moved so as to change the ease with which the game ball enters the part. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of eliminating ball jamming (to produce an effect).

<Means Q>
The invention according to means Q1 is
a ball-entering portion (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15, second starting hole 12, specific area 16);
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
When a predetermined stop condition (the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more and the illegal magnetism is detected) is established, the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped and ),
A game movable member (usually AT opening/closing member 14k, VAT opening/closing member 15k, electric chew opening/closing member 12k, distribution member 16k) are movable (see FIG. 99).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable, there is a risk that the game movable member will jam the ball. Therefore, the game movable member moves such that the ease with which the game ball enters the ball entry portion changes from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable until the power is shut off. As a result, even if the game movable member causes ball jamming, it is possible to automatically eliminate the ball jamming.

The invention according to means Q2 is
In the gaming machine according to means Q1,
Equipped with detection means (first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a, second starting hole sensor, specific area sensor 16a) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entering part,
The game control means is
When the game movable member is moved from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable to when the power is cut off, even if the game ball enters the ball entry part, the detection of the detection means is invalidated. (The sensor detection invalidation process of step S047 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to eliminate ball jamming by moving the game movable member after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. However, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the ball entry portion due to the cancellation of the ball bite. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the ball entry portion, by invalidating the detection of the detection means, it is possible to prevent unintended awarding of prize balls after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. be.

The invention according to means Q3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Q1 or means Q2,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the establishment of the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (stop the game control process and the launch control process) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more possible).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, when the game becomes unexecutable, the game movable member stops moving, and there is a risk that the ball will get stuck. Therefore, by moving the game movable member from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable to when the power is cut off, it is possible to eliminate the above-described ball biting.

The invention according to means Q4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means Q1 to means Q3,
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism),
It is characterized in that the game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on determining that the specific abnormality exists as the establishment of the predetermined stop condition. It is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when a specific abnormality occurs. At this time, since the game movable member stops moving, there is a possibility that the ball will be bitten. Therefore, by moving the game movable member from when the game is controlled to be unexecutable to when the power is cut off, it is possible to eliminate the above-described ball biting.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-70611, when illegal magnetism is detected (when a predetermined stop condition is satisfied), the game control microcomputer (game control means) disables execution of the game. Control. Therefore, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the player cannot continue playing the game. Here, when the game control means controls the game to be unexecutable, it stops executing the movement of the game movable member with respect to the ball-entering portion. However, for the game control means, by stopping the game movable member at an unexpected timing, there is a possibility that the game movable member may cause ball biting. Therefore, the invention according to the means Q1 to Q4 is, for the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-70611, the game control means, after the power is turned on, before the hit determination process is started, the ball entering section The difference is that the game movable member can be moved so as to change the ease with which a game ball enters the ball. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of eliminating ball jamming (to produce an effect).

<Means R>
The invention according to means R1 is
a power failure holding storage means (FRAM 125) capable of holding stored information in a power failure state;
Specific control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing specific control processing (processing for executing over-prize ball abnormality notice effect) based on the specific game ball number (number of difference balls) related to the number of game balls; In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising
The power interruption holding storage means stores predetermined storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls, which triggers the execution of the specific control process, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (75000) Information indicating that the number of balls is 75000 or more, threshold setting information pattern F1) can be stored,
The specific control means is
Based on the reception of the specific information (inspection command), the predetermined storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage means is changed to the specific value (60000 ) or more (for example, information indicating that the number of difference balls that triggers the start of the over-prize abnormal notice effect is 60000 or more, threshold setting information pattern D1) can be rewritten,
The specific control process can be executed based on the number of specific game balls becoming equal to or greater than the specific value. ) is a game machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the power interruption holding storage means stores the predetermined storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls used as a trigger for execution of the specific control process is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. However, upon receiving the specific information, the specific control means changes the predetermined storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage means to a specific number of game balls that triggers execution of the specific control process. It is rewritable to specific storage information indicating that. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific control process when the number of specific game balls becomes not less than the predetermined value but more than the specific value.

The invention according to means R2 is
In the gaming machine according to means R1,
The specific control means receives a specific command (inspection command) as the specific information from the outside of the gaming machine (inspection board 400), and the predetermined control means stored in the power interruption holding storage information. This gaming machine is characterized in that the memory information can be rewritten to the specific memory information (see FIG. 104).

According to the game machine of this configuration, the specific command is transmitted from the outside of the game machine to the specific control means during mass production before shipment. Thereby, the specific control means can rewrite the predetermined value information stored in the power failure holding storage means to the specific storage information. As a result, before the game machine goes on the market, it is possible to set a specification in which a specific control process is executed when the number of specific game balls reaches a specific value or more.

The invention according to means R3 is
In the gaming machine according to means R1,
When the predetermined storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage information is rewritten with the specific storage information, the storage information stored in the power interruption holding storage information is rewritten (for example, FIG. 105 ( A) is a gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a rewrite notification means (image display device 50) indicating "99D1D1").

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined memory information stored in the power interruption holding memory information is rewritten to the specific memory information, the rewrite notification means outputs the memory information stored in the power interruption holding memory information. has been rewritten. This makes it possible to confirm that the rewriting of the stored information with the power failure holding storage information has been performed correctly.

The invention according to means R4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means R1 to R3,
The specific control means is a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling production,
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of executing a specific effect (over-prize ball abnormality notice effect) as the specific control process.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the effect control means can rewrite the specific storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls, which triggers execution of the specific effect, is equal to or greater than the specific value in the power interruption holding storage means. Thereby, it is possible to execute a specific effect when the number of specific game balls reaches a specific value or more.

The invention according to means R5 is
In the gaming machine according to means R4,
Equipped with operable operation means (select button),
The production control means receives, as the specific information, operation information (operation information indicating "down, down, left, right, right") based on an operation to the operation means (for example, operation of "down, down, left, right, right"). Based on this, the predetermined memory information stored in the power interruption holding memory means can be rewritten to the specific memory information.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the operation means is operated, the effect control means receives the operation information based on the operation to the operation means. As a result, the power failure holding storage means is rewritten to the specific storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls, which triggers the execution of the specific effect, is greater than or equal to the specific value. In this way, by operating the operation means, it is possible to change the value of the specific number of game balls that triggers execution of the specific effect.

The invention according to means R6 is
In the gaming machine according to means R4,
Equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game,
The game control means is
As the specific number of game balls, it is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
The production control means is
Based on the fact that the specific measurement number becomes equal to or greater than the specific value (60000) which is smaller than the reference number, the specific effect is a prior notice effect for notifying that the game will become unexecutable (excess prize ball abnormal notice effect). ) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Here, before the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the reference number, a pre-announcement performance for notifying that the game will become unexecutable is executed. However, depending on market conditions and trends, there are cases where it is desired to change the value of the specific measurement number that triggers the execution of the pre-announcement effect. Therefore, in this case, the effect control means can rewrite the specific storage information indicating that the specific measurement number that triggers the execution of the advance notice effect is greater than or equal to the specific value in the power interruption holding storage means. Thereby, it is possible to change the value of the specific measurement number that triggers the execution of the pre-announcement effect.

By the way, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-012662 is provided with non-volatile storage means (power-off holding storage means) capable of holding stored information in a power-off state. Here, the specific control means may execute a specific control process based on the number of specific game balls related to the number of game balls. In this case, it is conceivable to store predetermined storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls, which triggers execution of the specific control process, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value in the power interruption holding storage means. In this case, the predetermined storage information can be stored even in the power failure state. In other words, it is possible to maintain the specification that the number of specific game balls, which triggers the execution of the specific control process, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value regardless of the power outage. However, as time passes from the time of development, there is a case where the number of specific game balls, which triggers the execution of specific control processing, is desired to be changed to a specific value or more instead of a predetermined value due to market conditions and trends. In this case, since the predetermined memory information is already stored in the power interruption holding memory means, the memory information cannot be rewritten. Therefore, the invention according to the means R1 to R6 is a game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-012662. When receiving the specific information, the specific control means uses the specific memory information stored in the power interruption holding storage means as an execution trigger for the specific control process. It is different in that it can be rewritten to specific storage information indicating that the number of specific game balls is greater than or equal to a specific value, and that specific control processing can be executed based on the number of specific game balls being equal to or greater than the specific value. ing. Thus, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of rewriting the stored information stored in the power failure holding storage means (to produce an effect).

<Means S>
The invention according to means S1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
A case where the game is controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined first reference number (20000) or more;
A case where the game is controlled to be unexecutable (stopping the game control process and the launch control process) based on the specific count number becoming a second reference number (80000) or more, which is larger than the first reference number A game machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the first reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. However, in the gaming machine with this configuration, the game may become unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls reaches or exceeds the second reference number, which is larger than the first reference number. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine by providing a plurality of values of the specific measurement number for making the game unexecutable.

The invention according to means S2 is
In the gaming machine described in means S1,
The game control means is
After controlling the game to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the first reference number, based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a second reference number greater than the first reference number 110 and 111).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the game becomes unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the first reference number, the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the second reference number, which is greater than the first reference number. The game becomes unplayable based on the In this way, it is possible to make the player who has managed to make the specific count number reach the first reference number want to make the specific count number reach the second reference number next time.

The invention according to means S3 is
In the gaming machine described in means S2,
Equipped with operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
When the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the first reference number, the game is controlled to be executable based on the operation of the specific operation means. 110 and 111).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the power supply is cut off after the game becomes unexecutable based on the specific count number being greater than or equal to the first reference number. After that, when the power is turned on, the game becomes executable based on the operation of the specific operation means. However, at this time, the specific count is not deleted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to restart the game from the continuation after the specific count number becomes equal to or greater than the first reference number.

The invention according to means S4 is
In the gaming machine described in means S3,
The game control means is
When the power is turned on after the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the second reference number, the game is controlled to be executable based on the operation of the specific operation means. On the other hand, the gaming machine is characterized by erasing the measured specific count (see FIG. 111).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the power is cut off after the game becomes unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than the second reference number. After that, when the power is turned on, the game becomes executable based on the operation of the specific operation means. However, at this time, the specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible for the player to restart the game from a state in which the specific count has been erased.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, in the invention according to means S1 to S4, the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. a case where the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number becoming equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference number; This is different in some respects from the case where the game is controlled to be unexecutable based on this. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means T>
The invention according to means T1 is
A game control board (100) capable of controlling games;
A specific control board (performance control board 120, payout control board 170) different from the game control board,
The game control board is
The game can be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing can be stopped) based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition (the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, the illegal magnetism is detected) is),
After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, it is possible to transmit a specific command (in-operation command, prize ball instruction command, lower tray full instruction command) to the specific control board (see FIGS. 125 and 127). It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game control board can transmit the specific command to the specific control board after making the game unexecutable. In this way, the game control board can cause the specific control board to execute the process based on the specific command even after the game is disabled.

The invention according to means T2 is
In the gaming machine described in means T1,
The specific control board is a payout control board (170) capable of controlling the payout of game balls,
The game control board is
Before the game is controlled to be unexecutable, it is possible to transmit an operating command indicating that the game is operating to the payout control board (see FIG. 122),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the operating command can be transmitted as the specific command to the payout control board after the game is disabled (see FIGS. 125 and 127).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the game control board transmits an operating command indicating that the game is in operation to the payout control board before controlling the game to be unexecutable, and after controlling the game to be unexecutable You can still send commands while it's running. Thereby, even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the payout control board can grasp that the game control board is in operation and perform processing.

The invention according to means T3 is
In the gaming machine described in means T1,
Equipped with a payout control board (170) capable of controlling the payout of game balls,
The specific control board is a production control board (120) capable of controlling production,
The payout control board can transmit a predetermined command (prize ball start command, lower tray full command) to the game control board after the game is controlled to be unexecutable,
Said game control board, after controlling the game to be unexecutable, based on receiving said predetermined command, to said effect control board said specific command (prize ball instruction command, bottom plate full instruction command) can be transmitted. can be,
After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the effect control board executes effects related to the payout of the game balls (large winning opening winning effect, lower tray full error effect) based on receiving the specific command. (See FIGS. 126(A) and 126(B)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the game control board transmits the specific command to the effect control board based on receiving the predetermined command from the payout control board after controlling the game to be unexecutable. Thereby, the effect control board can execute the effect related to the payout of the game ball based on receiving the specific command even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

The invention according to means T4 is
In the gaming machine according to means T3,
The game control board is
It is possible to determine whether there is a specific abnormality (unauthorized magnetism),
Based on the determination that there is a specific abnormality, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (the game control process and the launch control process can be stopped),
The production control board is
When it is determined that there is the specific abnormality by the game control board, specific abnormality notification (display of the red background image RE and the magnetic detection abnormality image FR1) can be executed (see FIG. 124 (B)),
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific command is received while the specific abnormality notification is being executed, an effect related to the payout of game balls is not executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when there is a specific abnormality, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. In this case, the effect control board executes specific abnormality notification. However, even if the performance control board receives a specific command from the game control board during the execution of the specific abnormality notification, it does not execute the performance related to the payout of the game. In this way, when the game is controlled to be unexecutable due to a specific abnormality, the specific abnormality notification can be executed with priority over the performance related to the payout of the game ball.

The invention according to means T5 is
In the gaming machine described in means T1,
Equipped with an abnormality detection means (lower tray full switch, storage tank monitoring sensor) capable of detecting an abnormality in the game machine,
The specific control board is a production control board (120) capable of controlling production,
The game control board, after controlling the game to be unexecutable, based on the detection of the abnormality by the abnormality detection means, to the production control board as the specific command abnormal command (lower tray full instruction command, no storage tank instruction command ) can be transmitted (see FIGS. 125(2) and 127(2)),
After the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the effect control board can notify the abnormality of the game machine based on the reception of the abnormality command (executable lower tray full error effect, no game balls in the storage tank) It is a gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a no-ball notification effect indicating that.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the game control board can transmit an abnormality command to the effect control board based on the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means after controlling the game to be unexecutable. Thus, the game machine is characterized in that the performance control board can inform the abnormality of the game machine based on the reception of the abnormality command even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable.

The invention according to means T6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means T1 to means T4,
The game control board is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
As the predetermined stop condition, it is possible to control the game to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing can be stopped) based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000). There is) is a game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game control board controls the game to be unexecutable when the specific counted number based on the number of prize balls is greater than or equal to the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. Then, the game control board can transmit a specific command to the specific control board even after controlling the game to be unexecutable so as not to award excessive prize balls.

By the way, the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-248703 includes a game control board capable of controlling a game, and an effect control board and payout control board (specific control board) different from the game control board. Then, the game control board controls the game to be unexecutable when illegal magnetism is detected (based on establishment of a predetermined stop condition). Here, after the game is controlled to be unexecutable, the game control board ceases to operate, so commands cannot be transmitted to the specific control board. Therefore, it is preferable that the specific control board can execute the processing based on the command from the game control board even after the game is controlled to be unexecutable. Therefore, the invention according to means T1 to T6 is capable of transmitting a specific command to a specific control board after the game control board controls the game to be unexecutable for the game machine described in JP-A-2017-248703. They differ in some respects. As a result, the game control board solves the problem of providing a gaming machine that can cause a specific control board to execute processing based on a specific command even after the game has been disabled. It is possible to perform

<Means U>
The invention according to means U1 is
A production control board (120) capable of controlling production,
a display means (image display device 50) capable of displaying an image;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising an image control board (140) capable of executing display control for displaying an image on the display means,
A specific effect means (illumination display device 57) connected to the image control board so as to be driven and controlled (see FIG. 132),
The effect control board can transmit a drive permission command (illumination permission command) to the image control board when the power is turned on,
When the drive permission command is received, the image control board is capable of executing drive control of the specific effect means (illumination control processing in step S5023). , the game machine is characterized in that the drive control of the specific drive means is not executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific effect means is connected to the image control board so as to be driven and controlled. Then, when the image control board receives a drive permission command from the performance control board with power-on, it can execute drive control of the specific performance means, but does not receive the drive permission command from the performance control board. In that case, drive control of the specific effect means is not executed. Thus, the specific effect means can be driven under the condition that the image control board receives the drive permission command from the effect control board when the power is turned on, and is prevented from being driven regardless of the control of the effect control board. Is possible.

The invention according to means U2 is
In the gaming machine described in means U1,
The production control board is
Upon turning on the power, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the game machine (the combination of the game board 1 and the back unit 1U is correct), the drive permission command is transmitted to the image control board. (executes illumination permission command output processing in step S4034). , the gaming machine is characterized in that the drive permission command is not transmitted to the image control board.

According to the game machine of this configuration, the effect control board transmits the drive permission command to the image control board when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the game machine when the power is turned on. On the other hand, the effect control board does not transmit the drive permission command to the image control board when it is determined that the game machine is abnormal. Thus, the specific effect means can be driven only when the effect control board judges that there is no abnormality in the game machine when the power is turned on.

The invention according to means U3 is
In the gaming machine described in means U2,
When the image control board receives the drive permission command along with power-on, the initial operation of the specific effect means (illumination initial light emission shown in FIGS. 133A, 133B, and 133C) is executed. (executes illumination initial light emission processing in step S5012).On the other hand, when the driving permission command is not received, the initial operation of the specific effect means is not executed.

According to the game machine of this configuration, when the effect control board determines that the game machine is not abnormal as the power is turned on, the initial operation of the specific effect means is executed. On the other hand, when the effect control board judges that the game machine is abnormal with the power-on, the initial operation of the specific effect means is not executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the initial operation of the specific effect means from being executed even though the effect control board determines that there is no abnormality in the game machine when the power is turned on.

The invention according to means U4 is
In the gaming machine described in means U2,
The production control board is
It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the combination of the first unit (game board 1) and the second unit (back unit 1U) (the determination process of step S4031 can be executed),
When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the combination of the first unit and the second unit when the power is turned on, the drive permission command is transmitted to the image control board (illumination permission command in step S4034). on the other hand, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the combination of the first unit and the second unit, the drive permission command is not transmitted to the image control board. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the performance control board determines that there is no abnormality in the combination of the first unit and the second unit with the power-on, the drive permission command is sent to the image control board. , the specific rendering means can be driven. That is, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the combination of the first unit and the second unit, the drive permission command is not transmitted to the image control board, and the specific effect means cannot be driven. Thus, the specific effect means can be driven depending on whether the combination of the first unit and the second unit is normal.

The invention according to means U5 is
In the gaming machine described in means U4,
A game board (YU) arranged inside an openable and closable game machine frame (2),
In the game board, a game board (1) having a game area (6) in which game balls can flow down and a back unit (1U) arranged behind the game board are combined (see FIG. 134). ),
The first unit is the game board (1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second unit is the back unit (1U).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the drive permission command is transmitted to the image control board only when the effect control board judges that there is no abnormality in the combination of the game board and the back unit when the power is turned on. Then, the specific rendering means can be driven. Thus, the specific effect means can be driven depending on whether the combination of the game board and the back unit is normal.

The invention according to means U6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means U2 to means U5,
a specific light emitting means (illumination display device 57) connected to the image control board so as to be controlled to emit light (see FIG. 132);
In the gaming machine, the specific effect means is the specific light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific light emission means, which is the specific effect means, is connected to the image control board so as to be controlled in light emission. Then, the effect control board transmits a drive permission command to the image control board only when it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in the game machine when the power is turned on. In this way, the specific light emitting means can emit light only when the performance control board judges that there is no abnormality in the game machine as the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to prevent the specific light emitting means from emitting light even though it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, an effect control board capable of controlling effects, an image display device (display means) capable of displaying images, and display control for displaying images on the image display device and a lamp (light emitting means, specific effect means) connected to the effect control board so as to be light emission controlled (drive controlled). As described above, conventionally, the effect control board often controls the light emission of the lamp, and the image control board controls the display of the image display device. Here, in order to facilitate the synchronization of the display control by the display means and the drive control by the specific effect means, the image control board controls the display control by the display means and the drive control by the specific effect means. It is conceivable to do both. In other words, it is possible to conceive a configuration in which not only the display means is connected to the image control board so as to be display-controlled, but also the specific effect means is connected so as to be drive-controlled. However, in the case of this configuration, since the effect control board does not execute the drive control of the specific effect means, the specific effect means may be driven independently of the control of the effect control board. Therefore, the invention according to the means U1 to U6 is provided with a specific effect means connected so as to be driven and controlled by the image control board for the game machine described in JP 2017-209170 A, and the effect control board is When power is turned on, a drive permission command can be transmitted to the image control board, and when the image control board receives the drive permission command, the image control board can execute drive control of the specific effect means. The difference is that when no command is received, drive control of the specific drive means is not executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a game machine capable of preventing the specific effect means from being driven independently of the control of the effect control board (to produce an effect).

<Means V>
The invention according to means V1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising display means (image display device 50) capable of displaying,
The game control means is
The identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process (jackpot determination process) can be variably displayed,
It is possible to calculate a specific measurement number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The display means is
When the identification pattern is in a customer waiting state in which the identification pattern is not variably displayed, it can be displayed in a comprehension mode (meter image COM) in which the specific count can be comprehended (Fig. 147 (D), Fig. 148 (C) ( D) is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the display means may display the specific count number in a comprehensible manner in spite of the customer waiting state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine which gaming machine should be used to start the game before starting the game.

The invention according to means V2 is
In the gaming machine described in means V1,
The game control means can measure the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls) shot by the player,
The display means is
When the number of fired balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls (12000) while in the customer waiting state, the specified counted number can be displayed in the comprehension mode (meter image COM) (Fig. 147 ( D), see FIGS. 148(C) and (D)),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the number of shot balls is less than the specific number of balls (12000) while in the customer waiting state, the specific count number is not displayed in the comprehension mode. be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the number of shot balls is greater than or equal to the specific number of balls while waiting for a customer, the specific count number may be displayed in a comprehensible manner, while the number of shot balls may be displayed. When the number of balls is less than the specific number of balls, the specific count number is not displayed in a comprehensible manner. As a result, in a situation where the number of shot balls is not sufficiently large, the specific count number is not displayed in a comprehensible state while the customer is waiting, so it is possible for the player not to worry about the specific count number more than necessary. be.

The invention according to means V3 is
In the gaming machine described in means V2,
The display means is
When the number of shot balls is a predetermined number (24000) or more, which is greater than the specific number (12000), when the customer is waiting, the number of shot balls is the specific number (12000) or more. and the ratio of the display time for displaying the specific count number in the comprehension mode is increased (see comparison between FIGS. 147 and 148) compared to when the number of balls is less than the predetermined number (24000). It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of balls, which is greater than the specific number of balls, when the game machine is in the customer waiting state, the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the specific number of balls and the predetermined number of balls. Compared to the case where the number is less than the number, the ratio of the display time in which the specific count is displayed in a comprehensible manner is increased. As a result, the greater the number of shot balls, the longer the gaming machine has been played, and the more easily the player can grasp the current specific count number.

The invention according to means V4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means V1 to means V3,
The game control means is
A game machine characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping game control processing and firing control processing) based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (95000). .

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number is greater than or equal to the reference number. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

By the way, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-028948, the game control means counts (measures) the number of difference balls (specific count number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player. Then, in order not to award excessive prize balls to the player, the game is controlled to be unexecutable when the difference number of balls becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number. Here, a player who is looking for a gaming machine to start a game may want to know what the specific count is at the present time. However, when the identification pattern is in a state of waiting for a customer with no variable display, the number of specific measurements is not displayed. Therefore, the invention according to means V1 to V4 is a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-028948, in which the display means displays a specific count number when the customer waiting state in which the identification pattern is not variably displayed. It is different in that it can be displayed in a comprehensible manner. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that makes it easy to determine which gaming machine should be used to start a game before starting the game (to produce an effect). be.

<Means W>
The invention according to means W1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) comprising display means (image display device 50) capable of displaying,
The game control means is
When a win (jackpot) is determined in a win determination process (jackpot determination process) in a normal game state, it can be controlled to a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
It is possible to calculate a specific measurement number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
It is possible to measure the number of shot balls fired by the player (total number of shot balls),
The display means is
In the normal game state, when the specific count number is displayed in a comprehensible mode (meter image COM) (see FIG. 149(B)), and when the specific count number is not displayed in the comprehension mode. and there is
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls (24000) in the normal game state, the specific count number is higher than the case where the number of shot balls is less than the specified number of balls (24000). is displayed in the comprehension mode (see the tables shown in FIGS. 154A and 154B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the specific count number may be displayed in a comprehensible manner during the normal game state. However, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls in the normal game state, the display time during which the specific number of counts is displayed in a comprehensible manner rather than when the number of shot balls is less than the specified number of balls. increase in proportion. As a result, as the number of shot balls increases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the current specific count number in the normal game state as a privilege for playing the game for a long time.

The invention according to means W2 is
In the gaming machine described in means W1,
The display means is
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the first specified number of balls (24000) in the normal game state, the number of shot balls is less than the first specified number of balls (24000). By increasing the display time ratio of displaying the specific number of measurements in the comprehension mode (meter image COM) (see the tables shown in FIGS. 159(A) and (B)),
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the second specified number of balls (36000) which is greater than the first specified number of balls (24000) in the normal game state, the number of shot balls is the first specified number. The display time ratio for displaying the specific count number in the comprehension mode (meter image COM) is increased (Fig. 159(B) (See the table shown in (C)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the first specified number of balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls is less than the first specified number of balls. The ratio of the display time in which the number of measurements is displayed in a comprehensible manner increases. Furthermore, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the second specified number of balls, which is greater than the first specified number of balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the first specified number of balls and the second specified number of balls. Compared to the case where the number of balls is less than the number of balls, the ratio of the display time in which the specific count number is displayed in a comprehensible manner is increased. In this way, as the number of shot balls increases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to gradually grasp the current specific count number in the normal game state.

The invention according to means W3 is
In the gaming machine described in means W1,
The display means is
In the normal game state, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than a certain number of balls (12000) which is less than the specified number of balls, the specific count number is displayed in the comprehension mode (meter image COM). While there is a case (see FIG. 149 (B)),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the number of shot balls is less than the fixed number of balls (12000) in the normal game state, the specific count number is not displayed in the comprehension mode. be.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than a certain number of balls, which is less than the specified number of balls, the specific count number may be displayed in a comprehensible manner. If it is less than the number, the specific count number will not be displayed in a comprehensible manner. As a result, when the number of shot balls is not sufficiently large, the specific count number is not displayed in a comprehensible state in the normal game state, so that the player does not need to worry about the specific count number more than necessary. be.

The invention according to means W4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means W1 to means W3,
The game control means is
A game machine characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (stopping game control processing and firing control processing) based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (95000). .

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number is greater than or equal to the reference number. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

By the way, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-028948, the game control means counts (measures) the number of difference balls (specific count number) based on the number of prize balls given to the player. Then, in order not to award excessive prize balls to the player, the game is controlled to be unexecutable when the difference number of balls becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number. Here, a player who has been playing the game for a long time in the normal game state but cannot win a game may want to know how much the specific measurement number is at the present time. However, when the player is in the normal game state, the number of specific counts is not displayed. Therefore, the invention according to the means W1 to W4 is based on the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-028948. is different in that it is possible to increase the display time ratio for displaying the specific count number in a grasping manner, compared to the case where the number of shot balls is less than the specified number of balls. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that makes it easier for the player to grasp the current specific count number after playing the game for a long time.

YU... Game board 1... Game board 1U... Back unit 40... Normal button 50... Image display device 50a... Display screen 53... Frame lamp 54... Board lamp 57... Illumination display device 57d... LED for display
100 Game control board 101 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control board 121 Effect control microcomputer 140 Image control board 170 Payout control board 171 Payout control microcomputer COM Meter image PY1 Pachinko game machine

Claims (4)

a game control means capable of controlling a game;
In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying,
The game control means is
When a win is determined in a win determination process in a normal game state, it is possible to control to a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to measure the number of shot balls fired by the player,
A specific measurement number based on the number of prize balls given to the player can be calculated,
The display means is
In the normal game state, there are times when the specific count number is displayed in a comprehensible form and times when the specific count number is not displayed in the comprehension mode,
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls in the normal game state, the specific count number is displayed in the comprehension mode rather than when the number of shot balls is less than the specified number of balls. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to increase the ratio of display time to be displayed. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display means is
In the normal gaming state, if the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the first specified number of balls, the specific count number is higher than the case where the number of shot balls is less than the first specified number of balls. By increasing the display time ratio displayed in the comprehension mode,
When the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the second specified number of balls, which is greater than the first specified number of balls, in the normal gaming state, the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than the first specified number of balls, and A gaming machine characterized in that a display time ratio for displaying the specific count number in the comprehension mode is set larger than when the number of balls is less than the second specified number. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display means is
In the normal game state, if the number of shot balls is equal to or greater than a certain number of balls, which is less than the specified number of balls, the specific count number may be displayed in the comprehension mode,
The game machine is characterized in that when the number of shot balls is less than the fixed number of balls in the normal game state, the specific count number is not displayed in the grasping mode. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The game control means is
A gaming machine characterized by controlling a game to be unexecutable based on the fact that the specific count number is greater than or equal to a predetermined reference number.

Images